U.S. patent application number 13/954491 was filed with the patent office on 2013-11-28 for device including touch-screen interface.
This patent application is currently assigned to Nintendo Co., Ltd.. The applicant listed for this patent is Nintendo Co., Ltd.. Invention is credited to Masahiro Imaizumi, Yoshihiro Matsushima.
Application Number | 20130314570 13/954491 |
Document ID | / |
Family ID | 42073089 |
Filed Date | 2013-11-28 |
United States Patent
Application |
20130314570 |
Kind Code |
A1 |
Imaizumi; Masahiro ; et
al. |
November 28, 2013 |
Device Including Touch-Screen Interface
Abstract
An example device includes at least one camera, a memory, a
processing system, and a user interface. The user interface
includes concurrently displayed first and second buttons, the first
button operable for taking a picture using the camera and the
second button operable for launching a picture editing
application.
Inventors: |
Imaizumi; Masahiro; (Kyoto,
JP) ; Matsushima; Yoshihiro; (Kyoto, JP) |
|
Applicant: |
Name |
City |
State |
Country |
Type |
Nintendo Co., Ltd. |
Kyoto |
|
JP |
|
|
Assignee: |
Nintendo Co., Ltd.
Kyoto
JP
|
Family ID: |
42073089 |
Appl. No.: |
13/954491 |
Filed: |
July 30, 2013 |
Related U.S. Patent Documents
|
|
|
|
|
|
Application
Number |
Filing Date |
Patent Number |
|
|
12531586 |
Sep 16, 2009 |
|
|
|
PCT/JP2008/067864 |
Oct 1, 2008 |
|
|
|
13954491 |
|
|
|
|
Current U.S.
Class: |
348/240.99 ;
348/222.1 |
Current CPC
Class: |
G06F 3/0488 20130101;
G06F 2200/1632 20130101; G06F 1/1677 20130101; H04N 5/232933
20180801; H04N 1/00204 20130101; H04B 5/0031 20130101; H04N 5/23216
20130101; A63F 13/2145 20140902; H04N 2201/3264 20130101; A63F
13/95 20140902; G06F 1/1647 20130101; H04N 1/00965 20130101; G06F
1/1643 20130101; G06F 1/1692 20130101; A63F 13/26 20140902; A63F
2300/204 20130101; H04N 1/2158 20130101; H04N 2101/00 20130101;
H04N 5/2252 20130101; H04N 1/2112 20130101; H04N 2201/0084
20130101; G06F 3/03545 20130101; A63F 13/10 20130101; G06F 3/167
20130101; A63F 2300/1081 20130101; H04N 5/225 20130101; A63F
2300/1087 20130101; H04N 2201/216 20130101; G06F 1/1686 20130101;
G06F 1/1616 20130101; G06F 1/1656 20130101; H04N 5/23293 20130101;
A63F 13/213 20140902; H04N 1/2129 20130101; A63F 13/215 20140902;
A63F 2300/301 20130101 |
Class at
Publication: |
348/240.99 ;
348/222.1 |
International
Class: |
H04N 5/225 20060101
H04N005/225 |
Claims
1: A device comprising: at least one camera; a memory; a processing
system; and a user interface, wherein the user interface comprises
concurrently displayed first and second buttons, the first button
operable for taking a picture using the camera and the second
button operable for launching a picture editing application.
2: The device according to claim 1, wherein the launching of the
picture editing application displays a picture stored in the
memory
3: The device according to claim 2, wherein the second button
comprises a thumbnail corresponding to the stored picture.
4: The device according to claim 1, wherein the user interface
further comprises a third button displayed concurrently with the
first and second buttons, the third button operable for switching
from one camera to another.
5: The device according to claim 1, further comprising: a
microphone.
6: The device according to claim 1, further comprising: wireless
communication circuitry.
7: The device according to claim 1, wherein the at least one camera
comprises first and second oppositely facing cameras.
8: The device according to claim 7, wherein the user interface
further comprises a third button displayed concurrently with the
first and second buttons, the third button operable for switching
between the first and second cameras.
9: The device according to claim 1, wherein the user interface
further comprises a slider control displayed concurrently with the
first and second buttons, the slider operable for varying a zoom of
an image captured by the at least one camera.
10: The device according to claim 9, wherein the slider control
comprises indicia arranged at each end thereof.
11: The device according to claim 1, wherein the first button is
horizontally centered.
12: The device according to claim 1, wherein the user interface
further displays a real time image captured by the at least one
camera.
13: The device according to claim 1, wherein the user interface
comprises a touchscreen.
14: A non-transitory computer readable medium storing a program
which, when executed by a processing system of a device including
at least one camera, causes the device to perform operations
comprising: concurrently displaying first and second buttons, the
first button operable for taking a picture using the camera and the
second button operable for launching a picture editing
application.
15: The non-transitory computer readable medium according to claim
14, wherein the launching of the picture editing application
displays a picture stored in the memory.
16: The non-transitory computer readable medium according to claim
15, wherein the second button comprises a thumbnail corresponding
to the stored picture.
17: The non-transitory computer readable medium according to claim
14, wherein the operations further comprise: displaying,
concurrently with the first and second buttons, a third button
operable for switching from one camera to another.
Description
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
[0001] This application is a divisional of application Ser. No.
12/531,586, filed Sep. 16, 2009, which is the national stage of
PCT/JP2008/067864, filed Oct. 1, 2008. The contents of each of
these applications are incorporated herein in their entirety.
BACKGROUND AND SUMMARY
[0002] The present invention relates to an information processing
device, an information processing system, and a launch program and
a storage medium storing the same. More particularly, the present
invention relates to a configuration capable of providing a
photographing function and/or a voice and sound obtaining
function.
[0003] For example, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2006-311224
(Patent Document 1) discloses a portable telephone as a prior
portable information processing device having a photographing
function. This portable telephone adopts foldable arrangement, in
which a display screen is provided on an inner surface of each of
two housings. In this portable phone, two cameras serving as image
pick-up means are provided in an outer surface and an inner surface
of an upper housing, respectively.
[0004] In addition, a portable instrument described in Japanese
Patent Laying-Open No. 2004-274304 (Patent Document 2) has a camera
and a microphone, in which a screen is provided on each of two
surfaces of a housing (casing).
[0005] Moreover, for example, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.
2007-195830 (Patent Document 3) also discloses an information
processing device including two housings that are foldably
connected to each other as a portable information processing device
adopting foldable arrangement. This information processing device
has a display screen on an inner surface of each housing (which is
a surface located inside when the information processing device is
folded) (two display screens in total).
[0006] Further, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2001-142564 (Patent
Document 4) discloses information equipment containing a camera.
This information equipment includes a body unit and a display unit
pivotably connected to each other by a hinge block. In this
information equipment, the camera is arranged in the hinge
block.
[0007] In addition, prior arts as listed below have been known.
[0008] Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.
2006-311224 [0009] Patent Document 2: Japanese Patent Laying-Open
No. 2004-274304 [0010] Patent Document 3: Japanese Patent
Laying-Open No. 2007-195830 [0011] Patent Document 4: Japanese
Patent Laying-Open No. 2001-142564 [0012] Patent Document 5:
Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 04-156791 [0013] Patent Document 6:
Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 06-276478 [0014] Patent Document 7:
Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 01-297986 [0015] Patent Document 8:
Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2002-125176 [0016] Patent Document
9: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2004-320091 [0017] Patent
Document 10: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2003-333149 [0018]
Patent Document 11: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-184060
[0019] Patent Document 12: Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.
2007-201727 [0020] Patent Document 13: Japanese Patent Laying-Open
No. 09-247634 [0021] Patent Document 14: Japanese Patent
Laying-Open No. 10-341388 [0022] Patent Document 15: Japanese
Patent Laying-Open No. 2000-56756 [0023] Non-Patent Document 1:
"Chotto Shot Camera Instruction Manual," Sony Computer
Entertainment Inc., Nov. 2, 2006
[0024] In the portable instruments disclosed in Japanese Patent
Laying-Open No. 2006-311224 (Patent Document 1) and Japanese Patent
Laying-Open No. 2004-274304 (Patent Document 2), however, the
camera serving as the image pick-up means and the microphone
serving as the audio input means have not been arranged at
positions suitable for the photographing function and the voice and
sound obtaining function, respectively.
[0025] In addition, the information processing device disclosed in
Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2007-195830 (Patent Document 3) has
not at all taken into account the photographing function, and the
information equipment disclosed in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.
2001-142564 (Patent Document 4) has not at all taken into account
the voice and sound obtaining function.
[0026] Another problem is as follows. In a configuration to cause a
computer to execute various programs, various storage media storing
programs have been proposed.
[0027] Here, none of the prior arts discloses or suggests a concept
to execute in coordination a program stored in a storage medium
embedded in a computer main body (information processing device)
and a program stored in a storage medium attached to the
computer.
[0028] Yet another problem is as follows. In a configuration to
provide a user with a menu screen for selecting a program to be
launched from among a plurality of application programs (what is
called a launcher function), none of the prior arts discloses or
suggests a concept to simultaneously provide a function other than
the launcher function.
[0029] The present invention was made to solve at least one of
these problems. A first object of the present invention is to
provide an information processing device having a structure
suitable for a photographing function and/or a voice and sound
obtaining function. In addition, a second object of the present
invention is to provide an information processing system capable of
executing in coordination a program stored in a storage medium
embedded in a main body and a program stored in an externally
attached storage medium. Moreover, a third object of the present
invention is to provide a launch program suitable for an
information processing device having a photographing function, and
a storage medium storing the program.
[0030] The present invention adopts the following features in order
to solve the problems above. It is noted that reference characters,
step numbers, supplementary explanations, and the like in
parentheses in this section are merely provided to facilitate
understanding of the present invention in relation to embodiments
which will be described later, rather than limiting the scope of
the present invention in any manner.
[0031] According to one aspect of the present invention, an
information processing device (10) constituted of a plurality of
housings (11, 21) so that the device can be opened and closed is
provided. The information processing device (10) includes: image
pick-up means (23) and audio input means (21C, 42) provided in a
coupling portion of the plurality of housings; storage means (34);
image pick-up data obtaining means (31, SA50) for obtaining image
pick-up data with the image pick-up means; image pick-up data
storage control means (31, SA54) for causing the storage means to
store the image pick-up data obtained by the data obtaining means;
audio data obtaining means (31, SD171) for obtaining audio data
through the audio input means; and audio data storage control means
(33, SD173) for causing the storage means to store the audio data
obtained by the audio data obtaining means.
[0032] Here, the image pick-up data includes a still image and a
moving image. Moreover, arrangement allowing opening and closing
includes not only a foldable type which will be described later but
also a sliding type, a rotatable type, and a combination thereof.
The information processing device in the subject application can be
in various states between a state in which a prescribed surface of
at least one housing is hidden by another housing and a state in
which the prescribed surface thereof is exposed, as a result of
folding, sliding, and rotation. In particular, in an example where
a display portion is provided in the prescribed surface, the
information processing device may be in various states between a
display portion hidden state and a display portion exposed state,
as a result of folding, sliding, and rotation.
[0033] According to this aspect, the image pick-up means (23) and
the audio input means (21C, 42) are provided in the coupling
portion of the plurality of housings (11, 21), so that they can
maintain substantially the same positional relation without being
affected by an angle between the housings. Thus, regardless of
usage of the information processing device, relative positional
relation of the image pick-up means (23) and the audio input means
(21C, 42) with respect to the user is maintained substantially
constant, and hence a photographing operation and/or a voice and
sound obtaining operation can always be appropriate.
[0034] In addition, according to this aspect, as the image pick-up
means (23) and the audio input means (21C, 42) are provided in the
coupling portion, the user can also perform the photographing
operation and/or the voice and sound obtaining operation by holding
only any one of the plurality of housings (11, 21) with one hand,
or perform the photographing operation and/or the voice and sound
obtaining operation in a more stable manner by holding both
housings (11, 21) with both hands. Thus, use adapted to a situation
for photographing and/or obtaining voice and sound can be
achieved.
[0035] Preferably, the information processing device (10) further
includes image pick-up data reproduction means (31, SA41) for
reproducing the image pick-up data stored in the storage means.
Thus, the image pick-up data obtained as a result of photographing
can immediately be checked.
[0036] Preferably, the information processing device (10) further
includes image pick-up data edition means (31, SA58) for editing
the image pick-up data stored in the storage means. Thus, the user
can subject the image pick-up data obtained as a result of
photographing to a desired edition operation for fun.
[0037] Preferably, the information processing device (10) further
includes audio data reproduction means (31, SD76#) for reproducing
the audio data stored in the storage means. Thus, the user can
immediately check the obtained audio data.
[0038] Preferably, the information processing device (10) further
includes audio data edition means (31, SD262) for editing the audio
data stored in the storage means. Thus, the user can subject the
obtained audio data to a desired edition operation for fun.
Preferably, the information processing device (10) further
includes: near field communication means (38); image pick-up data
transmission control means (31, SC52) for transmitting the image
pick-up data stored in the storage means to another information
processing device through the near field communication means; and
image pick-up data reception control means (31, SC53) for receiving
the image pick-up data from another information processing device
through the near field communication means and causing the storage
means to store the image pick-up data.
[0039] According to this preferred aspect, the image pick-up data
obtained as a result of photographing can be exchanged among users
having information processing devices of the same type. Thus, the
same image pick-up data can be shared in a group for fun, or the
image pick-up data obtained as a result of photographing can be
distributed to another user for fun.
[0040] Preferably, the information processing device (10) further
includes opening and closing detection means (50) for detecting
opening and closing, and each time the opening and closing
detection means detects opening and closing, the image pick-up data
reproduction means has a picked-up image displayed based on
different image pick-up data in the image pick-up data stored in
the storage means (SA73). It is noted that the picked-up image is
displayed on the display portion that can be in various states
between the hidden state and the exposed state as a result of
folding, sliding, and rotation.
[0041] According to this preferred aspect, each time the
information processing device is opened and closed, displayed image
pick-up data is varied, so that the user can look forward to an
image displayed at the time when he/she opens the information
processing device.
[0042] Preferably, the storage means further stores an image
pick-up data obtaining program (53) causing a computer representing
the information processing device to function as the image pick-up
data obtaining means and the image pick-up data storage control
means, and an audio data obtaining program (57) causing the
computer representing the information processing device to function
as the audio data obtaining means and the audio data storage
control means. The information processing device (10) further
includes launch control means (31, SA5 to SA13) for selecting any
of at least the image pick-up data obtaining program and the audio
data obtaining program and launching the selected program when the
information processing device is started up, and the launch control
means has a function (31, SA10) to obtain the image pick-up data
with the image pick-up means and cause the storage means to store
the image-pick-up data.
[0043] According to this preferred aspect, in an environment where
execution of at least the image pick-up data obtaining program (53)
and the audio data obtaining program (57) is permitted, the user
can readily select and execute a desired program by using launch
control means (31, SA5 to SA13).
[0044] In addition, according to this preferred aspect, while the
photographing function by photographing processing means is
performed, the image pick-up data obtaining program (53) can
directly be launched. Namely, as the photographing function
provided by the image pick-up data obtaining program (53) can
readily be launched from the photographing function provided by the
photographing processing means, a user who has experienced the
photographing function provided by the photographing processing
means can be led to perform the photographing function provided by
the image pick-up data obtaining program (53).
[0045] Preferably, the information processing device (10) further
includes first operation means (14I, 14J) provided on an upper
surface of one housing out of the plurality of housings, on a side
where another housing out of the plurality of housings is located
when the information processing device is opened, and the image
pick-up data recording means obtains the image pick-up data with
the image pick-up means and causes the storage means to store the
image pick-up data when the first operation means is operated.
[0046] According to this preferred aspect, the user can perform an
operation to obtain image pick-up data by operating the first
operation means (14I, 14J) with his/her hand holding the
information processing device. Namely, as the user can perform the
operation to obtain image pick-up data while he/she holds the
information processing device, the user can readily perform the
photographing operation. Therefore, arrangement more suitable for a
portable information processing device can be provided.
[0047] Preferably, the image pick-up means and the audio input
means are provided around a center of the coupling portion. Thus,
relative positional relation between the information processing
device and the user can substantially be the same in an example
where the user holds the information processing device only with
his/her right hand and in an example where the user holds the
information processing device only with his/her left hand.
[0048] Further preferably, the image pick-up means is provided in
the center of the coupling portion and the audio input means is
provided at a position offset from the center of the coupling
portion. A range of image pick-up by the image pick-up means is
determined depending on a location thereof, whereas a range of
sound collection by the audio input means is relatively great.
Therefore, by preferentially providing the image pick-up means in
the center of the coupling portion, photographing in a more
appropriate condition can be carried out.
[0049] Preferably, the information processing device (10) further
includes display means (12, 22) provided in each housing. Thus, an
image or the like picked up by the image pick-up means can also be
displayed.
[0050] Preferably, the housing is a horizontally long housing. By
adopting the horizontally long housing, arrangement is suitable for
user's eye movement.
[0051] Preferably, the information processing device (10) further
includes first and second operation means (14A to 14E) arranged on
left and right of the display means respectively in one housing out
of the plurality of housings, and first and second audio output
means (21D, 45, 47) arranged on left and right of the display means
respectively in another housing out of the plurality of
housings.
[0052] According to this preferred aspect, voice and sound or the
like obtained by the voice and sound obtaining means can be
output.
[0053] Preferably, the information processing device (10) further
includes connection means (36, 37) for removably attaching a memory
card (28, 29). Thus, the memory card in which various types of
programs, image pick-up data, or audio data have been stored can
freely be attached, so that the information processing device can
display or reproduce the data or arbitrarily store the obtained
image pick-up data or audio data. Consequently, a degree of freedom
and applications of the information processing device can
remarkably be enhanced.
[0054] Further preferably, the image pick-up data storage control
means can have the image pick-up data selectively stored in the
storage means and the memory card.
[0055] Alternatively, further preferably, the audio data storage
control means can have the audio data selectively stored in the
storage means and the memory card.
[0056] According to these features, as the image pick-up data
and/or the audio data can be stored in any storage medium depending
on the number of pieces, a type, a size, and the like thereof, a
degree of freedom for the user can be enhanced. In addition, the
memory card stores the image pick-up data and/or the audio data, so
that the image pick-up data and/or the audio data can also be
output to a device different from the information processing
device.
[0057] Preferably, the information processing device further
includes embedded storage means storing a program for causing a
computer representing the information processing device to function
as the image pick-up data obtaining means and the image pick-up
data storage control means, so that the computer representing the
information processing device can execute the program. Thus, the
information processing device alone can provide the user with the
photographing function without external attachment of a memory or
the like.
[0058] Further preferably, the information processing device reads
an application program stored in the memory card, so that a
computer representing the information processing device can execute
the application program. Thus, the information processing device
can selectively execute a wide variety of application programs
regardless of a limited capacity of the embedded storage means.
[0059] An information processing system according to another aspect
of the present invention includes: the information processing
device above; and the memory card storing as the application
program, a program for causing the computer representing the
information processing device to function as the image pick-up data
obtaining means and the image pick-up data storage control means,
in which data can be written, and the image pick-up data storage
control means can have the image pick-up data selectively stored in
any of the storage means and the memory card.
[0060] According to the information processing system according to
this aspect, as the user can have the image pick-up data
selectively stored in the embedded storage means and an externally
attached memory card, a storage medium in accordance with a
situation can be used.
[0061] An information processing system according to yet another
aspect of the present invention includes: the information
processing device above; and the memory card storing as the
application program, a program for causing the computer
representing the information processing device to function as image
pick-up data utilization processing means for utilizing the image
pick-up data stored in the storage means.
[0062] An information processing system according to yet another
aspect of the present invention includes: the information
processing device above; and the memory card storing as the
application program, a program for causing the computer
representing the information processing device to function as image
pick-up data utilization processing means for utilizing the image
pick-up data stored in the storage means and the memory card.
[0063] An information processing system according to yet another
aspect of the present invention includes: the information
processing device above; and the memory card storing as the
application program, a program for causing the computer
representing the information processing device to function as the
audio data obtaining means and the audio data storage control
means, in which data can be written, and the audio data storage
control means can have the audio data selectively stored in any of
the storage means and the memory card.
[0064] According to the information processing system according to
this aspect, as the user can have the audio data selectively stored
in the embedded storage means and an externally attached memory
card, a storage medium in accordance with a situation can be
used.
[0065] An information processing system according to yet another
aspect of the present invention includes: the information
processing device above; and the memory card storing as the
application program, a program for causing the computer
representing the information processing device to function as audio
data utilization processing means for utilizing the audio data
stored in the storage means.
[0066] An information processing system according to yet another
aspect of the present invention includes: the information
processing device above; and the memory card storing as the
application program, a program for causing a computer representing
the information processing device to function as audio data
utilization processing means for utilizing the audio data stored in
the storage means and the memory card.
[0067] The information processing device (10) above preferably
includes a plurality of connection means for removably attaching a
memory card. Thus, a plurality of memory cards of various types can
simultaneously be attached, so that the user can select a desired
program from among more application programs and execute the
selected program.
[0068] Further preferably, the connection means includes first
connection means for removably attaching a memory card (28)
complying with universal specifications and second connection means
for removably attaching a memory card (29) complying with dedicated
specifications.
[0069] According to this preferred aspect, the user can readily
exchange image pick-up data and/or audio data with another user
through a memory card complying with the universal specifications,
or readily transfer the data to another device. On the other hand,
an unauthorized operation can be prevented by storing various types
of application programs in a memory card complying with the
dedicated specifications. In addition, the memory card complying
with the dedicated specifications stores image pick-up data and/or
audio data, so that information specific to the information device
according to the present invention can together be stored and
various types of effects or information can also be displayed.
[0070] Further preferably, the image pick-up data storage control
means can have the image pick-up data selectively stored in the
storage means, the memory card complying with the universal
specifications, and the memory card complying with the dedicated
specifications.
[0071] In addition, further preferably, the audio data storage
control means can have the audio data selectively stored in the
storage means, the memory card complying with the universal
specifications, and the memory card complying with the dedicated
specifications.
[0072] According to these preferred aspects, the user can have the
obtained image pick-up data and/or audio data stored in a more
appropriate memory card, depending on contents thereof or the like.
In addition, efficiency in organization or the like of the image
pick-up data and/or the audio data can also be improved.
[0073] In addition, further preferably, reading and execution of an
application program stored in the memory card complying with the
dedicated specifications by the computer representing the
information processing device is permitted, while reading and
execution of an application program stored in the memory card
complying with the universal specifications by the computer
representing the information processing device is prohibited. Thus,
a problem caused by execution of an unauthorized application
program or the like stored in a memory card complying with the
universal specifications can be avoided.
[0074] An information processing system according to yet another
aspect of the present invention includes: the information
processing device above; and the memory card complying with the
dedicated specifications, for storing as the application program, a
program for causing the computer representing the information
processing device to function as second image pick-up data
obtaining means and second image pick-up data storage control
means, and the second image pick-up data storage control means can
have the image pick-up data selectively stored in at least one of
the storage means, the memory card complying with the universal
specifications, and the memory card complying with the dedicated
specifications.
[0075] An information processing system according to yet another
aspect of the present invention includes: the information
processing device above; and the memory card complying with the
dedicated specifications, for storing as the application program, a
program for causing the computer representing the information
processing device to function as second audio data obtaining means
and second audio data storage control means, and the second audio
data storage control means can have the audio data selectively
stored in at least one of the storage means, the memory card
complying with the universal specifications, and the memory card
complying with the dedicated specifications.
[0076] According to these aspects, as the user can have image
pick-up data and/or audio data selectively stored in the embedded
storage means and the externally attached memory card complying
with the universal specifications and memory card complying with
the dedicated specifications, a storage medium can be used in
accordance with a situation.
[0077] An information processing system according to yet another
aspect of the present invention includes: the information
processing device above; and the memory card complying with the
dedicated specifications, for storing as the application program, a
program for causing the computer representing the information
processing device to function as image pick-up data utilization
processing means for utilizing the image pick-up data stored in the
storage means, the memory card complying with the universal
specifications, and the memory card complying with the dedicated
specifications.
[0078] An information processing system according to yet another
aspect of the present invention includes: a memory card (28, 29);
and an information processing device (10) capable of reading an
application program stored in the memory card and performing
processing. The information processing device (10) includes image
pick-up means (23), embedded storage means (34), connection means
(36, 37) for removably attaching the memory card, and embedded
program storage means (901 to 908). The embedded program storage
means stores a program for causing a computer representing the
information processing device to function as first image pick-up
data obtaining means for obtaining image pick-up data with the
image pick-up means, and first image pick-up data storage control
means for causing the embedded storage means to store the image
pick-up data obtained by the image pick-up data obtaining means.
The memory card stores as the application program, a program for
causing the computer representing the information processing device
to function as second image pick-up data obtaining means for
obtaining image pick-up data with the image pick-up means, and
second image pick-up data storage control means for causing the
embedded storage means to store the image pick-up data obtained by
the image pick-up data obtaining means.
[0079] An information processing system according to yet another
aspect of the present invention includes: a memory card (28, 29);
and an information processing device capable of reading an
application program stored in the memory card and performing
processing. The information processing device (10) includes image
pick-up means (23), embedded storage means (34), connection means
(36, 37) for removably attaching the memory card, and embedded
program storage means (901 to 908). The embedded program storage
means stores a program for causing a computer representing the
information processing device to function as first image pick-up
data obtaining means for obtaining image pick-up data with the
image pick-up means, and first image pick-up data storage control
means for causing the embedded storage means to store the image
pick-up data obtained by the image pick-up data obtaining means.
The memory card stores as the application program, a program for
causing the computer representing the information processing device
to function as image pick-up data utilization processing means for
utilizing the image pick-up data stored in the embedded storage
means.
[0080] According to yet another aspect of the present invention, a
launch program (51) executed by a computer representing an
information processing device (10) having image pick-up means (23)
and capable of storing a plurality of application programs, for
selectively launching an application program desired by a user from
among the plurality of application programs is provided. The launch
program (51) causes the computer to function as: first launch
operation acceptance means (SA6, SA11) for accepting a first launch
operation for selectively launching the plurality of application
programs; first launch means (SA12) for reading, when the first
launch operation is performed, an application program selected in
the first launch operation from among the plurality of application
programs into prescribed storage means for storing a program to be
executed by the computer and launching that application program;
and photographing processing means (SA10) for performing
photographing processing for storing an image picked up by the
image pick-up means in storage means in accordance with a
prescribed photographing operation.
[0081] According to this aspect, the user can select an application
program to be executed from among the plurality of application
programs by performing the first launch operation and also can
obtain a picked-up image from photographing means by performing a
prescribed photographing operation. Therefore, the user can readily
and quickly use the photographing function even in a state prior to
launch of an application program. In addition, the photographing
processing means can be launched while the photographing function
provided by the launch program is being performed.
[0082] Preferably, the photographing processing means has a
photographing function to store the image picked up by the image
pick-up means in the storage means but does not have a function to
edit the image taken by using the photographing function.
[0083] Preferably, the photographing processing means has a
photographing function to store the image picked up by the image
pick-up means in the storage means but does not have a function to
arbitrarily view an image from among images taken by using the
photographing function.
[0084] According to these aspects, as the function to edit and/or
view an image is not provided by the photographing processing means
provided by the launch program, the user will desire use of a
photographing application program having these functions.
Consequently, the user can be led to use the photographing
application program from the photographing processing means.
[0085] Preferably, the information processing device (10) stores as
the application program, a photographing application program (53)
having a photographing function to store an image picked up by the
image pick-up means in the storage means. Thus, the user will
desire use of a more advanced photographing application program,
and the user can be led to use the photographing application
program.
[0086] Further preferably, the photographing application program
further has a function to edit a taken image.
[0087] Preferably, the photographing application program further
has a function to arbitrarily view an image from among taken
images.
[0088] Preferably, the photographing application program causes the
storage means to store a taken image.
[0089] Preferably, the launch program allows exchange of a taken
image stored in the storage means with another information
processing device.
[0090] Preferably, the photographing application program causes the
storage means to store a taken image in accordance with the
photographing operation.
[0091] Preferably, a taken image stored in the storage means is
displayed together with an image for selectively launching the
plurality of application programs (SA5).
[0092] Preferably, after a launched application program ends, a
taken image different from a previously displayed image among taken
images stored in the storage means is displayed (SA28) together
with the image for selectively launching the plurality of
application programs as a result of execution of the launch
program.
[0093] According to these aspects, as the photographing application
program can provide the user with a more sophisticated function
than the photographing processing means provided by the launch
program, appeal of the photographing application program can be
enhanced.
[0094] According to yet another aspect of the present invention, a
storage medium storing the launch program described in any
paragraph above is provided.
EFFECTS OF THE INVENTION
[0095] According to the present invention, an information
processing device having a structure suitable for a photographing
function and/or a voice and sound obtaining function can be
provided. In addition, an information processing system capable of
executing in coordination a program stored in a storage medium
embedded in a main body and a program stored in an externally
attached storage medium can be provided. Moreover, a launch program
suitable for an information processing device having a
photographing function and a storage medium storing the program can
be provided.
BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
[0096] FIG. 1 is a plan view showing appearance of an image pick-up
device according to the present embodiment.
[0097] FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing a back side of a game
device according to the present embodiment.
[0098] FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an illumination operation
of an LED of the game device according to the present
embodiment.
[0099] FIG. 4 is a diagram for illustrating an operation of a
volume button of the game device according to the present
embodiment.
[0100] FIG. 5 is a side view in a state where the game device
according to the present embodiment is opened (in an unfolded
state).
[0101] FIG. 6 is a side view in a state where the game device
according to the present embodiment is closed (in a folded
state).
[0102] FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of a lower housing shown in
FIG. 1 which is taken along the line A-A'.
[0103] FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of an upper housing shown
in FIG. 1 which is taken along the line B-B'.
[0104] FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a state where a user holds the
game device according to the present embodiment with both
hands.
[0105] FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state where the user holds
the game device according to the present embodiment with one
hand.
[0106] FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a state where the user holds
the game device according to the present embodiment lengthwise.
[0107] FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a state where the user holds
the game device according to the present embodiment lengthwise.
[0108] FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a state in which the game
device according to the present embodiment is held for use.
[0109] FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a state in which the game
device according to the present embodiment is placed for use.
[0110] FIG. 15 is a plan view showing appearance of an image
pick-up device according to a variation of the present
embodiment.
[0111] FIG. 16 is a side view in a state where the game device
according to the variation of the present embodiment is opened (in
an unfolded state).
[0112] FIG. 17 is a side view in a state where the game device
according to the variation of the present embodiment is closed (in
a folded state).
[0113] FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration
of the game device according to the present embodiment.
[0114] FIG. 19 is a diagram for illustrating a method of launching
each application program in the game device according to the
present embodiment.
[0115] FIG. 20 is a diagram showing main data stored in a main
memory of the game device according to the present embodiment.
[0116] FIG. 21 is a main flowchart showing a flow of launcher
processing in the game device according to the present
embodiment.
[0117] FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a flow of simplified
photographing processing shown in FIG. 21.
[0118] FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a menu screen in
the launcher processing in the game device according to the present
embodiment.
[0119] FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed in a photographing enabled state in the launcher
processing in the game device according to the present
embodiment.
[0120] FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed after a photographing operation in the flowchart shown in
FIG. 22 is performed.
[0121] FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed after simplified photographing processing in the
flowchart shown in FIG. 21 is performed.
[0122] FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a flow of photographing
leading processing shown in FIG. 21.
[0123] FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing details of processing at the
time of opening and closing of the game device according to the
present embodiment.
[0124] FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a change method in processing
for changing a display image in the flowchart shown in FIG. 28.
[0125] FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a flow of multifunctional
photographing processing according to the present embodiment.
[0126] FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed in multifunctional photographing processing according to
the present embodiment.
[0127] FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a flow of photograph display
mode processing shown in FIG. 30.
[0128] FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed in a photograph display mode according to the present
embodiment.
[0129] FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a flow of photographing mode
processing shown in FIG. 32.
[0130] FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed in a photographing mode according to the present
embodiment.
[0131] FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a flow of photographing
processing (No. 1) in the game device according to the present
embodiment.
[0132] FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed in photographing processing in the image pick-up device
according to the present embodiment shown in FIG. 36.
[0133] FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a flow of input image
generation processing shown in FIG. 36.
[0134] FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed in a pen mode shown in FIG. 38.
[0135] FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed in processing for displaying a stored image shown in FIG.
36.
[0136] FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a flow of photographing
processing (No. 2) in the game device according to the present
embodiment.
[0137] FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed in display processing shown in FIG. 41.
[0138] FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a flow of edition processing
shown in FIG. 41.
[0139] FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed in the pen mode in the edition processing shown in FIG.
43.
[0140] FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed in a seal mode in the edition processing shown in FIG.
43.
[0141] FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an image displayed in calendar
processing according to the present embodiment.
[0142] FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an exemplary system in
which a plurality of game devices according to the present
embodiment are connected to each other.
[0143] FIG. 48 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display (No.
1) displayed before whether the game device according to the
present embodiment serves as a transmission-end device or a
reception-end device is determined.
[0144] FIG. 49 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display (No.
1) displayed before whether the game device according to the
present embodiment serves as a transmission-end device or a
reception-end device is determined.
[0145] FIG. 50 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display
displayed in a first stage, on a transmission-end game device
according to the present embodiment and a reception-end game device
according to the present embodiment.
[0146] FIG. 51 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display
displayed in a second stage, on the transmission-end game device
according to the present embodiment and the reception-end game
device according to the present embodiment.
[0147] FIG. 52 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display
displayed in a third stage, on the transmission-end game device
according to the present embodiment and the reception-end game
device according to the present embodiment.
[0148] FIG. 53 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display
displayed in a fourth stage, on the transmission-end game device
according to the present embodiment and the reception-end game
device according to the present embodiment.
[0149] FIG. 54 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display
displayed in a fifth stage, on the transmission-end game device
according to the present embodiment and the reception-end game
device according to the present embodiment.
[0150] FIG. 55 is a diagram showing exemplary screen display
displayed when communication is disconnected, on the
transmission-end game device according to the present embodiment
and the reception-end game device according to the present
embodiment.
[0151] FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of various data
stored in a main memory in accordance with execution of an image
communication program according to the present embodiment.
[0152] FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example in which the game
device according to the present embodiment performs image
communication processing.
[0153] FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing sub routine showing detailed
operation in image transmission processing shown in FIG. 57.
[0154] FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing sub routine showing detailed
operation in image reception processing shown in FIG. 57.
[0155] FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an exemplary signal transmitted
and received between the game device serving as a transmitter
according to the present embodiment and the game device serving as
a receiver according to the present embodiment.
[0156] FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an exemplary sound selection
screen 400 in a sound function in the game device according to the
present embodiment.
[0157] FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a music reproduction
folder list selection screen according to the present
embodiment.
[0158] FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating another music reproduction
folder list selection screen according to the present
embodiment.
[0159] FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating a music file selection
screen according to the present embodiment.
[0160] FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating a reproduction operation
selection screen according to the present embodiment.
[0161] FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating processing relating to
function selection in the game device according to the present
embodiment.
[0162] FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of processing for transition to a selection function mode in FIG.
66.
[0163] FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
in a music reproduction mode.
[0164] FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of processing for search of a folder in an SD card.
[0165] FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
for generating a folder list.
[0166] FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of processing for determining a folder name.
[0167] FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a specific example
illustrating folder search processing.
[0168] FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of processing for selecting a music file.
[0169] FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating sub routine processing of
processing for reproducing a music file.
[0170] FIG. 75 is an enlarged view of a volume setting icon.
[0171] FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of volume setting processing according to the present
embodiment.
[0172] FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating another example of the
volume setting icon.
[0173] FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a function to change a
reproduction speed or a key by selecting a speed and key adjustment
icon.
[0174] FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a function for change to
another tone by modulating a frequency of a reproduction signal,
performing filtering processing or the like, based on selection of
a tone adjustment icon.
[0175] FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a case where sound effect
output from a speaker or the like is changed in response to a
user's operation of an R button and an L button for selecting a
sound effect selection icon.
[0176] FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating visualizer display
processing according to the present embodiment.
[0177] FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of the visualizer display processing.
[0178] FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating another visualizer display
screen.
[0179] FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating yet another visualizer
display screen.
[0180] FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating a flow when a headphone is
sensed according to the present embodiment.
[0181] FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating sleep processing in a
case where a game device 10 is folded to a folded position.
[0182] FIG. 87 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
in a sleep music reproduction mode.
[0183] FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating an automatic recording
mode according to the present embodiment.
[0184] FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of recording processing according to the present embodiment.
[0185] FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of processing for storing recording data.
[0186] FIG. 91 is a flowchart of an automatic reproduction mode
according to the present embodiment.
[0187] FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of setting processing according to the present embodiment.
[0188] FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating a setting screen according
to the present embodiment.
[0189] FIG. 94 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
in a microphone recording and reproduction mode.
[0190] FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating a recording data file list
selection screen according to the present embodiment.
[0191] FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating a recording data
reproduction operation selection screen.
[0192] FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating sub routine processing of
processing for reproducing a recording data file.
[0193] FIG. 98 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
(No. 1) of processing for creating a recording data file.
[0194] FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating a recording start screen
according to the present embodiment.
[0195] FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
(No. 2) of processing for creating a recording data file.
[0196] FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating a recording data file
color designation screen according to the present embodiment.
[0197] FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating a favorite folder
selection screen according to the present embodiment.
[0198] FIG. 103 is a diagram for illustrating a storage medium that
can be used in the game device according to the present
embodiment.
DESCRIPTION OF THE REFERENCE SIGNS
[0199] 10 game device; 11 lower housing; 12 lower LCD; 13 touch
panel; 21 upper housing; 22 upper LCD; 23 inner camera; and 25
outer camera.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EXAMPLE EMBODIMENTS
[0200] An embodiment of the present invention will be described in
detail with reference to the drawings. It is noted that the same or
corresponding elements in the drawings have the same reference
characters allotted and description thereof will not be
repeated.
1. Overview
[0201] A portable game device 10 according to one embodiment of the
present invention will be described hereinafter.
[0202] Game device 10 according to the present embodiment has image
pick-up means (camera), and functions also as an image pick-up
device. Representatively, game device 10 can pick up an image of a
subject with the image pick-up means, display the image obtained as
a result of image pick-up on a screen, store data of the picked-up
image, and transmit to and receive from another device data of the
picked-up image.
[0203] In addition, game device 10 according to the present
embodiment is typically provided as a computer including operation
means such as a CPU and a memory, and it can execute various
application programs relating to image processing or information
processing. By executing such a program, game device 10 also
functions as an image processing device or an information
processing device. Naturally, game device 10 according to the
present embodiment can also execute various game programs.
[0204] Namely, though any computer system may execute the program
according to the present invention, a configuration in which game
device 10 executes the program according to the present invention
will be illustrated in the present embodiment. It is noted that
functions provided by the program according to the present
invention may be implemented by a hardware circuit in a part or in
its entirety.
2. Definition of Terms
[0205] Obtaining image data from the image pick-up means (camera)
is herein referred to as "image pick-up," and storage of picked-up
image data is referred to as "photographing".
3. Appearance
[0206] <Overall Appearance>
[0207] FIG. 1 is a plan view showing appearance of game device 10
according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a perspective
view showing a back surface side of game device 10 according to the
present embodiment.
[0208] Referring to FIGS. 1 and 2, game device 10 according to the
present embodiment is representatively a foldable portable game
device. FIG. 1 shows a state where game device 10 is opened (opened
state). Normally, a user uses game device 10 in the opened state
and the user stores game device 10 in a closed state when he/she
does not use game device 10. Therefore, game device 10 is
preferably configured to have such a size as being held by the user
with both hands or one hand, even when game device 10 is
opened.
[0209] As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, game device 10 includes two
housings of a lower housing 11 and an upper housing 21. Lower
housing 11 and upper housing 21 are connected to each other so that
the game device can be opened or closed (foldable). In other words,
shaft portions 11A shown in FIG. 1 are provided at opposing ends of
an upper side (a side on a positive side of an x-axis shown in the
drawing) of lower housing 11 in a left-right direction (in a y
direction shown in the drawing) (shaft portions 11A are
structurally integral with lower housing 11). Further, a shaft
portion 21A shown in FIG. 1 is provided in a central portion of a
lower side (a side on a negative side of the x-axis shown in the
drawing) of upper housing 21 in the left-right direction (in the y
direction shown in the drawing) (shaft portion 21A is structurally
integral with upper housing 21). Shaft portions 11A and shaft
portion 21A are connected to each other by a hinge provided therein
in a manner pivotable about an axis in the left-right direction.
Thus, lower housing 11 and upper housing 21 are connected to each
other in a manner pivotable about the axis in the left-right
direction.
[0210] In the present embodiment, housings 11 and 21 each have a
horizontally long shape (namely, a dimension of each housing in a
lateral direction is greater than that in a vertical direction) and
typically have a rectangular shape. Further, housings 11 and 21
each have a plate-like shape (namely, a length in a thickness
direction is shorter than those in vertical and lateral
directions). Further, upper housing 21 and lower housing 11 each
have a thin plate-like shape. Preferably, upper housing 21 is
smaller in thickness than lower housing 11. Lower housing 11 and
upper housing 21 are pivotably connected to each other at long
sides thereof.
[0211] In an alternative embodiment, game device 10 may be formed
of one housing, instead of a foldable type.
[0212] 9 2 As shown in FIG. 1, game device 10 includes two display
devices of an upper LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) 22 and a lower LCD
12. Upper LCD 22 is disposed in an inner surface of upper housing
21 (which is a surface located on the inside of game device 10 in a
closed state) and lower LCD 12 is disposed in an inner surface of
lower housing 11.
[0213] Though an LCD is used as a display device in the present
embodiment, any other display devices such as a display device
using EL (Electro Luminescence) may be used. In addition, game
device 10 can include a display device of any resolution. Though a
case where game device 10 includes two display devices is described
by way of example in the present embodiment, in an alternative
embodiment, the number of display devices in the game device is not
particularly limited.
[0214] <Lower Housing>
[0215] A configuration provided in lower housing 11 of game device
10 will now be described.
[0216] As described above, game device 10 includes lower LCD 12.
Lower LCD 12 has a horizontally long shape, and is arranged such
that a long side direction thereof corresponds to a long side
direction of lower housing 11. In addition, lower LCD 12 is
accommodated in lower housing 11. Further, lower LCD 12 is provided
in the inner surface of lower housing 11. Thus, by closing game
device 10 when it is not used, a screen of lower LCD 12 can be
prevented from getting dirty and being damaged.
[0217] The inner surface of lower housing 11 is formed to be
substantially planar. At a center of the inner surface of lower
housing 11, an opening 11B is formed for exposing lower LCD 12. On
the left side of opening 11B (on the negative side of the y-axis
shown in the drawing), an opening 11C is formed, and on the right
side of opening 11B, openings 11D are formed. Openings 11C and 11D
are for exposing key tops (upper surfaces of buttons 14A to 14E).
The screen of lower LCD 12 accommodated in lower housing 11 is
exposed through opening 11B and the key tops are exposed through
openings 11C and 11D.
[0218] Thus, in the inner surface of lower housing 11, non-screen
areas (dotted-line areas A1 and A2 shown in FIG. 1, specifically,
areas for arranging buttons 14A to 14D; button arrangement areas)
are provided on opposing sides of opening 11B provided at the
center of the inner surface of lower housing 11 for lower LCD 12.
Each of the button arrangement areas is designed to have a
dimension of 15 mm or more (preferably 20 mm or more, more
preferably 30 to 40 mm) in the lateral direction (in the y
direction shown in the drawing).
[0219] Buttons 14A to 14K and a touch panel 13 are provided as an
input device in lower housing 11. As shown in FIG. 1, among buttons
14A to 14K, a direction input button 14A, a button 14B, a button
14C, a button 14D, a button 14E, a power button 14F, a start button
14G, and a select button 14H are provided on the inner surface of
lower housing 11. Here, the inner surface means the inner side when
upper housing 21 and lower housing 11 are folded.
[0220] Direction input button 14A is used, for example, for a
selection operation, and buttons 14B to 14E, start button 14G, and
select button 14H are used, for example, for an enter operation or
a cancel operation. Power button 14F is used for turning on/off the
power of game device 10.
[0221] In the present embodiment, direction input button 14A and
power button 14F are provided on one side (left side in FIG. 1) of
lower LCD 12 provided around the center of lower housing 11, and
buttons 14B to 14E are provided on the other side (right side in
FIG. 1) of lower LCD 12. As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17(c), power
button 14F may be provided on a right side surface of lower housing
11.
[0222] Direction input button 14A has a cross shape, and is about
20 mm in length and width. Direction input button 14A is provided
such that a center thereof is located in a position distant from
the left end of lower housing 11 by about 20 mm and from the lower
end of lower housing 11 by about 40 mm.
[0223] Power button 14F has a circular shape, and is provided such
that a center thereof is located in a position distant from the
left end of lower housing 11 by about 25 mm and from the lower end
of lower housing 11 by about 10 mm.
[0224] Each of buttons 14B to 14E has a circular shape and a radius
of approximately 5 mm. Button 14B is provided such that a center
thereof is located in a position distant from the right end of
lower housing 11 by about 10 mm and from the lower end of lower
housing 11 by about 40 mm. Button 14C is provided such that a
center thereof is located in a position distant from the right end
of lower housing 11 by about 20 mm and from the lower end of lower
housing 11 by about 40 mm. Button 14D is provided such that a
center thereof is located in a position distant from the right end
of lower housing 11 by about 20 mm and from the lower end of lower
housing 11 by about 50 mm. Button 14E is provided such that a
center thereof is located in a position distant from the right end
of lower housing 11 by about 25 mm and from the lower end of lower
housing 11 by about 45 mm.
[0225] Direction input button 14A and buttons 14B to 14E are used
for performing various operations (which will be described later)
on game device 10.
[0226] In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, an L button 14I is provided
at a left end portion of an upper surface of lower housing 11 and
an R button 14J is provided at a right end portion of the upper
surface of lower housing 11. L button 14I and R button 14J are
used, for example, for performing a photographing instruction
operation (shutter operation).
[0227] In addition, a volume button 14K is provided on a left side
surface of lower housing 11. Volume button 14K is used for
adjusting a volume of a speaker included in game device 10. In
addition, in the present embodiment, volume button 14K is used also
for adjusting brightness of upper LCD 22 and lower LCD 12 by being
operated together with select button 14H. Such an operation will be
described later.
[0228] As shown in FIG. 1, game device 10 further includes touch
panel 13 as another input device in addition to operation buttons
14A to 14I. Touch panel 13 is attached to the screen of lower LCD
12. Touch panel 13 may be of any type such as a resistive film
type, an optical type (infrared type), or a capacitive coupling
type. Touch panel 13 used in the present embodiment has the same
resolution (detection accuracy) as that of lower LCD 12, however,
resolution of touch panel 13 and resolution of lower LCD 12 may not
necessarily be equal to each other. In addition, a touch panel
based on any principles may be employed as the touch panel in the
present embodiment, so long as such a device can detect a contact
coordinate on a screen.
[0229] As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, in the right side surface of
lower housing 11, an insertion opening 17 is provided. Insertion
opening 17 can accommodate a touch pen 27 used for performing an
operation on touch panel 13. An input to touch panel 13 is usually
provided by using touch pen 27, however, in addition to touch pen
27, a finger of the user can be used for operating touch panel
13.
[0230] In the right side surface of lower housing 11, an insertion
opening is provided for accommodating a memory card 28. Inside the
insertion opening, a connector (not shown) is provided for
electrically connecting game device 10 and memory card 28 to each
other. Memory card 28 is removably attached to the connector.
[0231] Memory card 28 is based on universal specifications as
defined by any standardization organization, and representatively
implemented by an SD (Secure Digital) memory card. Memory card 28
contains a non-volatile rewritable memory, and it is used, for
example, for storing (saving) an image picked up by game device 10
or for reading an image generated in another device into game
device 10. Alternatively, memory card 28, for example, stores in
advance a music file which is music data, and reproduction
processing can be performed by reading the music file into game
device 10. Some kind of program may be stored in memory card 28
through a personal computer or the like, however, such a program
cannot be executed in game device 10.
[0232] Further, in the upper surface of lower housing 11, an
insertion opening (shown with a chain-dotted line in FIG. 1) is
provided for accommodating a memory card 29. Inside the insertion
opening as well, a connector (not shown) is provided for
electrically connecting game device 10 and memory card 29 to each
other.
[0233] Memory card 29 is preferably based on specifications
dedicated for game device 10 according to the present embodiment.
Namely, memory card 29 is designed to have a size different from
that of a memory card complying with the universal specifications.
Memory card 29 is a storage medium storing an image communication
program, a game program or the like, and it is removably attached
to the insertion opening provided in lower housing 11. In addition,
memory card 29 may also store a selected application program which
will be described later. An application program stored in memory
card 29 is read into a main memory 32 and executed by a CPU 31 when
execution of the application program is selected with a method as
will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.
[0234] Though memory card 29 may contain an ROM and store a program
in the ROM, memory card 29 may contain a non-volatile rewritable
memory so that data can be written therein by game device 10.
[0235] As shown in FIG. 1, three LEDs 15A to 15C are disposed in a
left-hand-side portion of shaft portion 11A of lower housing 11
(LEDs 15A to 15C may be disposed in a right-hand-side portion of
shaft portion 11A as shown in FIG. 15). An illumination operation
of these LEDs 15A to 15C will be described later.
[0236] <Upper Housing>
[0237] Meanwhile, a feature for picking up an image (a camera) and
a feature for displaying the picked-up image (a display device) are
provided in upper housing 21. A feature provided in upper housing
21 will be described hereinafter.
[0238] As shown in FIG. 1, game device 10 includes upper LCD 22.
Upper LCD 22 is accommodated in upper housing 21. Upper LCD 22 has
a horizontally long shape, and is arranged such that a long side
direction thereof corresponds to a long side direction of upper
housing 21. Upper LCD 22 is provided in the inner surface of upper
housing 21 (the surface located on the inside of game device 10 in
the closed state). Thus, by closing game device 10 when it is not
used, a screen of upper LCD 22 can be prevented from getting dirty
and being damaged. Similarly to lower LCD 12, a display device of
any other type having any resolution may be used instead of upper
LCD 22. Though details will be described later, upper LCD 22 mainly
displays thereon an image concerning an image pick-up operation,
such as an image for explaining a manner of operation to the user.
In an alternative embodiment, a touch panel may be provided also on
upper LCD 22.
[0239] Game device 10 includes two cameras 23 and 25 as image
pick-up means. Each of cameras 23 and 25 is accommodated in upper
housing 21. As shown in FIG. 1, inner camera 23 is disposed in the
inner surface of upper housing 21. On the other hand, as shown in
FIG. 2, outer camera 25 is disposed in a surface opposite to the
surface in which inner camera 23 is disposed, that is, in the outer
surface of upper housing 21 (a surface located on the outside of
game device 10 in the closed state).
[0240] Though a case where game device 10 includes two cameras as
the image pick-up means is described by way of example in the
present embodiment, game device 10 may include one camera, or three
or more cameras. Further, a camera may be disposed at any
position.
[0241] As shown in FIG. 2, a fourth LED 26 is disposed in the outer
surface of upper housing 21. Fourth LED 26 is disposed around outer
camera 25 (on a right side of outer camera 25 in the present
embodiment; and above outer camera 25 in the opened state in the
example shown in FIG. 17(b)). Fourth LED 26 is turned on at the
time when photographing by inner camera 23 or outer camera 25 is
performed (when the shutter button is pressed). Further, fourth LED
26 illuminates while a moving picture is taken by inner camera 23
or outer camera 25.
[0242] Such an operation of fourth LED 26 can notify a subject that
photographing is performed (being performed) by game device 10.
[0243] In addition, an external audio output terminal 19 (shown
with a dashed line in FIG. 1) in which a plug provided in equipment
for external audio output (such as a headphone, an earphone and a
bone conduction headphone) is to be inserted is provided in a lower
surface of lower housing 11. In the inside of this external audio
output terminal 19, a jack 62 for electrically connecting game
device 1 and the equipment for external audio output with each
other is provided. The equipment for external audio output may be
equipment for both ears such as a headphone or equipment for one
ear such as an earphone, and a plug of the equipment for external
audio output is removably attached to a jack. Though a headphone is
representatively described hereinafter as the equipment for
external audio output, equipment such as an earphone may also be
employed.
[0244] Game device 10 includes a microphone (a microphone 43 shown
in FIG. 18) as an audio input device. Microphone 43 is accommodated
in upper housing 21. In the present embodiment, microphone 43 is
arranged in shaft portion 21A of upper housing 21. More
specifically, the microphone is attached around inner camera 23 (in
the drawing, on the side on the y-axis), and further specifically,
it is arranged on the side of inner camera 23 at a distance of 10
mm therefrom (in the drawing, on the side in the positive direction
of the y-axis).
[0245] In addition, in the inner surface of upper housing 21, a
microphone hole 21C is provided to allow the microphone to sense
sound outside game device 10. Microphone hole 21C is provided in
shaft portion 21A of upper housing 21. If microphone hole 21C is
provided in a coupling portion of lower housing 11 and upper
housing 21, it is preferably provided at a position offset from the
center by a prescribed distance.
[0246] Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 15, the microphone may be
accommodated in lower housing 11. In FIG. 15, a microphone hole 16
is provided in the inner surface of lower housing 11, specifically
in a lower left portion of the inner surface of lower housing 11 (a
button arrangement area corresponding to a dotted-line area A1).
The microphone is arranged in the vicinity of microphone hole 16 in
lower housing 11.
[0247] A position where microphone 43 is accommodated and a
position of microphone hole 16 do not necessarily have to be in the
coupling portion above, and for example, microphone 43 may be
accommodated in lower housing 11 and microphone hole 16 may be
provided in lower housing 11 in correspondence with the position of
accommodation of microphone 43. Alternatively, microphone hole 16
may be provided adjacent to external output terminal 19 for
insertion of a plug provided in a headphone.
[0248] <Indication by Indicator and Operation Example>
[0249] FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an illumination operation
of LED 15A to LED 15C of game device 10 according to the present
embodiment.
[0250] Referring to FIG. 3(a), game device 10 can establish
wireless communication with other equipment as will be described
later, and a first LED 15A illuminates when wireless communication
is established. Specifically, first LED 15A illuminates whenever
communication with other equipment is enabled. Meanwhile, first LED
15A blinks while communication with other equipment is in progress
(or data transmission is in progress).
[0251] Referring to FIG. 3(b), a second LED 15B illuminates while
game device 10 is being charged.
[0252] Referring to FIG. 3(c), a third LED 15C illuminates when the
power of game device 10 is turned on. In addition, an illumination
state of third LED 15C is varied depending on a state of charge of
a battery (battery pack) mounted on game device 10. Specifically,
third LED 15C illuminates in blue when a battery level is
relatively high, while it illuminates in red when the battery level
is relatively low. In addition, when the battery level is very low,
third LED 15C blinks in red.
[0253] Thus, three LEDs 15A to 15C can notify the user of a state
of communication establishment, a state of charge, a battery level,
and a state of power on/off of game device 10.
[0254] FIG. 4 is a diagram for illustrating an operation of volume
button 14K of game device 10 according to the present embodiment.
In game device 10, a volume can be set in a plurality of steps (for
example, in five steps), and as shown in FIG. 4(a), the volume is
increased in a stepwise fashion each time a "+" (plus) side of
volume button 14K is pressed. On the other hand, the volume is
lowered in a stepwise fashion each time a "-" (minus) side of
volume button 14K is pressed.
[0255] Meanwhile, sound effect (shutter sound) or the like output
from a speaker at the time when photographing by inner camera 23 or
outer camera 25 is carried out (when the shutter button is pressed)
is preferably set at a prescribed volume, independently of volume
setting.
[0256] In addition, when game device 100 is in a sleep state which
will be described later, only lowering in the volume is preferably
permitted with regard to the operation of volume button 14K.
[0257] Referring to FIG. 4(b), when volume button 14K is operated
while select button 14H has been pressed, brightness of upper LCD
22 and lower LCD 12 is changed. Namely, each time the "+" (plus)
side of volume button 14K is pressed while select button 14H has
been pressed, display on upper LCD 22 and lower LCD 12 becomes
brighter in a stepwise fashion. On the other hand, each time the
"-" (minus) side of volume button 14K is pressed while select
button 14H has been pressed, display on upper LCD 22 and lower LCD
12 becomes darker in a stepwise fashion.
4. Detailed Structure and Usage
[0258] A more detailed structure of game device 10 according to the
present embodiment and usage of game device 10 by the user will be
described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 14 in addition to FIGS. 1
and 2 above.
[0259] FIG. 5 shows a side view of game device 10 in the opened
state (unfolded state), and FIG. 6 shows four orthogonal views of
game device 10 in the closed state (folded state). Namely, FIG.
6(a) shows a left side view of game device 10 in the closed state,
FIG. 6(b) shows a top view of game device 10, FIG. 6(c) shows a
right side view of game device 10, and FIG. 6(d) shows a back view
of game device 10.
[0260] Game device 10 according to the present embodiment is small
enough in size to be held with both hands or one hand in the opened
state. For example, game device 10 can approximately be 50 to 100
mm long and 100 to 200 mm wide with a thickness of 10 to 40 mm in
the closed state, and can approximately be 100 to 200 mm long in
the opened state. It is noted that a direction of length
corresponds to the x direction in the drawings, a direction of
width corresponds to the y direction in the drawings, and a
direction of thickness corresponds to the z direction in the
drawings.
[0261] More preferably, game device 10 can be 60 to 90 mm long and
100 to 150 mm wide with a thickness of 15 to 30 mm in the closed
state, and can approximately be 120 to 160 mm long in the opened
state.
[0262] Further preferably, game device 10 can be 70 to 80 mm long
and 100 to 150 mm wide with a thickness of 15 to 25 mm in the
closed state, and can approximately be 135 to 155 mm long in the
opened state.
[0263] It is noted that the thickness of lower housing 11 is
preferably larger than that of upper housing 21. Further, the
length of game device 10 in the opened state may be substantially
the same as the width thereof. A dimension of lower housing 11 in a
direction of length is desirably set such that a second joint of an
index finger is located around an upper corner of lower housing 11
when a lower corner of lower housing 11 is supported by a center of
a palm.
[0264] FIG. 7 shows a cross-sectional view of the lower housing
shown in FIG. 1 which is taken along the line A-A', and FIG. 8
shows a cross-sectional view of the upper housing shown in FIG. 1
which is taken along the line B-B'. As shown in FIG. 7, on the
inner surface of lower housing 11 (the surface located on the
inside of game device 10 in the closed state), shaft portion 11A is
provided to project in the direction perpendicular to the inner
surface (typically, shaft portion 11A is structurally integral with
the lower housing). Shaft portions 11A are provided at respective
opposing ends in the left-right direction (in the y direction in
the drawing) (see FIG. 1). As shown in FIG. 15, each of shaft
portions 11A may be provided in a position slightly inward of the
end with respect to the left-right direction.
[0265] As shown in FIG. 8, in a lower surface of upper housing 21
(a side surface on the negative side of the x-axis in the drawing),
shaft portion 21A is provided to project in the direction
perpendicular to the lower surface (shaft portion 21A is
structurally integral with the upper housing). Shaft portion 21A is
provided to project in the direction perpendicular to the lower
surface as well as to project also in the direction perpendicular
to the inner surface of upper housing 21 (a surface located on the
inside of game device 10 in the closed state). Shaft portion 21A is
provided at the center of the lower end of upper housing 21 in the
left-right direction (see FIG. 1). Shaft portion 11A and shaft
portion 21A are pivotably connected to each other by a hinge
provided therein, thereby forming an integral projection portion.
As constructed above, the projection portion projects from the
inner surface of each of housings 11 and 21 (see FIG. 5).
[0266] Since shaft portion 11A is provided to project from the
inner surface of lower housing 11 and shaft portion 21A is provided
to project downwardly from upper housing 21, a step is formed
between an outer surface of lower housing 11 (a surface located on
the outside of game device 10 in the closed state) and an outer
surface of upper housing 21 by the thickness of lower housing 11 in
a state where two housings 11 and 21 are connected to each other
(see FIG. 5).
[0267] As described above, upper housing 21 is pivotably supported
by a part of an upper portion of lower housing 11. Thus, game
device 10 can be in the closed state (a state where an angle
between lower housing 11 and upper housing 21 is about 0.degree.
(see FIG. 5)) or in the opened state (a state where the angle
between lower housing 11 and upper housing 21 is about 180.degree.
(see FIG. 1)). Further, in addition to the closed state and the
opened state, game device 10 in the present embodiment can maintain
an angle between lower housing 11 and upper housing 21 at any angle
ranging between the closed state and the opened state by frictional
force generated at the hinge or the like. In other words, upper
housing 21 can be stationary at any angle with respect to lower
housing 11.
[0268] Alternatively, the hinge may have a mechanism for
temporarily fixing upper housing 21 and lower housing 11 at a
prescribed angle smaller than 180.degree. with click feeling. In
other words, upper housing 21 and lower housing 11 may temporarily
be fixed in the opened state at a prescribed angle smaller than
180.degree. with click feeling. Specifically, for example, the
prescribed angle ranges from 150.degree. to 175.degree., and is
160.degree. in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment,
housings 11 and 21 can be opened up to an angle of 180.degree.,
however, in an alternative embodiment, housings 11 and 21 may be
opened only up to the prescribed angle above or up to an angle of
180.degree. or greater.
[0269] As shown in FIGS. 2, 6(a), and 6(c), volume button 14K is
provided on the left side surface of lower housing 11. Volume
button 14K is used for adjusting volume of a speaker of game device
10. As shown in FIG. 6(d), button 14J is provided at a right end of
an upper surface of lower housing 11. Button 14I is provided at a
left end of the upper surface of lower housing 11. Preferably, the
right end of button 14J extends to the right end of lower housing
11, however, it does not have to be in that way. In the former
case, design is preferably made such that a right side surface of
button 14J is substantially flush with the right side surface of
lower housing 11. Further, a back end of button 14J preferably
extends to reach a back surface of lower housing 11, however, it
does not have to be in that way. In the former case, design is
preferably made such that the back surface of button 14J is
substantially flush with the back surface of lower housing 11. It
is noted that the above is also applicable to button 14I.
[0270] Specifically, buttons 14J and 14I have a length of about 20
mm in the left-right direction and a width (a length in the
thickness direction, that is, a length in the z direction shown in
the drawing) of about 10 mm. Each of buttons 14I and 14J is used,
for example, for performing a photographing instruction operation
(a shutter operation) on game device 10. It is noted that buttons
14J and 14I preferably have a width at least 50% as large as the
thickness of lower housing 11.
[0271] Both buttons 14I and 14H may function as a shutter button.
Here, a right-handed user can use button 14J and a left-handed user
can use button 14I. Thus, game device 10 is user-friendly for
either user.
[0272] In game device 10, buttons 14I and 14J may be set to
constantly serve as valid shutter buttons, or alternatively, only
button 14J may be set as valid in the case of setting for
right-handedness and only button 14I may be set as valid in the
case of setting for left-handedness by setting game device 10 to
right-handedness or left-handedness (by having the user provide an
input for setting through a menu program or the like so that set
data is stored). Further, in an alternative embodiment, only a
single button for performing a photographing instruction operation
may be provided on the upper surface of lower housing 11.
[0273] A cover is provided on the right side surface of lower
housing 11 in such a manner that it can be opened or closed. Inside
this cover, a connector (not shown) is provided for connecting
memory card 28.
[0274] As described above, in lower housing 11, input devices
(touch panel 13 and buttons 14A to 14I) are provided for providing
an operation input to game device 10. Thus, in using game device
10, the user can hold lower housing 11 and perform an operation on
game device 10.
[0275] FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a state where the user holds
game device 10 with both hands. As shown in FIG. 9, the user holds
the side surfaces and the outer surface (the surface opposite to
the inner surface) of lower housing 11 with palms, middle fingers,
ring fingers, and little fingers of both hands in a state where
LCDs 12 and 22 face the user. By thus holding the game device, the
user can perform an operation of buttons 14A to 14E with thumbs and
perform an operation of buttons 14I and 14J with index fingers
while holding lower housing 11.
[0276] In the present embodiment, lower housing 11 is formed in the
horizontally long shape and provided with buttons on both sides of
lower LCD 12. Thus, the image pick-up device can easily be held and
operated. Further, as described above, the button arrangement areas
(dotted-line areas A1 and A2 shown in FIG. 1) are provided to have
a dimension of at least 15 mm in the lateral direction thereof.
Thus, thumbs can be prevented from being located on lower LCD 12
while lower housing 11 is held.
[0277] FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a state where the user holds
game device 10 with one hand. In providing an input to touch panel
13, as shown in FIG. 10, one hand holding lower housing 11 is
released from lower housing 11 and lower housing 11 is held only
with the other hand, thereby allowing an input to touch panel 13
with that one hand. In this case as well, a thumb holding lower
housing 11 can be prevented from being located on lower LCD 12.
[0278] Alternatively, while holding lower housing 11 with both
hands, the user can provide an input to touch panel 13 with a thumb
of one hand (a thumb of a right hand if the user is right-handed).
In this case as well, a thumb of the other hand holding lower
housing 11 (a thumb of a left hand if the user is right-handed) can
be prevented from being located on touch panel 13.
[0279] As described above, inner camera 23 is disposed in the inner
surface of upper housing 21 (see FIG. 1). On the other hand, outer
camera 25 is disposed in the surface opposite to the surface in
which inner camera 23 is disposed, that is, in the outer surface of
upper housing 21 (the surface located on the outside of game device
10 in the closed state) (see FIGS. 2, 6(b) and the like).
[0280] Thus, inner camera 23 is capable of picking up an image in a
direction in which the inner surface of upper housing 21 faces and
outer camera 25 is capable of picking up an image in a direction
opposite to an image pick-up direction of inner camera 23, that is,
in a direction in which the outer surface of upper housing 21
faces.
[0281] As described above, game device 100 according to the present
embodiment is provided with two cameras 23 and 25 such that the
image pick-up directions thereof are opposite to each other.
Therefore, the user can pick up images in two different directions
without changing a manner of holding game device 10. For example,
the user can photograph a view seen from game device 10 toward the
user with inner camera 23 as well as a view seen from game device
10 in a direction opposite to the user with outer camera 25.
[0282] In addition, according to the feature above, a photographing
direction of outer camera 25 is opposite to (180.degree. different
from) a direction in which the display screen of upper LCD 22 faces
and a photographing direction of inner camera 23 is the same as the
direction in which the display screen of upper LCD 22 faces. Thus,
since a line-of-sight direction of the user looking at the display
screen of upper LCD 22 is substantially the same as the
photographing direction of outer camera 25 when an image taken by
outer camera 25 is displayed on upper LCD 22, it is easy for the
user to recognize the photographing direction. Further, since the
line-of-sight direction of the user looking at the display screen
of upper LCD 22 is substantially opposite to the photographing
direction of inner camera 23 when an image taken by inner camera 23
is displayed on upper LCD 22, it is easy for the user to recognize
the photographing direction.
[0283] Further, inner camera 23 is disposed at a center of shaft
portion 21A formed in the lower center portion of upper housing 21.
In other words, inner camera 23 is disposed at a center of a
portion where two housings 11 and 21 are connected to each
other.
[0284] Thus, when game device 10 is in the opened state, inner
camera 23 is located between two LCDs 12 and 22 (see FIG. 1). In
other words, inner camera 23 is arranged around the center of game
device 10. It is noted that the "center of game device 10" means a
center of an operation surface of game device 10 (including the
inner surfaces of housings 11 and 21 in the opened state).
[0285] Alternatively, it can also be said that inner camera 23 is
arranged around a center in the lateral direction of LCDs 12 and
22.
[0286] In the present embodiment, since shaft portion 21A is
integral with upper housing 21 and inner camera 23 is arranged in
shaft portion 21A in a fixed manner, the photographing direction of
inner camera 23 is changed in accordance with opening and closing
of upper housing 21. Thus, change in the photographing direction
can be achieved without providing an additional mechanism for
changing the photographing direction of the camera. Further, since
inner camera 23 is arranged in the inner surface of a second
housing (on the same side of shaft portion 21A as the inner surface
of the second housing), inner camera 23 faces lower housing 11 as a
result of closing of upper housing 21. Thus, inner camera 23 can be
protected automatically by closing game device 10.
[0287] As described above, in the present embodiment, inner camera
23 is provided in shaft portion 21A such that it is arranged around
the center of the operation surface of game device 10. In an
alternative embodiment, however, inner camera 23 may be provided in
a position other than the shaft portion of lower housing 11 or
upper housing 21. For example, inner camera 23 may be provided in
the inner surface of upper housing 21, between shaft portion 21A
and upper LCD 22. When inner camera 23 is provided substantially at
the center in the left-right direction of the operation surface of
game device 10, the user can easily set a position of game device
10 at least in the left-right direction, for example, in
photographing the user himself/herself.
[0288] Here, for example, the case where inner camera 23 is
arranged at an end of the operation surface of game device 10 (for
example, at an upper end of the inner surface of upper housing 21)
is considered. In operating a portable instrument such as game
device 10, the user usually holds game device 10 such that the user
faces game device 10 for better viewing the screen.
[0289] In the case where inner camera 23 is arranged at the end of
game device 10, however, the user cannot be located within an image
pick-up range of inner camera 23 when game device 10 is held in a
usual holding position (in a position where the user faces game
device 10). For example, in the case where inner camera 23 is
arranged at an upper end of the operation surface, the image
pick-up range is slightly above the user when the user remains
holding game device 10 in the usual holding position, and hence a
face of the user cannot successfully be located within the image
pick-up range.
[0290] Thus, in the case where inner camera 23 is arranged at the
end of the operation surface of game device 10, game device 10 has
to be moved from the usual holding position such that the user is
successfully located within the image pick-up range.
[0291] On the other hand, when a view seen from game device 10
toward the user is to be photographed, the line-of-sight direction
of the user is opposite to the image pick-up direction of the
camera and game device 10 has to be held in a position different
from the usual holding position. Therefore, it is difficult for the
user to arrange game device 10 such that the user is successfully
located within the image pick-up range.
[0292] On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when game
device 10 is in the opened state, inner camera 23 is located around
the center of game device 10. Thus, when photographing the user
himself/herself with inner camera 23, the user has only to hold
game device 10 in a position in which the user faces game device
10. In other words, by holding the image pick-up device in the
usual holding position, the user is located around the center of
the image pick-up range, and hence the user is readily located
within the image pick-up range. As described above, by arranging
inner camera 23 in a position around the center of game device 10
when viewed from the user, the user is readily photographed with
the user being successfully located within the image pick-up
range.
[0293] In addition, as shown in FIG. 6(b), outer camera 25 is
arranged in an upper portion of upper housing 21 (in a portion
distant from lower housing 11 (more distant from lower housing 11
than a center of upper housing 21)) when game device 10 is in the
opened state. This is because the user holds lower housing 11 in
using game device 10, and if outer camera 25 is arranged close to
lower housing 11, a hand of the user may be located within an image
pick-up range of outer camera 25.
[0294] In the present embodiment, outer camera 25 is provided such
that a center thereof is located in a position distant from a right
end of upper housing 21 by about 20 mm and from an upper end of
upper housing 21 by about 20 mm when game device 10 is in the
opened state. Since outer camera 25 is not for photographing the
user holding game device 10, there is a low need for providing
outer camera 25 at the center of game device 10. Further, since the
user basically holds lower housing 11, it would be easier for the
user to hold game device 10 having an appropriate thickness. On the
other hand, since portability of game device 10 having a small
thickness in the folded state is high, upper housing 21 is
preferably as thin as possible. Thus, in the present embodiment,
upper LCD 22 is arranged at the center of upper housing 21 in view
of visibility and outer camera 25 is arranged in an upper portion
of upper housing 21 (that is, in an area on a back side of a
non-screen area B2 shown in FIG. 1) avoiding a position where upper
LCD 22 is arranged.
[0295] Thus, since a position where upper LCD 22 is arranged does
not overlap with that of outer camera 25, upper housing 21 can be
made thinner. Further, since the user basically holds lower housing
11, by providing outer camera 25 in upper housing 21, a finger
holding lower housing 11 can be prevented from being located within
the image pick-up range of outer camera 25.
[0296] The inner surface of upper housing 21 is formed to be
substantially planar. As shown in FIG. 1, at the center of the
inner surface of upper housing 21, an opening 21B is formed for
exposing upper LCD 22. The screen of upper LCD 22 accommodated in
upper housing 21 is exposed through opening 21B. Further, a sound
emission hole 21D is formed on each side of opening 21B. A
not-shown speaker is accommodated in upper housing 21 in the rear
of sound emission hole 21D. Sound emission hole 21D is a hole for
emitting sound from the speaker to the outside. These sound
emission holes 21D are provided on both of left and right sides of
upper LCD 22.
[0297] Thus, in the inner surface of upper housing 21, non-screen
areas (dotted-line areas B1 and B2 shown in FIG. 1, specifically an
area for arranging a speaker; a speaker arrangement area) are
provided on respective sides of opening 21B for upper LCD 22
provided at the center of the inner surface of upper housing
21.
[0298] Here, in the present embodiment, lower housing 11 and upper
housing 21 are equal in lengths (widths) in the left-right
direction thereof (in the y direction shown in the drawing).
Further, lower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22 are equal in widths in the
left-right direction and they are arranged in the same position
with respect to the left-right direction. Thus, the speaker
arrangement area is provided such that the position thereof in the
left-right direction corresponds to the position of the button
arrangement area. Similarly to the button arrangement area, the
speaker arrangement area is designed to have a dimension of 15 mm
or more (preferably 20 mm or more, more preferably approximately 30
to 40 mm; 32 mm in the present embodiment) in the lateral
direction.
[0299] In the present embodiment, regarding the left-right
direction, two sound emission holes 21D are arranged around the
centers of the speaker arrangement areas in the left-right
direction, respectively. Further, regarding an up-down direction,
sound emission hole 21D is arranged in a lower area of the speaker
arrangement area (in an area close to lower housing 11).
Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 15, the speakers and sound emission
holes 21D may be arranged at a position slightly higher than that
in FIG. 1. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, a plurality of sound
emission holes 21D (six in FIG. 15) may be provided for one
speaker.
[0300] As described above, in the present embodiment, the
non-screen area is provided in lower housing 11 and upper housing
21 in the same position with respect to the left-right direction.
Thus, game device 10 is easily held when held sideways as shown in
FIG. 9 as well as when held lengthwise (in a state where game
device 10 is rotated 90.degree. clockwise or counterclockwise
relative to the state shown in FIG. 9).
[0301] FIGS. 11 and 12 are diagrams showing a state where the user
holds game device 10 lengthwise. FIG. 11 shows a state where game
device 10 is held with a left hand, and FIG. 12 shows a state where
game device 10 is held with a right hand. A right-handed user may
rotate game device 10 90.degree. counterclockwise from the state
shown in FIG. 9, and hold game device 10 with a left hand as shown
in FIG. 11. A left-handed user may rotate game device 10 90.degree.
clockwise from the state shown in FIG. 9, and hold game device 10
with a right hand as shown in FIG. 12. In any case, the user can
hold game device 10 while touching the projection portion (shaft
portions 11A and 21A) with his/her thumb and the upper surface of
lower housing 11 with his/her index finger.
[0302] As described above, as the step is formed between the outer
surface of lower housing 11 and the outer surface of upper housing
21 (see FIG. 5), game device 10 can be held in a stable manner by
touching the step with the index finger. In addition, the shutter
button (button 14I or 14J) can easily be pressed by a dominant hand
not holding game device 10.
[0303] Since the non-screen area is provided on each side of LCDs
12 and 22 as described above, a thumb is not located on the screen
even when game device 10 is held lengthwise with either hand. In
other words, even when game device 10 is held lengthwise, game
device 10 is easily held and visibility of the screen and
operability of the touch panel are ensured.
[0304] Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the projection portion projects
from lower housing 11 further than the key tops of buttons 14A to
14E (direction input button 14A in FIG. 7). Thus, even if a thumb
holding game device 10 lengthwise is located above a button, the
user is less likely to accidentally press the button, and an
erroneous input can be prevented.
[0305] Further, since game device 10 has a dimension of 100 to 200
mm in length in the opened state, game device 10 held lengthwise
has a sufficient width substantially equal to the width of game
device 10 held sideways, and hence it is not difficult to hold the
game device.
[0306] When game device 10 is held lengthwise, the angle between
the housings may be set to the prescribed angle smaller than
180.degree.. By setting the angle between the housings to an angle
slightly smaller than 180.degree., the outer surfaces of housings
11 and 21 fit to a shape of a hand, and hence it becomes easier to
hold game device 10.
[0307] In addition, as described above, in game device 10 according
to the present embodiment, cameras 23 and 25 are provided in upper
housing 21 and a live image picked up by camera 23 or 25 can be
displayed on lower LCD 12 provided in lower housing 11. According
to this structure, when game device 10 is held for use or when game
device 10 is placed on a desk for use, it is extremely easy to
perform an edition operation on a live image while changing a
photographing direction as appropriate.
[0308] FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a state in which game device 10
is held for use. When game device 10 is held for use, as shown in
FIG. 13, the user holds lower housing 11 with one hand (a left hand
in FIG. 13). Then, as a live image is displayed on lower LCD 12,
the user performs an edition operation on the live image using
touch pen 27 with the other hand. Here, since an angle of lower
housing 11 and an angle of upper housing 21 can individually be
changed, the user can hold game device 10 with the angle of lower
housing 11 being adjusted such that the user can easily perform an
operation on the touch panel, while aiming camera 23 or 25 in upper
housing 21 at an image pick-up object.
[0309] In addition, since the user holds lower housing 11 with one
hand, the user can perform an edition operation through touch panel
13 in a stable manner. As described above, when game device 10 is
held for use, it is extremely easy to perform an edition operation
on a live image.
[0310] In addition, game device 10 is also suitable for
photographing in a state where game device 10 is placed on a stand
or the like, in addition to photographing in a state where game
device 10 is held by the user.
[0311] FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a state in which game device 10
is placed for use. Even when game device 10 is placed on a desk or
the like for use as shown in FIG. 14, it is easy for the user to
operate touch panel 13 because a live image is displayed on lower
LCD 12.
[0312] In addition, the user can place lower housing 11 on a
placement surface and adjust an angle between two housings 11 and
21 such that upper housing 21 is set at a desired angle with
respect to lower housing 11. Thus, even when the user places game
device 10, the user can perform photographing with upper housing 21
(the photographing direction of the camera) being set at any angle.
Thus, even when game device 10 is placed for use, it is extremely
easy to perform an edition operation on a live image.
[0313] Since game device 10 includes two cameras 23 and 25,
photographing in different directions can be performed by changing
a photographing camera between inner camera 23 and outer camera 25
without moving game device 10 placed on a stand. It is noted that
the photographing direction can be changed by adjusting the angle
between two housings 11 and 21 in photographing with either camera.
In addition, game device 10 may have a self-timer function with
which photographing is performed in a prescribed period of time
after the timing of pressing of the shutter button. In
photographing with the self-timer function, the user does not hold
game device 10. Therefore, ability to set the photographing
direction of the camera to any direction as in the present
embodiment is particularly convenient.
[0314] Further, in the present embodiment, two cameras 23 and 25
for image pick-up in different directions are both provided in
upper housing 21. Therefore, even when game device 10 is placed for
photographing, both of two cameras 23 and 25 can be used.
[0315] Further, in the present embodiment, since lower housing 11
is formed to have a horizontally long shape, stability in placing
game device 10 is increased and game device 10 can be less likely
to fall down.
[0316] In addition, in game device 10, an LCD for displaying a
real-time image (a live image) picked-up by camera 23 or 25 may be
switched between upper LCD 22 and lower LCD 12, for example, in
accordance with a switch instruction from the user. Here, for
example, when game device 10 is placed on a stand for use,
switching may be made to display a real-time image on lower LCD 12.
This is because, when game device 10 is placed on a stand for use,
the angle of upper housing 21 should be changed in order to adjust
the photographing direction of the camera, and hence the user can
easily view a real-time image displayed on lower LCD 12 of lower
housing 11 of which angle does not have to be changed.
[0317] In an alternative embodiment, a picked-up image may be
displayed on upper LCD 22. Since an input device (touch panel 13
and buttons 14A to 14I) for providing an operation input to game
device 10 is provided in lower housing 11, in using game device 10,
the user can provide an input to the input device while viewing a
picked-up image (an image picked up by a camera) displayed on upper
LCD 22 and holding lower housing 11.
[0318] According to the feature above, game device 10 includes the
buttons and the touch panel as input devices. Thus, game device 10
can select an appropriate input device as an input device to be
used for performing an input operation depending on a type
(characteristic) of an input operation. For example, regarding a
shutter operation, preferably, the user has actual feeling of the
operation and the operation has a prescribed stroke. Thus, the
shutter operation may be performed by using the button. Further,
regarding an operation in edition processing which will be
described later, an operation is preferably performed by using the
touch panel.
[0319] In the present embodiment, game device 10 is structured to
be foldable by pivotably connecting (coupling) lower housing 11 and
upper housing 12 to each other. In an alternative embodiment, lower
housing 11 may be coupled to upper housing 12 with another feature
or in another manner.
[0320] For example, two plate-like housings may be connected to
each other such that one of the housings is slidable or pivotable
with respect to the other housing with one being in parallel with
the other. By doing so, as in the embodiment above, the two
housings can be in an opened state and in a closed state.
[0321] Alternatively, in the embodiment above, upper housing 21 may
be structured such that shaft portion 21A and other portions
thereof are pivotable around an axis in the up-down direction.
According to this structure, only by providing one camera in upper
housing 21, the camera can easily be directed to the line-of-sight
direction of the user or a direction opposite thereto.
[0322] An image pick-up device 110 shown in FIGS. 15 to 17 is an
image pick-up device obtained by changing arrangement, the number,
a shape, or the like of some components of game device 10 according
to the present embodiment, and basic functions thereof are the same
as those of game device 10.
5. Internal Configuration of Game Device
[0323] An internal configuration of game device 10 will be
described hereinafter with reference to FIG. 18.
[0324] FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the internal
configuration of game device 10 according to the present
embodiment. As shown in FIG. 18, game device 10 includes such
electronic parts as CPU 31, main memory 32, a memory control
circuit 33, a data memory 34 for storage, a memory 35 for preset
data, memory card interfaces (memory card I/F) 36 and 37, a
wireless communication module 38, a local communication module 39,
a real time clock (RTC) 40, a power supply circuit 41, an interface
circuit (I/F circuit) 42, and a folded position detection sensor
50. These electronic parts are mounted on an electronic circuit
board and accommodated in lower housing 11 (or may be accommodated
in upper housing 21).
[0325] Though various electronic circuits and a battery mounted on
game device 10 may be accommodated in either upper housing 21 or
lower housing 11, game device 10 is preferably designed such that a
weight of lower housing 11 is greater than that of upper housing
21. Specifically, preferably, the weight of lower housing 11 ranges
from 100 to 200 g and the weight of upper housing 21 ranges from 50
to 100 g. Further, more preferably, the weight of lower housing 11
ranges from 130 to 150 g and the weight of upper housing 21 ranges
from 70 to 90 g.
[0326] In the present embodiment, the weight of lower housing 11 is
about 150 g and the weight of the upper housing is about 75 g.
Further, preferably, a ratio between the weight of lower housing 11
and the weight of upper housing 21 (the weight of lower housing
11):(the weight of upper housing 21) ranges from 1.5:1 to 3:1 (more
preferably, 2:1). For example, the battery, the circuit board on
which the CPU is mounted, the card connector, and the like are
preferably accommodated in lower housing 11.
[0327] Further, preferably, minimal parts such as an LCD unit
(upper LCD 22 and the like), an image pick-up unit (cameras 23 and
25 and the like), a speaker unit, and the like are accommodated in
upper housing 21.
[0328] By designing game device 10 such that the weight of lower
housing 11 is greater than that of upper housing 21, game device 10
is less likely to fall down when placed on a stand or the like.
Further, by making lower housing 11 held by the user heavier than
upper housing 21, stability when game device 10 is held is
increased and hand movement in photographing can be prevented.
[0329] CPU 31 is information processing means for executing various
programs (including a launch program, a selected application
program, or the like which will be described later). In game device
10 according to the present embodiment, various programs are stored
in an embedded memory (for example, data memory 34 for storage) or
in memory card 28 and/or 29, and CPU 31 performs various types of
processing which will be described later by executing a necessary
program. It is noted that the program executed by CPU 31 may be
recorded in advance in a memory within game device 10, may be
obtained from memory card 28 and/or 29, or may be obtained from
another instrument through communication with another
instrument.
[0330] In addition, the program according to the present invention
may be supplied not only to a computer represented by game device
10 through an external storage medium such as memory card 29 but
also to a computer through a wired or wireless communication line.
Alternatively, the program according to the present invention may
be stored in advance in a non-volatile storage device within the
computer. A computer-readable storage medium storing such a program
is not limited to the non-volatile storage device above, and an
optical disc medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD, or a similar medium
may be employed.
[0331] Main memory 32, memory control circuit 33 and memory 35 for
preset data are connected to CPU 31. In addition, data memory 34
for storage is connected to memory control circuit 33.
[0332] Main memory 32 is storage means used as a work area or a
buffer area of CPU 31. Namely, main memory 32 stores a program read
from the outside (memory card 28, other equipment, and the like),
holds a work memory necessary for various types of processing in a
non-volatile manner, or store various types of data necessary for
various types of information processing. In the present embodiment,
for example, a PSRAM (Pseudo-SRAM) is employed as main memory
32.
[0333] Data memory 34 for storage is storage means for storing a
program executed by CPU 31, data of images picked up by camera 23
or 25, and the like. Data memory 34 for storage is implemented, for
example, by a NAND-type flash memory.
[0334] Memory control circuit 33 is a circuit controlling reading
and writing of data from/to data memory 34 for storage in
accordance with an instruction from CPU 31. Memory 35 for preset
data is storage means for storing data such as various parameters
set in advance in game device 10 (preset data). A flash memory
connected to CPU 31 through an SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface)
bus may be employed as memory 35 for preset data.
[0335] It is noted that an image obtained as a result of image
pick-up by camera 23 or 25 can selectively be stored in data memory
34 for storage, memory card 28, memory card 29, or the like.
[0336] Memory card I/F 36 is connected to CPU 31. Memory card I/F
36 reads data from memory card 28 attached to the connector or
writes data therein in accordance with an instruction from CPU 31.
In the present embodiment, data of images picked-up by cameras 23
and 25 is written in memory card 28, and the image data stored in
memory card 28 is read from memory card 28 to be stored in data
memory 34 for storage. In addition, in the present embodiment, a
music file which is music data stored in memory card 28 is read
from memory card 28 and stored in main memory 32 or data memory 34
for storage.
[0337] A cartridge I/F 37 is connected to CPU 31. Cartridge I/F 37
reads data from memory card 29 attached to the connector or writes
data therein in accordance with an instruction from CPU 31. In the
present embodiment, an application program executable by game
device 10 is read from memory card 29 and executed by CPU 31, or
data relating to the application program (including a selected
application program which will be described later) (for example,
saved data of a game or the like in a case where the application
program is a game program) is written in memory card 29.
[0338] Wireless communication module 38 has a function to connect
to wireless LAN with a scheme complying with the standard of
IEEE802.11.b/g. In addition, local communication module 39 has a
function to establish wireless communication with game device 10 of
the same type with a prescribed communication scheme. Wireless
communication module 38 and local communication module 39 are
connected to CPU 31. CPU 31 can transmit and receive data to and
from other equipment via the Internet through wireless
communication module 38, and can transmit and receive data to and
from another image pick-up device of the same type through local
communication module 39.
[0339] In addition, RTC 40 and power supply circuit 41 are
connected to CPU 31. RTC 40 counts a time and outputs the time to
CPU 31. CPU 31 calculates a current time (date) based on the time
counted by RTC 40. Power supply circuit 41 controls electric power
from a power supply (the battery; accommodated in lower housing 11)
of game device 10 to supply electric power to each part of game
device 10.
[0340] In addition, folded position detection sensor 50 is
connected to CPU 31. Folded position detection sensor 50 detects an
angle between lower housing 11 and upper housing 21, and outputs a
determination signal indicating the closed state or the opened
state to CPU 31 based on a result of detection. Specifically, when
the angle between lower housing 11 and upper housing 21 is smaller
than a prescribed threshold value, determination as the closed
state is made and the determination signal indicating the closed
state is output. On the other hand, when the angle between lower
housing 11 and upper housing 21 is not smaller than the prescribed
threshold value, determination as the opened state is made and the
determination signal indicating the opened state is output. For
example, when game device 1 is operating, that is, when music data
reproduction processing is in progress, receiving input of the
determination signal indicating the closed state output from folded
position detection sensor 50, CPU 31 stops the operation of the
reproduction processing depending on sensing of connection with
prescribed external output equipment and sets what is called a
sleep state in which data of that state of operation is stored.
Regarding processing other than the reproduction processing such as
display processing, such processing is stopped and the sleep state
is set regardless of sensing of connection with prescribed external
output equipment. On the other hand, receiving input of the
determination signal indicating the opened state output from folded
position detection sensor 50 after game device 1 enters the sleep
state, CPU 31 performs processing for recovering from the sleep
state to the original state based on the stored data of the state
of operation. As a result of this processing, the function set to
the sleep state can directly be set to an active state for
operation.
[0341] In the present example, folded position detection sensor 50
of such a type as detecting an angle between lower housing 11 and
upper housing 21 and outputting a determination signal has been
described, however, the opened and closed state may be detected
based on magnetic force. For example, magnetic force generated by
the speaker provided in the upper housing can be measured with a
sensor measuring magnetic force provided in the lower housing and
the opened and closed state may be detected based on strength of
the magnetic force. Alternatively, such a type as optically or
electrically detecting the opened and closed state may be adopted
as the folded position detection sensor.
[0342] Moreover, game device 10 includes microphone 43 and
amplifiers 44 and 46. Microphone 43 and amplifiers 44 and 46 are
each connected to I/F circuit 42. Microphone 43 senses voice and
sound of the user issued toward game device 10 and outputs an audio
signal indicating the voice and sound to I/F circuit 42. Amplifier
44 amplifies the audio signal from I/F circuit 42 and causes the
audio signal to be output from a right speaker 45. Amplifier 46
amplifies the audio signal from I/F circuit 42 and causes the audio
signal to be output from a left speaker 47. I/F circuit 42 is
connected to CPU 31. In addition, game device 10 includes a
headphone amplifier 48 and a jack 49. Headphone amplifier 48 and
jack 49 are each connected to I/F circuit 42. Headphone amplifier
48 amplifies an audio signal from OF circuit 42 for output from a
not-shown headphone through a plug of the headphone connected to
jack 49. I/F circuit 42 senses insertion of the plug of the
headphone into the jack by sensing turn-on of a mechanical switch,
for example, resulting from insertion of a plug of a headphone into
jack 49. Alternatively, I/F circuit 42 senses insertion of the plug
of the headphone into the jack by sensing an electrically
conducting state resulting from insertion of the plug of the
headphone into jack 49.
[0343] I/F circuit 42 includes an audio input control circuit 42b
receiving input of an audio signal from microphone 43, an audio
output control circuit 42c controlling output of an audio signal to
amplifiers 44 and 46 (right speaker 45 and left speaker 47) or
headphone amplifier 48, a touch panel control circuit 42a
controlling touch panel 13, an output level sensing circuit 42d
sensing an output level of an audio signal output to amplifiers 44
and 46 (right speaker 45 and left speaker 47) or headphone
amplifier 48 (headphone) by audio output control circuit 42c, and a
headphone sensing circuit 42e sensing attachment of the
headphone.
[0344] Audio input control circuit 42b senses an input level of an
audio signal from microphone 43, and performs A/D conversion of the
audio signal and converts the audio signal to audio data in a
prescribed format.
[0345] Headphone sensing circuit 42e senses insertion of the plug
of the headphone into the jack by sensing turn-on of the mechanical
switch resulting from insertion of the plug of the headphone into
jack 49 or an electrically conducting state resulting from
insertion of the plug of the headphone into jack 49. Then, the
result of sensing is output to CPU 31, and CPU 31 receives a signal
indicating the result of sensing from headphone sensing circuit 42e
and determines that the headphone has been attached. Here,
insertion of the plug of the headphone should only be sensed, and a
method of sensing is not limited.
[0346] When the plug of the headphone is inserted into the jack and
headphone sensing circuit 42e senses attachment of the headphone,
audio output control circuit 42c switches the output of the audio
signal from amplifiers 44, 46 to headphone amplifier 48 in response
to an instruction from CPU 31, and adjusts the audio signal to be
output to headphone amplifier 48 in accordance with whether the
output signal is stereophonic or monaural. In the present example,
though only a single headphone amplifier 48 is shown in FIG. 18,
stereophonic sound can be heard through a headphone for both ears
and hence it is assumed that headphone amplifiers are provided for
respective ears.
[0347] Touch panel 13 is connected to I/F circuit 42. Touch panel
control circuit 42a generates touch position data in a prescribed
format based on a signal from touch panel 13 and outputs the data
to CPU 31. The touch position data indicates a coordinate of a
position where input to an input surface of touch panel 13 was
made. Here, the touch panel control circuit performs reading of a
signal from touch panel 13 and generation of the touch position
data once in a prescribed period of time. CPU 31 can know a
position at which an input to touch panel 13 was made by obtaining
the touch position data.
[0348] Operation button group 14 is constituted of operation
buttons 14A to 14K above and connected to CPU 31. Operation data
indicating a state of input to each of operation buttons 14A to 14K
(whether the button was pressed or not) is output from operation
button group 14 to CPU 31. CPU 31 performs processing in accordance
with the input to operation button group 14 by obtaining the
operation data from operation button group 14.
[0349] Inner camera 23 and outer camera 25 are each connected to
CPU 31. Inner camera 23 and outer camera 25 pick up an image in
accordance with an instruction from CPU 31, and output picked-up
image data to CPU 31. For example, CPU 31 gives an image pick-up
instruction to any one of inner camera 23 and outer camera 25 and
the camera that received the instruction picks up an image and
sends image data to CPU 31.
[0350] In addition, lower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22 are each
connected to CPU 31. Each of lower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22 displays
an image thereon in accordance with an instruction from CPU 31. For
example, CPU 31 causes one of lower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22 to
display an image obtained from any of inner camera 23 and outer
camera 25 and causes the other of lower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22 to
display an operation guidance picture generated through prescribed
processing.
[0351] Though not shown, game device 10 has a vibration function to
vibrate itself. The vibration function is used, for example, for
giving some notification to the user (for example, for notifying
the user of error in operation, excess of memory capacity, and the
like). In the present embodiment, since it is assumed that the user
holds lower housing 11 during use, a device for achieving the
vibration function (for example, a vibrator such as a vibration
motor or a solenoid) is preferably accommodated in lower housing
11. Thus, vibration can be conveyed to the user's hand holding game
device 10 (lower housing 11).
6. Launcher Processing and Photographing Function
[0352] <Overview>
[0353] Game device 100 according to the present embodiment can
execute a plurality of application programs as will be described
later. In order to facilitate an operation for selection from such
a plurality of application programs by the user, game device 100
has a launcher function. In particular, game device 100 can provide
a relatively simple photographing function on a screen providing
this launcher function.
[0354] Processing supporting selective launching of an application
by the user will be described hereinafter with reference to FIG.
19.
[0355] FIG. 19 is a diagram for illustrating a method of launching
each application program in game device 10. Game device 10
selectively launches an application program desired by the user
among a plurality of application programs 53 to 57. Application
programs 53 to 57 to selectively be launched in game device 10 may
also be referred to as selected application programs.
[0356] The plurality of selected application programs above include
a photographing application program 53. Photographing application
program 53 is an application program for performing photographing
with camera 23 or 25. Photographing application program 53 is
typically stored in advance (pre-installed) in game device 10.
[0357] Further, the plurality of selected application programs
above include application programs having various functions in
addition to photographing application program 53 above. In FIG. 19,
for example, a setting application program 54 for making various
settings of game device 10, a communication application program 55
for game device 10 to establish communication with external
equipment, a game application program 56 for playing a prescribed
game, and a sound application program 57 for reproducing music or
recording voice and sound are included. In the present embodiment,
photographing application program 53 and communication application
program 55 are implemented as one integrated program.
[0358] It is noted that various selected application programs in
addition to five selected application programs 53 to 57 shown in
FIG. 19 may be stored.
[0359] Some or all of the selected application programs above do
not have to be pre-installed in game device 10. When executed, for
example, a selected application program may be downloaded from
another device via a network such as the Internet, or may be read
from a removable storage medium such as memory card 28 or memory
card 29 into a memory within game device 10.
[0360] Further, in the present embodiment, processing for
selectively launching selected application programs 53 to 57 is
performed by a launch function program 51. Launch function program
51 is a program for selecting a selected application program to be
launched from among the plurality of selected application programs
53 to 57. Namely, launch function program 51 is what is called a
launcher program. Launch function program 51 is one of programs
included in launch programs (a launch program 61 shown in FIG. 20)
according to the present embodiment.
[0361] Selected application programs 53 to 57 are subjected to a
selection operation that can be performed by the user as a result
of execution of launch function program 51, and they are executed
by being selected in the selection operation.
[0362] Detailed contents of processing in photographing application
program 53, communication application program 55 and sound
application program 57 executed by launch function program 51 in
response to a user's selection operation will be described
later.
[0363] <Control Structure>
[0364] Game device 10 according to the present embodiment includes
(a) first launch operation acceptance means, (b) first launch
means, (c) photographing processing means, (d) photographing
enabling operation acceptance means, (e) photographing operation
acceptance means, (f) second launch operation acceptance means, and
(g) second launch means as the control structure. In the present
embodiment, each of these means is implemented as a result that a
program (launch program 61) executed by a computer (CPU 31) of game
device 10 causes the computer to function as that means.
[0365] (a) First Launch Operation Acceptance Means
[0366] The first launch operation acceptance means accepts a first
launch operation for selectively launching the plurality of
application programs above (step SA6 and SA11 which will be
described later). Thus, the user can select a selected application
program that the user desires to launch (execute) for execution. As
the first launch operation is an operation for selectively
launching a selected application program, the first launch
operation is also hereinafter referred to as a "selection launch
operation." It is noted that a state of accepting the first launch
operation (a state where the first launch operation can be
performed) is referred to as a "launch acceptance state" (FIG.
19).
[0367] (b) First Launch Means
[0368] When the first launch operation above is performed, the
first launch means launches an application program selected in the
first launch operation from among the plurality of application
programs above (step SA12 which will be described later). In other
words, for example, when photographing application program 53 is
selected in the first launch operation, photographing application
program 53 is launched.
[0369] In the present embodiment, the launch acceptance state
corresponds to a state where what is called a menu screen is
displayed, and game device 10 is initially in the launch acceptance
state after it is started up (power is turned on) (except for
start-up for the first time). Though details will be described
later, the menu screen (FIG. 23) showing icons indicating selected
application programs 53 to 57 is displayed on lower LCD 12 in the
launch acceptance state in the present embodiment. The user can
launch a selected application program by performing an operation to
touch a position of the icon on touch panel 13 as the first launch
operation.
[0370] (c) Photographing Processing Means
[0371] The photographing processing means performs photographing
processing (step SA10 which will be described later). The
photographing processing is processing for storing an image
picked-up by camera 23 or 25 in storage means in the information
processing device in accordance with a prescribed photographing
operation. In the present embodiment, the photographing operation
is an operation to press a prescribed button (more specifically, L
button 14I or R button 14J). The photographing processing means
above is means implemented by execution of launch program 61
according to the present invention by CPU 31 of game device 10, and
it is different from means implemented by photographing application
program 53 above. It is noted that the photographing processing
means has only to have at least a function to perform photographing
processing (a function to store an image picked-up by camera 23 or
25 in the storage means of game device 10), however, it may have
other functions relating to photographing (for example, a function
to display or edit a stored image).
[0372] In the present embodiment, launch program 61 according to
the present invention includes a photographing function program 52
shown in FIG. 19. The photographing processing means above is
implemented by execution of photographing function program 52 by
CPU 31 of game device 10. In other words, game device 10 according
to the present embodiment stores two types of programs for
executing photographing processing of photographing function
program 52 and photographing application program 53.
[0373] Further, in the present embodiment, though launch program 61
includes the two types of programs of launch function program 51
and photographing function program 52, launch function program 51
and photographing function program 52 may be one integrated
program. Launch program 61 (launch function program 51 and
photographing function program 52) is pre-installed in game device
10.
[0374] Here, a function attained by the photographing processing
means is different from a function enabled by execution of
photographing application program 53 above. In the present
embodiment, the photographing processing means has only a part of
functions attained by photographing application program 53. In an
alternative embodiment, the photographing processing means may have
a function not attained by photographing application program
53.
[0375] (d) Photographing Enabling Operation Acceptance Means
[0376] In the launch acceptance state, the photographing enabling
operation acceptance means accepts a photographing enabling
operation for causing (a state of game device 10 to enter) a
photographing enabled state (steps SA6 and SA9 which will be
described later). The photographing enabled state is a state where
photographing processing by the photographing processing means
above can be performed in accordance with the photographing
operation above (a state of accepting the photographing enabling
operation). In other words, in the launch acceptance state, the
user can launch selected application programs 53 to 57 with the
first launch operation, and can also activate a photographing
function attained by the photographing processing means with the
photographing enabling operation (FIG. 19). In the present
embodiment, the photographing enabling operation is an operation to
press a prescribed button (more specifically, L button 14I or R
button 14J).
[0377] In the present embodiment, the photographing enabling
operation is an operation different from the first launch operation
in a manner of operation. Specifically, in the present embodiment,
the first launch operation is an input operation to touch panel 13
while the photographing enabling operation is an operation to press
a prescribed button (more specifically, L button 14I or R button
14J). It is noted that the phrase "different in a manner of
operation" naturally means that an input device to be operated is
different and also means that an operation performed on the same
input device is different. In an alternative embodiment, the first
launch operation and the photographing enabling operation may be
operations to touch different positions on touch panel 13, may be
operations to input different trails on touch panel 13, or may be
operations to press different buttons. In order to easily and
quickly activate the photographing function attained by the
photographing processing means (launch photographing function
program 52), the photographing enabling operation is preferably a
simple operation such as an operation to press a prescribed
button.
[0378] (e) Photographing Operation Acceptance Means
[0379] When the photographing enabling operation above is
performed, the photographing operation acceptance means accepts the
photographing operation (steps SA24 and SA25 which will be
described later). In other words, when the photographing enabling
operation is performed, the state of game device 10 enters the
photographing enabled state (FIG. 19). Thus, the user can take a
photograph (cause game device 10 to perform the photographing
processing) by performing the photographing operation after the
photographing enabling operation.
[0380] In the present embodiment, the launch acceptance state and
the photographing enabled state are mutually exclusive, and game
device 10 is alternatively in either the launch acceptance state or
the photographing enabled state. In other words, the photographing
operation (in the photographing enabled state) is not accepted in
the launch acceptance state while the first launch operation (in
the launch acceptance state) is not accepted in the photographing
enabled state. In an alternative embodiment, however, the launch
acceptance state and the photographing enabled state do not have to
be mutually exclusive, and game device 10 can be in the launch
acceptance state and the photographing enabled state. For example,
game device 10 may accept the first launch operation in the
photographing enabled state.
[0381] (f) Second Launch Operation Acceptance Means
[0382] In the photographing enabled state above, the second launch
operation acceptance means accepts a second launch operation for
launching photographing application program 53 (steps SA24 and SA29
which will be described later). Thus, in the photographing enabled
state, the user can perform the second launch operation in addition
to the photographing operation. The second launch operation is an
operation for launching photographing application program 53
directly from the photographing enabled state without returning to
the launch acceptance state, and thus it is also hereinafter
referred to as a "shortcut launch operation."
[0383] In the present embodiment, in the photographing enabled
state, an image picked-up by camera 23 or 24 is displayed on lower
LCD 12 while a button image (a button image 78 shown in FIG. 24)
for performing the second launch operation is displayed on lower
LCD 12 (FIG. 24). The user can perform the second launch operation
by performing an operation to touch the button image. In order to
easily and quickly launch photographing application program 53, the
second launch operation is preferably a simple operation.
[0384] (g) Second Launch Means
[0385] When the second launch operation above is performed, the
second launch means launches photographing application program 53
(step SA30 which will be described later). Thus, the user can
launch photographing application program 53 in any of the launch
acceptance state and the photographing enabled state. Photographing
application program 53 is launched (executed) with any of the first
launch operation in the launch acceptance state above and the
second launch operation in the photographing enabled state
above.
[0386] As described above, according to the present embodiment, in
the launch acceptance state, the user can launch selected
application programs 53 to 57 with the selection launch operation
(the first launch operation) and also can perform the photographing
function attained by the photographing processing means with the
photographing enabling operation. In addition, in the photographing
enabled state where photographing based on the photographing
function can be performed, the user can launch photographing
application program 53 with the shortcut launch operation (the
second launch operation). Thus, even during photographing based on
the photographing processing means, the user can easily and quickly
launch photographing application program 53 with the shortcut
launch operation. In other words, according to the present
embodiment, even though the user desires to use a function (of
photographing application program 53) not provided by the
photographing processing means during photographing based on the
photographing processing means, the user can easily and quickly use
the function by performing the shortcut launch operation.
[0387] <Data Structure>
[0388] Data used in the processing in game device 10 will now be
described with reference to FIG. 20.
[0389] FIG. 20 is a diagram showing main data stored in main memory
32 of game device 10. As shown in FIG. 20, a program storage area
60 and a data storage area 64 are provided in main memory 32.
[0390] In program storage area 60, various programs (application
programs) executed by CPU 31 are stored. Specifically, launch
program 61, photographing application program 53, other selected
application programs 62, and the like are stored. These programs
are read from data memory 34 for storage, memory card 28 or memory
card 29 and stored in main memory 32 at appropriate timing after
start-up of game device 10 (for example, at the timing of launch of
a program).
[0391] Launch program 61 is a program for performing main
processing in game device 10. Launch program 61 is read into the
main memory and executed after start-up of game device 10. Launch
program 61 includes launch function program 51 and photographing
function program 52 above.
[0392] Launch function program 51 is a program for selecting a
selected application program to be launched as described above.
[0393] Photographing function program 52 is a program which is not
a selected application program, and it is a program for performing
the photographing processing. In the present embodiment,
photographing function program 52 has only a part of functions
attained by photographing application program 53. In other words,
in the present embodiment, photographing function program 52 is a
photographing processing program having a relatively simple
function, and photographing application program 53 is a relatively
multifunctional photographing processing program. Further,
photographing function program 52 has a data size smaller than that
of photographing application program 53. Since programs 52 and 53
have a common function, a part of data thereof may be stored in
common. Hereinafter, photographing function program 52 having a
relatively simple function is also referred to as a "simplified
photographing program 52," and relatively multifunctional
photographing application program 53 is also referred to as a
"multifunctional photographing application program 53."
[0394] The phrase "(relatively) simple function" herein encompasses
both meaning of having (relatively) few functions and meaning of
having a (relatively) low function. In other words, the phrase
"(relatively) multifunctional" encompasses meaning of having
(relatively) many functions as well as meaning of having a
(relatively) high function. In other words, simplified
photographing program 52 may have a relatively low function (for
example, photographing with a small number of pixels, a small
number of types of stamps available in editing a picked-up image,
and the like) while multifunctional photographing application
program 53 may have a relatively high function (for example,
photographing with a large number of pixels, a large number of
types of stamps available in editing a picked-up image, and the
like).
[0395] Further, simplified photographing program 52 may have
relatively few functions (for example, adjustment of exposure and
white balance is impossible, a prescribed edition operation on a
picked-up image is impossible, and the like) while multifunctional
photographing application program 53 may have relatively many
functions (for example, adjustment of exposure and white balance is
possible, a prescribed edition operation on a picked-up image is
possible, and the like).
[0396] Further, other selected application programs 62 refer to
selected application programs other than multifunctional
photographing application program 53, and include setting
application program 54, communication application program 55, game
application program 56, sound application program 57 for
reproducing music or recording voice and sound described above, and
the like.
[0397] The selected application programs (including multifunctional
photographing application program 53) are stored in data memory 34
for storage or memory card 28, and read into main memory 32 when
launched. It is noted that the selected application programs may be
obtained (downloaded) from external equipment through communication
and stored in data memory 34 for storage.
[0398] Meanwhile, in data storage area 64, display image data 65,
setting data 66, and the like are stored. In addition to these data
65 and 66, various data used in the processing in game device 10
are stored in data storage area 64.
[0399] Display image data 65 is data indicative of a display image.
Here, in the present embodiment, one of stored images taken in the
past is displayed on the menu screen, and an image being displayed
is referred to as a display image. Specifically, display image data
65 indicates a file name and the like of a display image. Though
details of a method of selecting a display image will be described
later, a favorite image which will be described later, an image
immediately after photographing (storage) by means of simplified
photographing program 52, or the like is selected as a display
image in the present embodiment.
[0400] Setting data 66 is data indicative of setting information
used in each program for photographing (simplified photographing
program 52 and multifunctional photographing application program
53). Setting data 66 is passed as an argument to each of programs
52 and 53 at the time of launch of each of programs 52 and 53 for
photographing. Setting data 66 includes camera change data 67 and
storage destination data 68.
[0401] Camera change data 67 indicates a camera for picking up an
image, out of inner camera 23 and outer camera 25. In other words,
camera change data 67 is data indicative of either inner camera 23
or outer camera 25.
[0402] Storage destination data 68 indicates a storage destination
of a picked-up image stored as a result of the photographing
operation (referred to as a stored image). In the present
embodiment, a picked-up image stored (saved) as a result of the
photographing operation is stored in data memory 34 for storage or
memory card 28. Thus, storage destination data 68 indicates either
data memory 34 for storage or memory card 28.
[0403] It is noted that information such as a file name is attached
to the stored image and information relating to favorite is also
attached. Here, in the present embodiment, the user can set some of
stored images as "favorite" (step SA46 which will be described
later). A stored image set as favorite is hereinafter referred to
as a "favorite image". Information indicative of "favorite" is
added to data of a favorite image. In addition, in the present
embodiment, information indicative of any of first to third groups
is added to the data of the favorite image. In other words, in the
present embodiment, favorite images can be managed in three groups
of first to third groups (FIG. 29).
[0404] <Processing Procedure>
[0405] With reference to FIGS. 21 to 30, a flow of the processing
relating to the launcher function in game device 10 will now be
described. FIG. 21 is a main flowchart showing the flow of the
launch processing in game device 10. When power of game device 10
is turned on by pressing power button 14F, CPU 31 of game device 10
initializes main memory 32 or the like, and then starts execution
of launch program 61. Thus, processing in subsequent steps SA1 to
SA13 is started.
[0406] In step SA1, CPU 31 determines whether game device 10 is
started up for the first time or not. Determination in step SA1 can
be made, for example, by storing time and date of previous start-up
of game device 10. In other words, if time and date of previous
start-up have been stored, it can be determined that the present
start-up of game device 10 is not start-up for the first time. On
the other hand, if time and date of the previous start-up have not
been stored, it can be determined that the present start-up of game
device 10 is start-up for the first time.
[0407] When a result of determination in step SA1 indicates Yes,
the processing in step SA2 is performed. On the other hand, when
the result of determination in step SA1 indicates No, the
processing in step SA2 is skipped and the processing in step SA3 is
performed.
[0408] In step SA2, CPU 31 performs photographing leading
processing. The photographing leading processing is processing for
leading the user to experience a photographing operation with a
simple function. In other words, in the photographing leading
processing, the user is caused to select whether or not to perform
photographing processing using simplified photographing program 52
above. When the user selects to perform the photographing
processing, the user is caused to experience a simple photographing
operation based on simplified photographing program 52 above.
Details of the photographing leading processing will be described
later with reference to FIG. 27. CPU 31 performs the processing in
step SA3 following step SA2.
[0409] In step SA3, CPU 31 selects a display image from among
favorite images in a random manner. Specifically, CPU 31 selects
one favorite image from among favorite images stored in data memory
34 for storage in a random manner, and causes main memory 32 to
store data indicative of information (for example, a file name)
identifying the selected favorite image as display image data 65.
Subsequent to step SA3, the processing in step SA4 is
performed.
[0410] In step SA4, CPU 31 launches launch function program 51. In
other words, CPU 31 reads launch function program 51 from data
memory 34 for storage, causes main memory 32 to store the program,
and executes launch function program 51. The processing in step SA5
and subsequent steps is performed as a result of execution of
launch function program 51 by CPU 31. Further, in the present
embodiment, CPU 31 reads simplified photographing program 52 into
main memory 32 together with launch function program 51 at the
timing of reading of launch function program 51. In an alternative
embodiment, simplified photographing program 52 may be read into
main memory 32 at the timing of execution of simplified
photographing processing (step SA11) which will be described later.
Subsequent to step SA4, the processing in step SA5 is
performed.
[0411] In step SA5, CPU 31 has a menu screen displayed. The menu
screen is a screen (an image) for causing the user to select a
selected application program to be launched from among the selected
application programs. The launch acceptance state shown in FIG. 19
is a state where the menu screen is displayed. The menu screen in
the present embodiment will be described hereinafter with reference
to FIG. 23.
[0412] FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of the menu screen.
As shown in FIG. 23, in step SA5, an image for causing the user to
select a selected application program to be executed is displayed
on lower LCD 12. Specifically, icon images 71a to 71c, a scroll bar
72, a marker 73, and scroll buttons 74a and 74b are displayed on
lower LCD 12.
[0413] Icon image 71 is an image representing a selected
application program. Icon image 71 is an icon for launching an
application program in memory card 29. When memory card 29 is not
attached, an icon indicating absence of a card is displayed
together with a message that "card is not attached."
[0414] The user can launch a selected application program indicated
by a touched icon image, by performing an operation to touch icon
image 71 displayed at a center of the screen (in the left-right
direction) as the first launch operation above.
[0415] In the present embodiment, a prescribed number of icon
images (four icon images in FIG. 23) among icon images
corresponding to a plurality of application programs respectively
are displayed on the screen. The (types of) icon images being
displayed are changed in accordance with an operation for scrolling
the screen. In other words, though icon images indicating selected
application programs other than the displayed selected application
programs are not shown in FIG. 23, the icon images are displayed by
scrolling the screen on lower LCD 12.
[0416] The screen of lower LCD 12 can be scrolled by an operation
to touch an icon image other than the icon image displayed at the
center of the screen, or by an operation to touch marker 73 or
scroll button 74a or 74b. In other words, when the user touches the
icon image (icon image 71a or 71c in FIG. 23) other than the icon
image displayed at the center of the screen, the screen of lower
LCD 12 is scrolled and the touched icon image is displayed at the
center of the screen. Alternatively, the user can move marker 73
along scroll bar 72 by performing an operation to move a touched
position along scroll bar 72 to the right and left while touching
marker 73, thereby scrolling the screen of lower LCD 12 in
accordance with movement of marker 73. Alternatively, the screen of
lower LCD 12 can be scrolled to the left by an operation to touch
scroll button 74a on the left of scroll bar 72, and the screen of
lower LCD 12 can be scrolled to the right by an operation to touch
scroll button 74b on the right of scroll bar 72.
[0417] As described above, in the state where the menu screen is
displayed, the user can change the icon image displayed at the
center of the screen by performing the operation to scroll the
screen, and also can launch the selected application program
indicated by the icon image with the operation to touch the icon
image displayed at the center of the screen.
[0418] In the present embodiment, all of the plurality of selected
application programs are not concurrently displayed but some of the
plurality of selected application programs are displayed in a list
and replaced with the rest by scrolling or the like so that the
rest is in turn displayed. Here, in an alternative embodiment, all
of the plurality of selected application programs may concurrently
be displayed. Alternatively, (icon images of) selected application
programs displayed in a list may be displayed in a line as in the
present embodiment or may be displayed in matrix of 2.times.2 or
more.
[0419] Meanwhile, as shown in FIG. 23, in step SA5, a display image
75 and photographing button images 76a and 76b are displayed on
upper LCD 22. Display image 75 is a stored image shown based on
display image data 65 stored in main memory 32 and selected in step
SA3 or the like. In this manner, in the present embodiment, an
image taken in the past is displayed on the menu screen. Thus, a
user using game device 10 for the first time is made aware that
game device 10 has the photographing function. Further, as the menu
screen of game device 10 is different for each user (for each
information processing device), the menu screen can have
individuality.
[0420] As display image 75 is randomly selected in step SA3, the
user cannot designate as display image 75, an arbitrary image from
among images stored in data memory 34 for storage. As will be
described later, though multifunctional photographing application
program 53 has a function to set a favorite image, the launch
function program and simplified photographing program 52 do not
have a function to set a favorite image. Further, photographing
button images 76a and 76b are images indicating an operation to
make transition to a state where photographing based on simplified
photographing program 52 can be performed (the photographing
enabled state shown in FIG. 19), that is, the photographing
enabling operation above. Thus, in the present embodiment, by
displaying the operation to make transition to the photographing
enabled state on the menu screen (the launch acceptance state), it
can clearly be presented to the user that photographing based on
simplified photographing program 52 can be performed through the
menu screen (without selecting a selected application program).
[0421] As shown in FIG. 23, the photographing enabling operation is
typically an operation to press L button 14I or R button 14J.
Therefore, the user can set the state where photographing based on
simplified photographing program 52 can be performed by pressing a
button (L button 14I or R button 14J) once in the launch acceptance
state.
[0422] In the present embodiment, except for start-up for the first
time (Yes in step SA1), the menu screen is initially displayed
after the start-up of game device 10. In other words, in the
present embodiment, game device 10 sets a first state after the
start-up of game device 10 to the launch acceptance state.
Therefore, the user can launch simplified photographing program 52
immediately after start-up.
[0423] Referring back to the description in connection with FIG.
21, subsequent to step SA5, the processing in step SA6 is
performed. In step SA6, CPU 31 accepts an input to each input
device. In other words, CPU 31 obtains operation data from
operation button group 14 and obtains input position data from
touch panel 13. The obtained operation data and input position data
are stored in main memory 32. In the launch acceptance state, the
processing in step SA6 is performed once in a prescribed time
period (for example, one frame time ( 1/60 sec.)). Subsequent to
step SA6, processing in step SA7 is performed.
[0424] In step SA7, CPU 31 determines whether an operation to
scroll the screen of lower LCD 12 has been performed or not.
Determination in step SA7 can be made by referring to the input
position data stored in main memory 32 in step SA6. In other words,
in the determination processing in step SA7, CPU 31 determines
whether an input to touch an area where marker 73 or scroll button
74a or 74b is displayed has been provided or not.
[0425] When a result of determination in step SA7 indicates Yes,
processing in step SA8 is performed. On the other hand, when the
result of determination in step SA7 indicates No, processing in
step SA9 which will be described later is performed.
[0426] In step SA8, CPU 31 scrolls display of the icon images (the
screen of lower LCD 12). In other words, when a touch input of
scroll button 74a is provided, the icon images are scrolled to the
left, and when a touch input of scroll button 74b is provided, the
icon images are scrolled to the right. Thus, an icon image that has
not been displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12 can be displayed.
Subsequent to step SA8, the processing in step SA5 is performed
again.
[0427] Meanwhile, in step SA9, CPU 31 determines whether the
photographing enabling operation has been performed or not.
Determination in step SA9 can be made by referring to the operation
data stored in main memory 32 in step SA6. In other words, in the
determination processing in step SA9, CPU 31 determines whether L
button 14I or R button 14J has been pressed or not.
[0428] When a result of determination in step SA9 indicates Yes,
processing in step SA10 is performed. On the other hand, when the
result of determination in step SA9 indicates No, processing in
step SA11 which will be described later is performed.
[0429] In step SA10, CPU 31 performs the simplified photographing
processing. The simplified photographing processing is processing
for causing the user to perform photographing with a simple
function based on simplified photographing program 52. Details of
the simplified photographing processing will be described
hereinafter with reference to FIG. 22.
[0430] FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a flow of the simplified
photographing processing (step SA10) shown in FIG. 21. In input
image generation processing, initially in step SA21, CPU 31
launches simplified photographing program 52. In the present
embodiment, since simplified photographing program 52 has been read
into main memory 32 together with launch function program 51, CPU
31 starts execution of simplified photographing program 52. Here,
data 67 and 68 included in setting data 66 stored in main memory 32
are input (set) as arguments for simplified photographing program
52. Processing in steps SA22 to SA28 subsequent to step SA21 is
performed by using simplified photographing program 52 (by
executing simplified photographing program 52).
[0431] In step SA22, CPU 31 obtains data of an image picked-up by
inner camera 23 or outer camera 25. In the present embodiment, an
image is picked-up by only any one of cameras 23 and 25, and CPU 31
obtains image data only from one camera. Which camera out of
cameras 23 and 25 is used for image pick-up is determined in
accordance with content of camera change data 67 that was passed as
the argument at the time of launch of simplified photographing
program 52 (step SA21). Subsequent to step SA22, processing in step
SA23 is performed.
[0432] In step SA23, CPU 31 performs display processing. In step
SA23 in the photographing enabled state, an image picked-up by
camera 23 or 25 or the like is displayed. An image displayed in the
photographing enabled state will be described hereinafter with
reference to FIG. 24.
[0433] FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of the image
displayed in the photographing enabled state. As shown in FIG. 24,
in step SA23, an image 77 picked-up by camera 23 or 24 that was
obtained in step SA22 is displayed on lower LCD 12.
[0434] The processing in steps SA22 and SA23 is repeatedly
performed once in a prescribed time period (for example, 1/60
sec.). By repeatedly performing the processing in these steps SA22
and SA23, a real-time image picked-up by camera 23 or 24 is
displayed on lower LCD 12. In an alternative embodiment, the
real-time image may be displayed on upper LCD 22. Here, an image
stored by performing the photographing operation may also be
displayed on lower LCD 12.
[0435] In addition, a button image 78 for performing an operation
for executing multifunctional photographing application program 53
(the second launch operation above) is displayed on lower LCD 12.
Unlike the icon images displayed on the menu screen, button image
78 is displayed in a fixed manner at a prescribed position (at an
upper right position in FIG. 24) on the screen. Though details will
be described later, the user can easily make transition from a
state of execution of simplified photographing program 52 to a
state of execution of multifunctional photographing application
program 53 by pressing button image 78.
[0436] Further, as in FIG. 23, display image 75 and photographing
button images 76a and 76b are displayed on upper LCD 22. In the
present embodiment, as in the photographing enabling operation, the
photographing operation is an operation to press L button 14I or R
button 14J (see photographing button images 76a and 76b shown in
FIG. 24). In an alternative embodiment, the photographing operation
may not be the same as the photographing enabling operation. For
example, a button image for performing the photographing operation
may be displayed on lower LCD 12 and an operation to touch the
button image may serve as the photographing operation. Further,
game device 10 may accept both the operation to press L button 14I
or R button 14J and the operation to touch the button image as the
photographing operation.
[0437] Referring back to the description in connection with FIG.
22, subsequent to step SA23, processing in step SA24 is performed.
In step SA24, CPU 31 accepts an input to each input device. The
processing in step SA24 is the same as the processing in step SA6
above. Subsequent to step SA24, processing in step SA25 is
performed.
[0438] In step SA25, CPU 31 determines whether the photographing
operation has been performed or not. Determination in step SA25 can
be made by referring to operation data stored in main memory 32 in
step SA24. In the present embodiment, since the first launch
operation and the photographing operation are performed by
performing the same operation, the processing in step SA25 can be
performed as in step SA9.
[0439] When a result of determination in step SA25 indicates Yes,
processing in step SA26 is performed. On the other hand, when the
result of determination in step SA25 indicates No, processing in
step SA29 which will be described later is performed.
[0440] An image displayed subsequent to the photographing operation
will be described hereinafter with reference to FIG. 25.
[0441] FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed after the photographing operation is performed. As shown
in FIG. 25, when the result of determination in step SA25 indicates
Yes, the picked up image obtained in step SA22 or image 77 picked
up by camera 23 or 24 is displayed on lower LCD 12. In addition, a
button image ("store") for performing an operation to store a
taken, picked-up image and a button image ("capture again") for
performing an operation for photographing again are displayed in
addition to button image 78 for performing an operation to execute
multifunctional photographing application program 53 (the second
launch operation above) on lower LCD 12.
[0442] In addition, as in FIG. 23, display image 75 as well as
photographing button images 76a and 76b are displayed on upper LCD
22. Referring back to the description in connection with FIG. 22,
in step SA26, CPU 31 determines whether an operation for storage
has been performed or not. Determination in step SA26 can be made
by referring to operation data stored in main memory 32 in step
SA24 as in step SA25.
[0443] When a result of determination in step SA26 indicates Yes
(when "store" in FIG. 25 is touched), processing in step SA27 is
performed. On the other hand, when the result of determination in
step SA26 indicates No (when "capture again" in FIG. 25 is
touched), processing in step SA22 described above is performed
again. It is noted that determination in step SA26 may be skipped
so that the process may proceed to step SA27 directly from step
SA25.
[0444] In step SA27, CPU 31 has a picked-up image stored. In other
words, CPU 31 causes data memory 34 for storage or memory card 28
to store (save) the picked-up image obtained in step SA22. A
storage destination of the picked-up image is determined in
accordance with content of storage destination data 68 that was
passed as the argument at the time of launch of simplified
photographing program 52 (step SA21). It is noted that the storage
destination of the picked-up image can be changed by the user in
the multifunctional photographing processing based on
multifunctional photographing application program 53 which will be
described later. Subsequent to step SA27, processing in step SA28
is performed.
[0445] In step SA28, CPU 31 selects the stored image stored in
immediately preceding step SA27 as a display image. Specifically,
CPU 31 causes main memory 32 to store as display image data 65,
data indicative of the stored image that was stored in immediately
preceding step SA27. After the processing in step SA28, CPU 31 ends
execution of simplified photographing program 52 and ends the
simplified photographing processing. Then, the processing in step
SA4 shown in FIG. 21 is performed again.
[0446] An image displayed subsequent to the simplified
photographing processing will be described hereinafter with
reference to FIG. 26.
[0447] FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed after the simplified photographing processing. As shown
in FIG. 26, after the simplified photographing processing, the
picked-up image obtained in the simplified photographing processing
is displayed on upper LCD 22 as new display image 75.
[0448] Namely, comparing the image shown in FIG. 22 with the image
shown in FIG. 26, it can be seen that the display image displayed
on upper LCD 22 has been updated.
[0449] As described above, in the present embodiment, in response
to the photographing operation performed in the photographing
enabled state (the simplified photographing processing), the
simplified photographing processing ends, and transition from the
photographing enabled state to the launch acceptance state is made.
In other words, when the user stores one taken image in the
simplified photographing processing, a screen display on game
device 10 returns to the menu screen, and thus even a novice user
who has not read an instruction manual or the like can naturally
return to the launch acceptance state (in an example where the
process proceeds to step SA27 from step SA25, the screen returns to
the menu screen when the user performs one photographing operation
in the simplified photographing processing). Further, in the
present embodiment, since the photographing enabling operation and
the photographing operation are performed by performing the same
operation, transition from the launch acceptance state to the
photographing enabled state and transition from the photographing
enabled state to the launch acceptance state can be made by
performing the same operation. Thus, even if the user accidentally
presses L button 14I or R button 14J or presses a button without
fully understanding a manner of operation to result in transition
to the photographing enabled state, the user can return to the
original state (the launch acceptance state) by pressing the same
button. Thus, game device 10 which is easy for the novice user to
operate can be provided.
[0450] Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the
state of game device 10 makes transition to the launch acceptance
state after the photographing operation. Thus, transition to the
launch acceptance state is made without display of the image stored
in the processing in step SA26 above based on simplified
photographing program 52. Here, in the present embodiment, in the
processing in step SA27, CPU 31 sets the image stored in the
processing in step SA26 as a display image after transition to the
launch acceptance state. Thus, the stored image taken based on
simplified photographing program 52 is displayed as the display
image immediately after transition to the launch acceptance state.
Therefore, according to the present embodiment, though transition
to the launch acceptance state is made as a result of the
photographing operation, the user can quickly check the image taken
based on simplified photographing program 52.
[0451] Meanwhile, in step SA29, CPU 31 determines whether the
second launch operation has been performed or not. Determination in
step SA29 can be made by referring to input position data stored in
main memory 32 in step SA24. In other words, in the determination
processing in step SA29, CPU 31 determines whether an input to
touch an area where button image 78 for performing the second
launch operation is displayed has been provided or not. When a
result of determination in step SA29 indicates Yes, the
multifunctional photographing processing which will be described
later (FIG. 30) is performed. On the other hand, when the result of
determination in step SA29 indicates No, the processing in step
SA22 is performed again. This is the end of the description of the
simplified photographing processing shown in FIG. 22.
[0452] Referring back to the description in connection with FIG.
21, in step SA11, CPU 31 determines whether the first launch
operation has been performed or not. Determination in step SA11 can
be made by referring to the input position data stored in main
memory 32 in step SA6. In other words, in the determination
processing in step SA11, CPU 31 determines whether an input to
touch an area where the icon image is displayed has been provided
or not. When a result of determination in step SA11 indicates Yes,
processing in step SA12 is performed. On the other hand, when the
result of determination in step SA11 indicates No, processing in
step SA13 which will be described later is performed.
[0453] In step SA12, CPU 31 performs processing for executing a
selected application program. In other words, CPU 31 reads a
selected application program corresponding to the icon image
selected in the first launch operation into main memory 32, and
executes the selected application program. Thus, the selected
application program is started and the user can utilize the
selected application program. The processing in step SA12 ends with
the end of the selected application program, and the processing in
step SA3 is performed again subsequent to step SA12.
[0454] Here, a case where multifunctional photographing application
program 53 is executed as the selected application program in step
SA12 above will be described in detail. FIG. 30 is a flowchart
showing a flow of processing based on multifunctional photographing
application program 53 (the multifunctional photographing
processing).
[0455] In the multifunctional photographing processing, initially
in step SA30, CPU 31 launches multifunctional photographing
application program 53. In other words, CPU 31 reads
multifunctional photographing application program 53 into main
memory 32 and starts execution thereof. Here, data 67 and 68
included in setting data 66 stored in main memory 32 are input
(set) as arguments for simplified photographing program 52.
Subsequent to step SA30, processing in step SA31 is performed.
Processing in steps SA31 to SA39 subsequent to step SA30 is
performed by using multifunctional photographing application
program 53 (by executing multifunctional photographing application
program 53).
[0456] In step SA31, CPU 31 performs display processing. Here, in
the present embodiment, in the multifunctional photographing
processing, there are a photographing mode for performing
photographing using the image pick-up means and a photograph
display mode for displaying an image (a stored image) taken in the
past. In the display processing in step SA31, an image for causing
the user to select either one of the two modes (the photograph
display mode and the photographing mode) in the multifunctional
photographing processing, and an image for setting a storage
destination of a picked-up image to be stored by performing the
photographing operation are displayed on at least one of LCDs 12
and 22. An image displayed in display processing in step SSA31 will
be described hereinafter with reference to FIG. 31.
[0457] FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed in the multifunctional photographing processing. As shown
in FIG. 31, in step SA31, a button image 101 for indicating
selection of the photographing mode and a button image 102 for
indicating selection of the photograph display mode are displayed
on lower LCD 12. In addition, button image 101 includes indication
of the number of shootings available (for example, xx remaining) in
accordance with a currently remaining capacity of the storage
destination of taken images. Moreover, button image 102 includes
indication of the current number of picked up images (for example,
xx in total) that have already been stored in the storage
destination of taken images. Further, button images 103 and 104
indicating change of the storage destination of picked up images
are also displayed on lower LCD 12. When button image 103 is
touched, a non-volatile memory embedded in the main body (embedded
memory; data memory 34 for storage) is set to the selected state,
and when button image 104 is touched, a removable memory card (card
memory; memory card 28) is set to the selected state. When the
embedded memory is selected, a manner of display of button image
103 is varied, and when the card memory is selected, a manner of
display of button image 104 is varied. When button image 101 or 102
is touched, transition to the photographing mode or the photograph
display mode is made at that timing of touching.
[0458] Namely, the present embodiment is configured such that the
user can select any of the embedded memory and the card memory at
the time of launch of the multifunctional photographing
application, and selection is not yet fixed as of the timing of
selection. The present embodiment is configured such that the user
can select any of the photographing mode and the photograph display
mode on the same screen. Then, selection between the embedded
memory and the card memory is fixed at the timing of selection
between the photographing mode and the photograph display mode.
Namely, when the photographing mode is selected while the embedded
memory is selected, the photographing mode is launched and images
that will be taken in the subsequent photographing mode are stored
in the embedded memory. Alternatively, when the photographing mode
is selected while the card memory is selected, the photographing
mode is launched and images that will be taken in the subsequent
photographing mode are stored in the card memory. Alternatively,
when the photograph display mode is selected while the embedded
memory is selected, the photograph display mode is launched and a
taken image stored in the embedded memory is displayed in the
subsequent photograph display mode. Alternatively, when the
photograph display mode is selected while the card memory is
selected, the photograph display mode is launched and a taken image
stored in the card memory is displayed in the subsequent photograph
display mode.
[0459] In addition, various button images 105 to 107 are displayed
on the lower LCD. An end button 105 is a button image for
performing an operation to end the multifunctional photographing
processing. Namely, when a touch input of end button 105 is made,
the multifunctional photographing processing ends and the
processing by CPU 31 returns to the processing in step SA4.
[0460] A calendar button 106 is a button image for performing an
operation to launch a calendar function which will be described
later. Namely, when a touch input of calendar button 106 is made,
the calendar function which will be described later is performed.
An others button 107 is a button image for performing an operation
for making various types of setting or the like.
[0461] In step SA32, CPU 31 accepts an input to each input device.
Processing in step SA32 is the same as the processing in step SA6
above. Subsequent to step SA32, processing in step SA33 is
performed.
[0462] In step SA33, CPU 31 determines whether the photograph
display mode has been selected or not. Determination in step SA33
can be made by referring to input position data stored in main
memory 32 in step SA32. In other words, in the determination
processing in step SA33, CPU 31 determines whether an input to
touch an area where image 102 indicating the photograph display
mode is displayed has been provided or not as shown in FIG. 31.
[0463] When a result of determination in step SA33 indicates Yes,
processing in step SA34 is performed. On the other hand, when the
result of determination in step SA33 indicates No, processing in
step SA35 which will be described later is performed.
[0464] In step SA34, CPU 31 performs processing to be performed in
the photograph display mode (photograph display mode processing).
Details of the photograph display mode processing will be described
hereinafter with reference to FIG. 32.
[0465] FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a flow of the photograph
display mode processing (step SA34) shown in FIG. 30. In the
photograph display mode processing, initially in step SA41, CPU 31
performs display processing. In step SA41 in the photograph display
mode, a stored image taken in the past or the like is displayed. An
image displayed in the photograph display mode will be described
with reference to FIG. 33.
[0466] FIG. 33 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed in the photograph display mode. As shown in FIG. 33, in
step SA41, a plurality of (three in the drawing) stored images 181
to 183, a cursor 184, scroll buttons 185 and 186, a setting button
187, and an end button 188 are displayed on lower LCD 12.
[0467] In FIG. 33, stored images 181 to 183 are (some of) stored
images that are stored in data memory 34 for storage or memory card
28. Stored image 182 surrounded by cursor 184 is an image currently
selected by cursor 184. Scroll buttons 185 and 186 are buttons for
scrolling stored images 181 to 183 to the right and left. In other
words, when a touch input of scroll button 185 on the right of the
screen is made, stored images 181 to 183 are scrolled to the right,
and when a touch input of scroll button 186 on the left of the
screen is made, stored images 181 to 183 are scrolled to the left.
As a result of scroll of the stored images to the right or left,
the stored image displayed on lower LCD 12 is changed and the
stored image selected by cursor 184 is changed.
[0468] In the present embodiment, in the photograph display mode, a
picked-up image stored in any of the simplified photographing
processing and the multifunctional photographing processing is
displayed. In the present embodiment, a stored image stored in the
simplified photographing processing and a stored image stored in
the multifunctional photographing processing are stored without
distinction. Specifically, a rule for attaching a file name to a
data file of the stored image (for example, attaching a file name
using time and date of photographing, a total number of images
taken by game device 10, and the like) is the same for any stored
image. Since the stored images stored in any photographing
processing are stored without distinction, stored images stored in
any photographing processing can both be displayed in the
photograph display mode.
[0469] Setting button 187 is a button image for performing an
operation for newly setting the stored image selected by cursor 184
as a favorite image. In other words, when a touch input of setting
button 187 is made, the stored image selected by cursor 184 is set
as a favorite image.
[0470] End button 188 is a button image for performing an operation
for ending the photograph display mode. In other words, when a
touch input of end button 188 is made, the photograph display mode
ends and the processing by CPU 31 returns to the processing in step
SA31.
[0471] In step SA41, some information may or may not be displayed
on upper LCD 22. In the present embodiment, CPU 31 causes upper LCD
22 to display the stored image selected with cursor 184.
[0472] Referring back to the description in connection with FIG.
32, subsequent to step SA41, processing in step SA42 is performed.
In step SA42, CPU 31 accepts an input to each input device. The
processing in step SA42 is the same as the processing in step SA6
above. Subsequent to step SA42, processing in step SA43 is
performed.
[0473] In step SA43, CPU 31 determines whether an operation to
scroll the stored image displayed on lower LCD 12 has been
performed or not. Determination in step SA43 can be made by
referring to input position data stored in main memory 32 in step
SA42. In other words, in the determination processing in step SA43,
CPU 31 determines whether an input to touch an area where scroll
button 185 or 186 is displayed has been provided or not.
[0474] When a result of determination in step SA43 indicates Yes,
processing in step SA44 is performed. On the other hand, when the
result of determination in step SA43 indicates No, processing in
step SA45 which will be described later is performed.
[0475] In step SA44, CPU 31 scrolls the stored image displayed on
lower LCD 12. In other words, when a touch input of scroll button
185 is made, CPU 31 scrolls the stored image to the right, and when
a touch input of scroll button 186 is made, CPU 31 scrolls the
stored image to the left. Thus, a stored image that has not been
displayed so far on the screen of lower LCD 12 is displayed.
Subsequent to step SA44, the processing in step SA41 above is
performed again.
[0476] Meanwhile, in step SA45, CPU 31 determines whether an
operation for setting a stored image as a favorite image has been
performed or not. Determination in step SA45 can be made by
referring to the input position data stored in main memory 32 in
step SA42. In other words, in the determination processing in step
SA45, CPU 31 determines whether an input to touch an area where
setting button 187 is displayed has been provided or not. When a
result of determination in step SA45 indicates Yes, processing in
step SA46 is performed. On the other hand, when the result of
determination in step SA45 indicates No, the processing in step
SA41 above is performed again.
[0477] In step SA46, CPU 31 sets a stored image currently selected
with cursor 184 as a favorite image. Specifically, CPU 31 adds
information indicative of the favorite image to data of the stored
image stored in data memory 34 for storage or memory card 28. In
addition, in the present embodiment, in step SA46, CPU 31 causes
the user to select to which of the first to third groups the stored
image should belong. Therefore, information indicative of a group
selected by the user among the first to third groups is added to
the data of the stored image above. Subsequent to step SA46 above,
processing in step SA47 is performed.
[0478] In step SA47, CPU 31 determines whether to end the
photograph display mode or not. Determination in step SA47 can be
made by referring to the input position data stored in main memory
32 in step SA42. In other words, in the determination processing in
step SA47, CPU 31 determines whether an input to touch an area
where end button 188 is displayed has been provided or not. When a
result of determination in step SA47 indicates Yes, CPU 31 ends the
photograph display mode processing shown in FIG. 32. On the other
hand, when the result of determination in step SA47 indicates No,
the processing in step SA41 above is performed again.
[0479] In the photograph display mode described above, the user can
view the stored images taken in the past and also can set the
stored image as a favorite image. As described above, in step SA3
above, the display image displayed on the menu screen (display
image 75 shown in FIG. 23) is selected from among favorite images.
Therefore, the user can select an image to be displayed as a
display image by himself or herself.
[0480] Referring back to the description in connection with FIG.
30, when the processing in step SA34 above ends, the processing in
step SA31 is performed again. Therefore, when the photograph
display mode ends, the screen for causing the user to select any of
the photograph display mode and the photographing mode is displayed
again (step SA31).
[0481] Meanwhile, in step SA35, CPU 31 determines whether the
photographing mode has been selected or not. Determination in step
SA35 can be made by referring to the input position data stored in
main memory 32 in step SA32. In other words, in the determination
processing in step SA35, CPU 31 determines whether an input to
touch an area where image 101 indicating the photographing mode is
displayed has been provided or not. When a result of determination
in step SA35 indicates Yes, processing in step SA36 is performed.
On the other hand, when the result of determination in step SA35
indicates No, processing in step SA37 which will be described later
is performed.
[0482] In step SA36, CPU 31 performs processing to be performed in
the photographing mode (photographing mode processing). Details of
the photographing mode processing will be described hereinafter
with reference to FIG. 34.
[0483] FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a flow of the photographing
mode processing (step SA36) shown in FIG. 32. In the photographing
mode processing, initially in step SA50, CPU 31 obtains data of an
image picked-up by inner camera 23 or outer camera 25. Processing
in step SA50 is the same as the processing in step SA22 above (FIG.
22). Subsequent to step SA50, processing in step SA51 is
performed.
[0484] In step SA51, CPU 31 performs display processing. In step
SA51 in the photographing mode, the image picked-up by camera 23 or
24 or the like is displayed. An image displayed in the
photographing mode will be described hereinafter with reference to
FIG. 35(a).
[0485] FIG. 35(a) is a diagram showing an example of the image
displayed in the photographing mode. As shown in FIG. 35(a), in
step SA51, in addition to picked-up image 77 as in FIG. 24, various
buttons 91 to 99 are displayed on lower LCD 12. Each of buttons 91
to 99 is an image for giving an instruction to game device 10 in
response to the user's touch input to a position on the image.
Buttons 91 to 99 will be described hereinafter.
[0486] A photographing button 91 is a button image for performing
the photographing operation. In other words, when a touch input of
photographing button 91 is made, processing for storing a picked-up
image is performed. It is noted that photographing button 91 is
preferably displayed substantially at a center of lower housing 11
(in the left-right direction) such that the user can easily operate
photographing button 91 with either a right hand or a left
hand.
[0487] A camera change button 92 is an image for performing a
camera change operation. In other words, when a touch input of
camera change button 92 is made, a camera for picking up an image
is changed between inner camera 23 and outer camera 25.
[0488] An end button 93 is a button image for performing an
operation for ending the photographing mode. In other words, when a
touch input of end button 93 is made, the photographing mode ends
and the processing by CPU 31 returns to the processing in step
SA31.
[0489] Each of buttons 94 to 99 is a button image for giving an
instruction in edition processing. A pen mode button 94, an eraser
mode button 95, and a stamp mode button 96 are button images for
performing an operation for changing an edition mode. Here, in the
present embodiment, three modes of a pen mode, a stamp mode and an
eraser mode are prepared in advance. In the pen mode, an image of
an input trail input to touch panel 13 can be added to a picked-up
image. In the stamp mode, a stamp image prepared in advance can be
added to a picked-up image. In the eraser mode, an image added in
the pen mode or the stamp mode can be erased. Pen mode button 94 is
an image for giving an instruction to change the edition mode to
the pen mode. Eraser mode button 95 is an image for giving an
instruction to change the edition mode to the eraser mode. Stamp
mode button 96 is an image for giving an instruction to change the
edition mode to the stamp mode.
[0490] A thickness change button 97 is an image for giving an
instruction to change a thickness of a line to be input in the pen
mode. A color change button 98 is an image for giving an
instruction to change a color of a line to be input in the pen
mode. An all erase button 99 is an image for giving an instruction
to erase all images added in the pen mode or the stamp mode.
[0491] By giving an instruction using each of buttons 94 to 99
above, the user can input an image over the picked-up image
displayed on lower LCD 12 (in a manner superimposed on the
picked-up image). It is noted that FIG. 35(a) shows an image in the
case where there is no image input by the user in the edition
processing which will be described later. Further, in the present
embodiment, an image for explaining a manner of operation in the
photographing mode to the user is displayed on upper LCD 22.
[0492] Referring back to the description in connection with FIG.
34, in step SA52, CPU 31 accepts an input to each input device.
Processing in step SA52 is the same as the processing in step SA6
above. Subsequent to step SA52, processing in step SA33 is
performed.
[0493] In step SA53, CPU 31 determines whether the photographing
operation has been performed or not. Determination in step SA53 can
be made by referring to operation data and input position data
stored in main memory 32 in step SA52. In other words, in the
determination processing in step SA53, CPU 31 determines whether L
button 14I or R button 14J has been pressed or not or whether an
input to touch an area where photographing button 91 is displayed
has been provided or not.
[0494] Thus, in the multifunctional photographing processing, the
user can perform an operation the same as the photographing
operation in the simplified photographing processing (the operation
of pressing L button 14I or R button 14J) as the photographing
operation and can perform an operation to touch photographing
button 91 as the photographing operation. When a result of
determination in step SA53 indicates Yes, processing in step SA54
is performed. On the other hand, when the result of determination
in step SA53 indicates No, processing in step SA55 which will be
described later is performed.
[0495] As described in connection with step SA53 above, in the
present embodiment, the photographing processing function attained
in common by simplified photographing program 52 and
multifunctional photographing application program 53 is performed
by performing the same operation (the operation of pressing L
button 14I or R button 14J). Since the same function is attained by
the same operation in spite of change of a program, a user-friendly
operation system can be provided.
[0496] It is noted that the phrase "the function attained in common
is performed by performing the same operation" means that a certain
identical function should only be performed by performing a certain
operation in both of simplified photographing program 52 and
multifunctional photographing application program 53, and it does
not intend to exclude such meaning that the function is attained
also by performing an operation different from the certain
operation in any one of simplified photographing program 52 and
multifunctional photographing application program 53. In other
words, as in the present embodiment, in multifunctional
photographing application program 53, the photographing processing
may be performed by performing the operation to touch photographing
button 91 other than the operation to press L button 14I or R
button 14J.
[0497] In step SA54, CPU 31 has a picked-up image stored.
Processing in step SA54 is the same as the processing in step SA26
in the simplified photographing processing above. Therefore, in the
present embodiment, processing for storing a picked-up image is
similarly performed in the simplified photographing processing and
the multifunctional photographing processing. Specifically, a
method of deciding a camera used for image pick-up and a method of
deciding a storage destination in the simplified photographing
processing are the same as those in the multifunctional
photographing processing. Subsequent to step SA54, processing in
step SA59 which will be described later is performed.
[0498] In step SA55, CPU 31 determines whether the camera change
operation has been performed or not. Determination in step SA55 can
be made by referring to the input position data stored in main
memory 32 in step SA52. In other words, in the determination
processing in step SA55, CPU 31 determines whether an input to
touch an area where camera change button 92 is displayed has been
provided or not. When a result of determination in step SA55
indicates Yes, processing in step SA56 is performed. On the other
hand, when the result of determination in step SA55 indicates No,
processing in step SA57 which will be described later is
performed.
[0499] In step SA56, CPU 31 changes the camera for picking up an
image. In other words, when the camera for picking up an image is
inner camera 23, CPU 31 changes the camera for picking up an image
to outer camera 25. When the camera for picking up an image is
outer camera 25, CPU 31 changes the camera for picking up an image
to inner camera 23. Specifically, CPU 31 gives an instruction to
stop an operation to one of cameras 23 and 25 that is picking up an
image, and gives an instruction to perform image pick-up to the
other camera. If the processing in step SA56 above is performed, in
step SA50 that will subsequently be performed, data of an image
picked-up by the camera after the change is obtained by CPU 31, and
in subsequent step SA51, the image picked-up by the camera after
the change is displayed on lower LCD 12. Further, in step SA56, CPU
31 causes main memory 32 to store data indicative of the camera
after the change as camera change data 67. Thus, when the
multifunctional photographing processing is performed next time and
when the simplified photographing processing is performed next
time, image pick-up will be performed by the camera after the
change. Subsequent to step SA56, processing in step SA59 which will
be described later is performed.
[0500] In step SA57, CPU 31 determines whether an edition operation
has been performed or not. Determination in step SA57 can be made
by referring to the input position data stored in main memory 32 in
step SA52. In other words, in the determination processing in step
SA57, CPU 31 determines whether an input to touch an area where any
of buttons 94 to 99 is displayed or an area where picked-up image
77 is displayed has been provided or not. When a result of
determination in step SA57 indicates Yes, processing in step SA58
is performed. On the other hand, when the result of determination
in step SA57 indicates No, the processing in step SA59 which will
be described later is performed.
[0501] In step SA58, CPU 31 performs various types of edition
processing in accordance with a touch input made by the user. For
example, when any of buttons 94 to 98 is touched, CPU 31 changes
setting (the edition mode and the setting relating to a thickness
or a color of a line) in accordance with a touched button. When the
area of picked-up image 77 is touched, CPU 31 performs processing
in accordance with the edition mode with respect to a touched
position. In other words, when the edition mode is set to the pen
mode, an image of trail of touch input is added to picked-up image
77. When the edition mode is set to the stamp mode, a stamp image
prepared in advance is added to picked-up image 77 at the touched
position. When the edition mode is set to the eraser mode, the
image added at the touched position in the pen mode or the stamp
mode is erased. When all erase button 99 is touched, all images
added to picked-up image 77 in the pen mode or the stamp mode are
erased. Details of the processing in accordance with the edition
mode in step SA58 will be described later.
[0502] Subsequent to step SA58 above, the processing in step SA59
is performed.
[0503] In step SA59, CPU 31 determines whether to end the
photographing mode or not. Determination in step SA59 can be made
by referring to the input position data stored in main memory 32 in
step SA452. In other words, in the determination processing in step
SA59, CPU 31 determines whether an input to touch an area where end
button 93 is displayed has been provided or not. When a result in
step SA59 indicates Yes, CPU 31 ends the photographing mode
processing shown in FIG. 34. On the other hand, when the result of
determination in step SA59 indicates No, the processing in step
SA50 above is performed again. This is the end of the description
of the photographing mode processing shown in FIG. 34.
[0504] Multifunctional photographing application program 53
described above may have a function to subject picked-up image 77
to other types of edition operations or an operation for providing
effect, in addition to the edition function described above. In
such a case, the menu screen for allowing the user to select a
desired function is preferably displayed prior to the display
processing in step SA51. An example of the menu screen displayed in
the photographing mode will be described hereinafter with reference
to FIG. 35(b).
[0505] FIG. 35(b) is a diagram showing an example of the menu
screen displayed in the photographing mode. As shown in FIG. 35(b),
the menu screen including a button group 150 and various buttons
152, 154, 156, and 158 in addition to picked-up image 77 as in FIG.
24 is displayed on lower LCD 12. Each icon image included in button
group 150 is an image for instructing game device 10 to select a
corresponding function included in multifunctional photographing
application program 53. Each button 152, 154, 156, and 158 will be
described hereinafter.
[0506] Scroll buttons 152 and 154 are button images for selecting
each icon image included in button group 150. Namely, when a touch
input of scroll button 152 or 154 is made, an icon image in a
selected (active) state among the icon images included in button
group 150 is successively changed.
[0507] An end button 156 is a button image for performing an
operation to end the photographing mode. Namely, when a touch input
of end button 152 is made, the photographing mode ends and the
processing by CPU 31 returns to the processing in step SA31.
[0508] A start button 158 is a button image for performing an
operation to indicate execution of a function selected from among
the functions included in the multifunctional photographing
application program. Namely, when a touch input of start button 158
subsequent to selection of any icon image included in button group
150 is made, the function corresponding to the selected icon image
is performed.
[0509] Referring back to the description in connection with FIG.
30, when the processing in step SA36 above ends, the processing in
step SA31 is performed again. Therefore, when the photographing
mode ends, the screen for causing the user to select any of the
photograph display mode and the photographing mode is displayed
again (step SA31).
[0510] Meanwhile, in step SA37, CPU 31 determines whether an
operation for changing a storage destination of a stored image has
been performed or not. Determination in step SA37 can be made by
referring to the input position data stored in main memory 32 in
step SA32. In other words, in the determination processing in step
SA37, CPU 31 determines whether an input to touch an area where the
image indicating change of a storage destination of a picked-up
image has been provided or not. When a result of determination in
step SA37 indicates Yes, processing in step SA38 is performed. On
the other hand, when the result of determination in step SA37
indicates No, processing in step SA39 which will be described later
is performed.
[0511] In step SA38, CPU 31 changes a storage destination of a
picked-up image. In other words, when a current storage destination
is set to data memory 34 for storage, the storage destination is
changed to memory card 28, and when the current storage destination
is set to memory card 28, the storage destination is changed to
data memory 34 for storage. Specifically, CPU 31 causes main memory
32 to store data indicative of the storage destination after the
change as storage destination data 68. Subsequent to step SA38, the
processing in step SA31 is performed again.
[0512] In step SA39, CPU 31 determines whether to end the
multifunctional photographing processing or not. Determination is
made based on whether or not an instruction to end the
multifunctional photographing processing has been given by the
user. For example, the instruction to end the multifunctional
photographing processing may be given in such a manner that a
button image for performing an operation to end the multifunctional
photographing processing is displayed in the display processing in
step SA31 and that button image is touched. Alternatively, the
instruction may be given also by pressing a predetermined
prescribed button. When a result of determination in step SA39
indicates No, the processing in step SA31 is performed again. On
the other hand, when the result of determination in step SA39
indicates Yes, CPU 31 ends execution of multifunctional
photographing application program 53 and ends the multifunctional
photographing processing. Thereafter, the processing in step SA3
shown in FIG. 21 is performed again.
[0513] Referring back to the description in connection with FIG.
21, in step SA13, CPU 31 determines whether to end the processing
in game device 10 or not. Determination in step SA13 is made, for
example, based on whether a prescribed end instruction operation
(specifically, an operation to press power button 14F or the like)
has been performed by the user or not. When a result of
determination in step SA13 indicates No, the processing in step SA5
is performed again. On the other hand, when the result of
determination in step SA13 indicates Yes, CPU 31 ends the
processing shown in FIG. 21.
[0514] As described above, according to the present embodiment, in
the state where the menu screen is displayed (in the launch
acceptance state; in step SA5), game device 10 accepts the first
launch operation for launching a selected application program
(steps SA11 and SA12) and the photographing enabling operation for
launching simplified photographing program 52 (steps SA9 and SA10).
Therefore, since simplified photographing program 52 can
immediately be launched by performing the photographing enabling
operation from the state where the menu screen is displayed, the
user can easily launch simplified photographing program 52.
Particularly, in the present embodiment, in order to launch a
desired selected application program, the user has to perform the
first launch operation after a scrolling operation as necessary,
while the user has only to perform the photographing enabling
operation in order to launch simplified photographing program 52.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, simplified photographing
program 52 can more easily be launched than the selected
application program.
[0515] In addition, according to the embodiment above, during
execution of simplified photographing program 52 (in the
photographing enabled state; in steps SA22 to SA29), CPU 31 accepts
the second launch operation for launching photographing application
program 53 (step SA29). Thus, the user can launch multifunctional
photographing application program 53 by performing the second
launch operation even during photographing based on simplified
photographing program 52. Therefore, even when the user desires to
use a function of multifunctional photographing application program
53 not attained by simplified photographing program 52 during
photographing based on simplified photographing program 52, the
user can easily and quickly use the function by performing the
second launch operation.
[0516] Further, in the present embodiment, simplified photographing
program 52 having a relatively simple function can quickly be
launched from the menu screen, and multifunctional photographing
application program 53 having more functions can immediately be
launched during execution of simplified photographing program
52.
[0517] Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the user can
be caused to use game device 10 in such a manner of use that "game
device 10 is initially operated based on a photographing program
having a simple function and then various photographing functions
of game device 10 are utilized based on a photographing program
having more functions," and the user can be caused to use game
device 10 in such a manner that he/she gradually gets used to an
operation of game device 10.
[0518] Further, simplified photographing program 52 can be assumed
as an introduction (a trial version) for multifunctional
photographing application program 53, and from the viewpoint of a
supplier of game device 10, the user can be prompted to use
multifunctional photographing application program 53 by allowing
quick launch of simplified photographing program 52 from the menu
screen.
[0519] Further, in the present embodiment, since the function of
simplified photographing program 52 is a part of the functions of
multifunctional photographing application program 53, the data size
of simplified photographing program 52 is smaller than that of
multifunctional photographing application program 53. Therefore, by
setting a program launched with the photographing enabling
operation above from the menu screen to simplified photographing
program 52 having the smaller data size, a program for
photographing can quickly be launched from the menu screen.
[0520] <Photographing Leading Processing>
[0521] Details of the photographing leading processing in step SA2
above will now be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a flow
of the photographing leading processing (step SA2) shown in FIG.
21. In the photographing leading processing, initially in step
SA61, CPU 31 has a selection screen displayed for causing the user
to select whether to perform photographing or not (that is, whether
to make transition of the state of game device 10 to the
photographing enabled state or not). For example, together with a
message that "Why don't you take a picture," a button image for
giving an instruction to perform photographing and a button image
for giving an instruction not to perform photographing are
displayed on lower LCD 12. Subsequent to step SA61, processing in
step SA62 is performed.
[0522] In step SA62, CPU 31 accepts an input to each input device.
The processing in step SA62 is the same as the processing in step
SA6 above. Subsequent to step SA62, processing in step SA63 is
performed.
[0523] In step SA63, CPU 31 determines whether the instruction to
perform photographing has been selected or not. Determination in
step SA63 can be made by referring to input position data stored in
main memory 32 in step SA62. In other words, in the determination
processing in step SA63, CPU 31 determines whether an input to
touch an area where the button image for giving the instruction to
perform photographing has been provided or not. When a result of
determination in step SA63 indicates Yes, processing in step SA64
is performed. On the other hand, when the result of determination
in step SA63 indicates No, processing in step SA65 which will be
described later is performed.
[0524] In step SA64, CPU 31 performs the simplified photographing
processing. As this simplified photographing processing is the same
as in step SA10 above, detailed description thereof will not be
provided. Since the photographing enabled state can be set as a
result of the simplified photographing processing, the user can
perform the photographing operation. After the simplified
photographing processing in step SA64 ends, CPU 31 ends the
photographing leading processing shown in FIG. 27. In the present
embodiment, since the processing in step SA64 is the same as the
processing in step SA10, multifunctional photographing application
program 53 can also be launched during the simplified photographing
processing in step SA64, as in step SA10. In an alternative
embodiment, however, in the simplified photographing processing in
step SA64, button image 78 for performing the second launch
operation may not be displayed such that launch of multifunctional
photographing application program 53 is not permitted.
[0525] On the other hand, in step SA65, CPU 31 has an image for
introducing a photographing function displayed. For example, an
image or the like for explaining functions relating to simplified
photographing program 52 and multifunctional photographing
application program 53 is displayed on LCDs 12 and 22. After step
SA65, CPU 31 ends the photographing leading processing shown in
FIG. 27.
[0526] As described above, in the present embodiment, game device
10 determines whether game device 10 is started up for the first
time or not (step SA1). When game device 10 is started up for the
first time (Yes in step SA1), game device 10 provides display for
causing the user to select whether to make transition of the state
of game device 10 to the photographing enabled state or not (step
SA61). Then, when the user selects to perform photographing (Yes in
step SA63), game device 10 causes the user to actually experience
the photographing operation (step SA64).
[0527] Thus, the user can be led to initially experience the
photographing operation in game device 10. In other words, through
the photographing leading processing, a user using game device 10
for the first time can be caused to initially perform the
photographing operation to get used to the photographing operation.
Further, in the present embodiment, since the user is caused to
experience the simple photographing operation based on simplified
photographing program 52 above in step SA64, the user can perform
the photographing operation more easily than in an example where
the user is caused to initially experience the photographing
operation based on multifunctional photographing application
program 53.
[0528] Further, from the viewpoint of a manufacturer of game device
10, the photographing function of game device 10 can be introduced
to the user in a manner easy to understand, by having the user
initially actually experience the simple photographing
operation.
[0529] In the present embodiment, the user is caused to select
whether or not to make transition to the photographing enabled
state in step SA61. In an alternative embodiment, however, in the
photographing leading processing, transition to the photographing
enabled state may be made without user's selection. In other words,
the photographing processing based on photographing program 52 or
53 may be performed without user's selection.
[0530] <As to Change of Display Screen>
[0531] In the present embodiment, game device 10 changes content of
the display image on the menu screen at prescribed timing
(automatically without an instruction from the user), which
produces variation in the menu screen and the user can be prevented
from getting bored.
[0532] Further, in the present embodiment, the prescribed timing
above includes timing of start-up of game device 10 and timing of
end of the selected application program. Namely, as described
above, when game device 10 is started up and when a selected
application program ends, the display processing in step SA5 is
performed after the processing in step SA3 and thus the display
image on the menu screen is changed. In other words, each time game
device 10 is started up and each time a selected application
program is executed, the display image is changed.
[0533] According to this feature, as the user can have things to
look forward to (regarding "which image will be displayed") at the
time of start-up and end of execution of the selected application
program, from the viewpoint of the supplier of game device 10, an
effect to prompt the user to start up game device 10 and to execute
a selected application program (that is, to use game device 10) is
achieved.
[0534] In addition, in the present embodiment, the prescribed
timing above includes timing of opening foldable information
processing device 10. In the present embodiment, since game device
10 in the closed state is in a sleep mode state, "timing of
start-up of game device 10" above may well be said to include
"timing of opening of game device 10 from the closed state (sleep
mode) (re-start of game device 10 from the sleep mode)." When game
device 10 is opened again after game device 10 in the opened state
is once closed, CPU 31 changes the display image between before and
after closing.
[0535] Thus, as the user has things to look forward to in opening
game device 10, from the viewpoint of the supplier of game device
10, an effect to prompt the user to use game device 10 is achieved
by making the user open game device 10. In the present embodiment,
at the timing of opening of game device 10 from the closed state,
the display image is changed not in a random manner but in a
prescribed order. Details of processing for changing the display
image in response to opening and closing will be described
hereinafter with reference to FIG. 28.
[0536] FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing details of processing
(processing at the time of opening and closing) performed when game
device 10 is opened and closed. The processing shown in FIG. 28 is
started in response to closing of game device 10 at any timing
during the processing shown in FIG. 21.
[0537] In the processing at the time of opening and closing,
initially in step SA71, CPU 31 causes game device 10 to make
transition to the sleep mode. Specifically, CPU 31 stops image
display on each of LCDs 12 and 22 or temporarily stops processing
in an application program being executed. Subsequent to step SA71,
processing in step SA72 is performed.
[0538] In step SA72, CPU 31 determines whether game device 10 has
been opened or not. When a result of determination in step SA72
indicates Yes, processing in step SA73 is performed. On the other
hand, when the result of determination in step SA72 indicates No,
the processing in step SA72 is performed again. In other words, CPU
31 waits until game device 10 is opened.
[0539] In step SA73, CPU 31 changes the display image from a state
before the processing at the time of opening and closing is
started. Here, in step SA73, the display image is changed by
successively selecting a display image from among the favorite
images in a prescribed order. A method of changing the display
image will be described hereinafter with reference to FIG. 29.
[0540] FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the method of changing the
display image in step SA73. FIG. 29 shows a case where the first
group includes three favorite images, the second group includes two
favorite images, and the third group includes four favorite images
by way of example. In the present embodiment, the favorite images
included in each group are managed with the favorite images being
arranged in a prescribed order. For example, the prescribed order
may be an order of time and date of photographing (storage), an
order of time and date of setting as a favorite image, or an order
set by the user. In step SA73, a favorite image is successively
changed in this order. In other words, CPU 31 sets a favorite image
immediately following a display image before change (in the state
before the processing at the time of opening and closing is
started) as a display image after change. Further, when a display
image before change is the last favorite image in a group, a first
favorite image in a next group is set as a display image after
change. Further, when a display image before change is the last
favorite image in the third group, a first favorite image in the
first group is set as a display image after change. As described
above, in step SA73, the display image is changed in an order
indicated by an arrow in FIG. 29. Subsequent to step SA73, CPU 31
ends the processing at the time of opening and closing, and returns
to a state immediately before the processing at the time of opening
and closing is started.
[0541] As described above, in the present embodiment, each time
game device 10 is opened, the display image is changed in the
prescribed order. Thus, the user can enjoy change of display images
one after another by performing an operation to open and close game
device 10. For example, the user can create a four-panel cartoon of
which picture (display image) changes every time game device 10 is
opened, or can successively view a series of photographs arranged
in chronological order by repeatedly opening and closing game
device 10. Here, in step SA3 above, CPU 31 may select a display
image from among first favorite images in respective groups in a
random manner. Thus, all images included in these groups can
successively be displayed in a prescribed order.
[0542] In an alternative embodiment, game device 10 may change the
display image in a prescribed order in accordance with a prescribed
operation (for example, an operation to press a prescribed button).
In other words, the prescribed timing above may be the timing of a
prescribed operation.
[0543] <Variation>
[0544] In the embodiment above, prescribed information (data) is
commonly used in simplified photographing program 52 and
multifunctional photographing application program 53. Specifically,
two programs 52 and 53 commonly use information on the camera for
image pick-up and information on a storage destination of a stored
image. Here, in an alternative embodiment, two programs 52 and 53
may commonly use other information. For example, in the case where
a file name of a stored image is determined based on a total number
of images taken by game device 10, information on the total number
of images may commonly be used.
[0545] Further, in an alternative embodiment, game device 10 may
cause content of an argument to be passed to multifunctional
photographing application program 53 to be different between when
multifunctional photographing application program 53 is launched in
the photographing enabled state (Yes in step SA29) and when
multifunctional photographing application program 53 is launched in
the launch acceptance state (Yes in step SA11).
[0546] For example, the argument above may be set as information
indicative of a mode at the time of start of execution of
multifunctional photographing application program 53. In other
words, the mode at the time of start of execution of
multifunctional photographing application program 53 may be
different between when multifunctional photographing application
program 53 is launched in the photographing enabled state and when
multifunctional photographing application program 53 is launched in
the launch acceptance state.
[0547] Specifically, when multifunctional photographing application
program 53 is launched in the launch acceptance state, the mode at
the time of start of execution thereof may be set to a mode for
causing the user to select between the photographing mode and the
photograph display mode as in the embodiment above. On the other
hand, when multifunctional photographing application program 53 is
launched in the photographing enabled state, a mode at the time of
start of execution thereof may be set to the photographing
mode.
[0548] This is because, when multifunctional photographing
application program 53 is launched in the photographing enabled
state, it can be assumed that the user launched multifunctional
photographing application program 53 for performing photographing
with a function not attained by simplified photographing program
52.
[0549] Further, in an alternative embodiment, when multifunctional
photographing application program 53 is launched in the
photographing enabled state, the mode at the time of start of
execution of multifunctional photographing application program 53
may be set to the photograph display mode, and in addition, an
image relating to a display image that has been displayed in the
photographing enabled state (for example, a favorite image in the
same group as the display image, an image taken on the same day as
the display image, and the like) may be displayed.
[0550] Further, in the embodiment above, a single button image for
launching multifunctional photographing application program 53 in
the photographing enabled state (button image 78 shown in FIG. 24)
is provided. In an alternative embodiment, however, two button
images may be displayed. Here, one of the two button images is a
button for launching multifunctional photographing application
program 53 with the mode at the time of start of execution thereof
being set to the photographing mode, and the other button image is
a button for launching multifunctional photographing application
program 53 with the mode at the time of start of execution thereof
being set to the photograph display mode. Thus, in an alternative
embodiment, game device 10 may prepare a plurality of types of
second launch operations, so that the mode at the time of start of
execution (of multifunctional photographing application program 53)
is different depending on a type of a performed second launch
operation.
[0551] Further, in the embodiment above, simplified photographing
program 52 is different from launch function program 51 and it is
launched by a launch program separately from launch function
program 51. Here, in an alternative embodiment, simplified
photographing program 52 may be implemented as a part of launch
function program 51 (that is, launch function program 51 and
simplified photographing program 52 may implement one program in
launch program 61). In an alternative embodiment, launch function
program 51 may launch simplified photographing program 52.
[0552] In other words, an instruction (an operation) for launching
simplified photographing program 52 should only be different from
that for launching multifunctional photographing application
program 53, and simplified photographing program 52 and
multifunctional photographing application program 53 may be
launched by the same program or by different programs.
7. Details of Function in Multifunctional Photographing
Application
[0553] <Overview>
[0554] As described above, as a result of execution of
multifunctional photographing application program 53, a large
number of functions not attained by simplified photographing
program 52 are provided. Details of two typical functions provided
by multifunctional photographing application program 53 according
to the present embodiment will be described hereinafter.
Processing Procedure
First Example
[0555] FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a flow of photographing
processing (No. 1) in the multifunctional photographing application
in game device 10. It is noted that a processing loop of steps SB1
to SB11 shown in FIG. 36 (except for a case where processing in
steps SB8 to SB10 are performed) is performed once in a prescribed
time period (for example, 1/60 sec.).
[0556] In step SB1 shown in FIG. 36, CPU 31 obtains data of an
image picked-up by inner camera 23 or outer camera 25. In the
present embodiment, an image is picked-up by any one of cameras 23
and 25. In step SB1, CPU 31 obtains image data only from one
camera. In the present embodiment, at the time of start of the
photographing processing, a camera for picking up an image is set
to outer camera 25. Subsequent to step SB1, processing in step SB2
is performed.
[0557] The image data obtained from camera 23 or 25 in step SB1
above is displayed on lower LCD 12. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an
example of an image displayed on each of LCDs 12 and 22. FIG. 37
shows an image in the case where there is no image input by the
user in input image generation processing which will be described
later. As shown in FIG. 37, CPU 31 causes lower LCD 12 to display a
real-time image (a picked-up image) 52 picked-up by camera 23 or
25. It is noted that an image 252 for explaining a manner of
operation to the user is displayed on upper LCD 22. In the present
embodiment, CPU 31 causes lower LCD 12 to display various button
images 253 to 261 together with picked-up image 252. Each of button
images 253 to 261 is an image for giving an instruction to game
device 10 by the user's touch input onto a position of the image.
Button images 253 to 261 will be described hereinafter.
[0558] A pen mode image 253, an eraser mode image 254, and a seal
mode image 255 are images for changing an edition mode. Here, in
the present embodiment, three modes of a pen mode, a seal mode and
an eraser mode are prepared in advance. In the pen mode, an image
of an input trail input to touch panel 13 can be added to the
picked-up image. In the seal mode, a seal image prepared in advance
can be added to the picked-up image. In the eraser mode, an image
added in the pen mode or the seal mode can be erased. Pen mode
image 253 is an image for giving an instruction to change the
edition mode to the pen mode. Eraser mode image 254 is an image for
giving an instruction to change the edition mode to the eraser
mode. Seal mode image 255 is an image for giving an instruction to
change the edition mode to the seal mode.
[0559] A thickness change image 256 is an image for giving an
instruction to change a thickness of a line input in the pen mode.
A color change image 257 is an image for giving an instruction to
change a color of a line input in the pen mode. An all erase image
258 is an image for giving an instruction to erase all images added
in the pen mode or the seal mode.
[0560] By giving instructions using button images 253 to 258 above,
the user can input an image over the picked-up image displayed on
lower LCD 12 (in a manner superimposed on the picked-up image).
Processing for generating an input image (input image generation
processing) will be described in detail later.
[0561] An end image 259 is an image for giving an instruction to
end the photographing processing. A photographing instruction image
260 is an image for giving a photographing instruction. In the
present embodiment, the photographing instruction is an instruction
to store (record) an image displayed on lower LCD 12 (an image
obtained by superimposing an input image on a picked-up image). It
is noted that photographing instruction image 260 is preferably
displayed substantially at the center of lower housing 11 (in the
left-right direction) for facilitating a user's operation with
either a right hand or a left hand. Therefore, if lower LCD 12 is
not arranged substantially at the center of lower housing 11, CPU
31 preferably has photographing instruction image 260 displayed
such that it is arranged substantially at the center of lower
housing 11, not at the center of lower LCD 12. A camera change
image 261 is an image for giving a camera change instruction. The
camera change instruction is an instruction to change a camera for
image pick-up between inner camera 223 and outer camera 225.
[0562] In step SB2, CPU 31 accepts an input to each input device.
In other words, CPU 31 obtains operation data from operation button
group 14 and obtains touch position data from touch panel 13. The
obtained operation data and touch position data are stored in main
memory 32. Subsequent to step SB2, processing in step SB3 is
performed.
[0563] In step SB3, CPU 31 determines whether the camera change
instruction has been given or not. In the present embodiment, the
camera change instruction is given by pressing a prescribed button
(for example, button 14B, button 14C, button 14D, or button 14E) or
by providing an input to touch panel 13 by touching an area where
camera change image 261 is displayed. Therefore, in the
determination processing in step SB3, CPU 31 determines whether or
not the prescribed button above has been pressed or whether or not
an input to touch the area where camera change image 261 is
displayed has been performed. Determination in step SB3 can be made
by referring to the operation data and the touch position data
stored in main memory 32 in step SB2. When a result of
determination in step SB3 indicates Yes, processing in step SB4 is
performed. On the other hand, when the result of determination in
step SB3 indicates No, processing in step SB5 which will be
described later is performed.
[0564] In step SB4, CPU 31 changes the camera for image pick-up. In
other words, when the camera for image pick-up is set to inner
camera 23, CPU 31 changes the camera for image pick-up to outer
camera 25. When the camera for image pick-up is set to outer camera
25, CPU 31 changes the camera for image pick-up to inner camera 23.
Specifically, CPU 31 gives an instruction to stop an operation to
one of cameras 23 and 25 picking up an image, and gives an
instruction to perform image pick-up (an image pick-up execution
instruction) to the other camera. If the processing in step SB4
above is performed, in step SB1 that will subsequently be
performed, data of an image picked-up by the camera after the
change is obtained by CPU 31, and in subsequent step SB6, the image
(live image) picked-up by the camera after the change is displayed
on lower LCD 12. Subsequent to step SB4, the processing in step SB1
is performed again.
[0565] In step SB5, CPU 31 performs the input image generation
processing. The input image generation processing is processing for
generating an input image based on user's input. The input image
generation processing will be described hereinafter in detail with
reference to FIGS. 38 and 39.
[0566] FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a flow of the input image
generation processing (step SB5) shown in FIG. 36. In the input
image generation processing, initially in step SB20, CPU 31
determines whether an operation for generating an input image has
been performed or not. In other words, CPU 31 determines whether an
input to touch an area where the picked-up image is displayed in
the input surface of touch panel 13 has been provided or not.
Determination in step SB20 can be made by determining whether or
not the touch position data obtained in step SB2 indicates a
position in the area where the picked-up image is displayed. When a
result of determination in step SB20 indicates Yes, processing in
step SB21 is performed. On the other hand, when the result of
determination in step SB20 indicates No, processing in step SB26
which will be described later is performed.
[0567] In step SB21, CPU 31 determines whether or not a current
edition mode is set to the pen mode. In the present embodiment, it
is assumed that the edition mode has been set to the pen mode at
the time of start of the edition processing. When a result of
determination in step SB21 indicates Yes, processing in step SB22
is performed. On the other hand, when the result of determination
in step SB21 indicates No, processing in step SB23 which will be
described later is performed.
[0568] In step SB22, processing in the pen mode is performed. In
other words, CPU 31 draws an image of a trail of touch input
provided on the picked-up image. Specifically, an image of a line
connecting positions indicated by the touch position data that has
been obtained in step SB2 by now is drawn in a memory (a frame
buffer) storing image data to be displayed on LCDs 12 and 22. It is
noted that a thickness and a color of a drawn line are determined
in accordance with contents set in step SB29 which will be
described later. The processing in step SB22 may be any processing
so long as the processing is processing for generating and drawing
an image representing a trail of positions of user's input to touch
panel 13. An example of such processing is shown in steps SB52 and
SB53 which will be described later. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an
example of an image displayed on each of LCDs 12 and 22 in the pen
mode. When the processing in step SB22 is performed, in display
processing which will be described later (step SB6), an input image
262 showing a trail drawn by the user is displayed in a manner
superimposed on the picked-up image displayed on lower LCD 12 (see
FIG. 39). Subsequent to step SB22, processing in step SB26 which
will be described later is performed.
[0569] On the other hand, in step SB23, CPU 31 determines whether
the current edition mode is set to the seal mode or not. When a
result of determination in step SB23 indicates Yes (namely, when
the current edition mode is set to the seal mode), processing in
step SB24 is performed. On the other hand, when the result of
determination in step SB23 indicates No (namely, when the current
edition mode is set to the eraser mode), processing in step SB25
which will be described later is performed.
[0570] In step SB24, processing in the seal mode is performed. In
other words, CPU 31 draws a prescribed seal image at a position of
touch input on the picked-up image. Specifically, CPU 31 draws the
prescribed seal image at a position indicated by the touch position
data obtained in step SB2. It is noted that the processing in step
SB24 may be any processing so long as the processing is processing
for generating and drawing the prescribed seal image at a position
of user's input to touch panel 13. An example of such processing is
shown in steps SB60 and SB61 which will be described later. When
the processing in step SB24 is performed, in display processing
which will be described later (step SB6), an input image which is
the prescribed seal image is displayed in a manner superimposed on
the picked-up image displayed on lower LCD 12. It is noted that CPU
31 may prepare a plurality of seal images in advance and cause the
user to select a seal image to be drawn from among the plurality of
seal images. Subsequent to step SB24, the processing in step SB26
which will be described later is performed.
[0571] On the other hand, in step SB25, processing in the eraser
mode is performed. In other words, CPU 31 erases the input image
(the image of the trail or the seal image) on an edited image in
accordance with an input to touch panel 13. Specifically, the input
image drawn at the position indicated by the touch position data
obtained in step SB2 is erased. Subsequent to step SB25, the
processing in step SB26 is performed.
[0572] In step SB26, CPU 31 determines whether an instruction to
erase all input images has been given or not. Specifically, CPU 31
determines whether an input to touch an area where all erase image
258 above is displayed has been provided or not. When a result of
determination in step SB26 indicates Yes, processing in step SB27
is performed. On the other hand, when the result of determination
in step SB26 indicates No, the processing in step SB27 is skipped
and processing in step SB28 which will be described later is
performed.
[0573] In step SB27, CPU 31 erases all input images that have been
generated and drawn by now. Thus, the user can start again an
operation for drawing an input image by touching all erase image
258. Subsequent to step SB27, processing in step SB28 is
performed.
[0574] In step SB28, CPU 31 determines whether an instruction to
change setting relating to the operation for generating an input
image has been given or not. Specifically, CPU 31 determines
whether an input to touch an area where each of button images 253
to 257 above is displayed has been provided or not. When a result
of determination in step SB28 indicates Yes, processing in step
SB29 is performed. On the other hand, when the result of
determination in step SB28 indicates No, the processing in step
SB28 is skipped and CPU 31 ends the input image generation
processing.
[0575] In step SB29, CPU 31 changes the setting in accordance with
the provided instruction. In other words, when a touch input to any
of mode images 253 to 255 is provided, CPU 31 changes the edition
mode to a mode corresponding to a mode image indicated by the touch
input. When a touch input to thickness change image 256 is made,
CPU 31 changes setting of a thickness of a line (trail) generated
in the pen mode. Specifically, CPU 31 displays a plurality of
images of lines different in thickness, causes the user to select a
line of a desired thickness from among the plurality of lines
different in thickness, and changes the setting of a thickness of a
line to the selected thickness. When a touch input to color change
image 257 is made, CPU 31 changes a color of a line (trail)
generated in the pen mode. Specifically, CPU 31 displays a
plurality of images of a plurality of colors, causes the user to
select a desired color from among the plurality of colors, and
changes the setting of a color of a line to the selected color.
After the end of step SB29, CPU 31 ends the input image generation
processing.
[0576] As a result of step SB5 above, addition to the real-time
image (the live image) based on an input to the touch panel is
made. In other words, the user can input an image over the
picked-up image displayed on lower LCD 12 (in a manner superimposed
on the picked-up image). In the present embodiment, though the
processing for adding an image drawn by the user or a seal image
prepared in advance to the picked-up image has been described by
way of example, in an alternative embodiment, CPU 31 should only
perform processing for modifying a real-time image, and it may
perform processing for distorting the picked-up image, processing
for altering expression of a face (processing for detecting a
feature point of the face through image recognition processing and
changing a position of the feature point) when a face of a person
is included in the picked-up image, processing for converting a
picked-up image into an image symmetrical about a line, and the
like.
[0577] Referring back to the description of step SB20, in step SB6
subsequent to step SB5, CPU 31 performs the display processing for
displaying a prescribed image on LCDs 12 and 22. Specifically, an
image such as image 252 shown in FIG. 37 for explaining a manner of
operation to the user is displayed on upper LCD 22. The picked-up
image obtained in step SB1 and button images 253 to 261 are
displayed on lower LCD 12 (see FIG. 37). Further, when an input
image is generated and drawn in the input image generation
processing, the input image is displayed over the picked-up image
(see FIG. 39). In the present embodiment, since the processing in
steps SB1 to SB6 is repeatedly performed, the picked-up image is
different each time. Therefore, the user can add an input image
onto an image picked up by camera 23 or 25 in real time. Subsequent
to step SB6, processing in step SB7 is performed.
[0578] In step SB7, CPU 31 determines whether a photographing
instruction has been given or not. In the present embodiment, the
photographing instruction is given by pressing a prescribed button
(for example, button 14I or button 14J) or by providing to touch
panel 13, an input to touch an area where photographing instruction
image 260 is displayed. It is noted that photographing may
automatically be performed at prescribed timing by program
processing. Therefore, in the determination processing in step SB7,
CPU 31 determines whether or not the prescribed button above has
been pressed or whether or not the input to touch the area where
photographing instruction image 260 is displayed has been provided.
Determination in step SB7 can be made by referring to the operation
data and the touch position data stored in main memory 32 in step
SB2. When a result of determination in step SB7 indicates Yes,
processing in step SB8 is performed. On the other hand, when the
result of determination in step SB7 indicates No, processing in
step SB11 which will be described later is performed.
[0579] In step SB8, CPU 31 holds (freezes) a display content (the
picked-up image and the input image) currently displayed on lower
LCD 12. In other words, display on lower LCD 12 of a still image
(the picked-up image and the input image displayed in step SB5)
which is a live image at the time when a photographing instruction
was given is continued. A period for which the still image is
displayed may be a predetermined prescribed period or a period
until display processing in step SB6 is performed next time. In an
alternative embodiment, the processing in step SB8 may not be
performed. In other words, a moving image of a live image may
always be displayed on lower LCD 12, instead of display of a still
image on lower LCD 12 in accordance with an image pick-up
instruction. Subsequent to step SB8, processing in step SB9 is
performed.
[0580] In step SB9, CPU 31 causes storage of a picked-up image
currently displayed on lower LCD 12 and the input image. In other
words, data of the picked-up image and the input image displayed in
step SB5 is stored, for example, in data memory 34 for storage.
Thus, the user can store the picked-up image and the input image
added onto the picked-up image. It is noted that CPU 31 may cause
storage of data of an image obtained by combining the picked-up
image and the input image, or may cause separate storage but in
association with each other, of image data of the picked-up image
and image data of the input image. Subsequent to step SB9,
processing in step SB10 is performed.
[0581] In step SB10, CPU 31 causes upper LCD 22 to display the
image stored in step SB9. It is noted that the image displayed on
upper LCD 22 is continuously displayed until another photographing
instruction is given (Yes in step SB7 again) and another stored
image is displayed in step SB10. In a variation, the image
displayed on upper LCD 22 may be displayed for a predetermined
prescribed period, or may be displayed until display processing in
step SB6 is performed next time. Further, after display of the
stored image ends, an image for explaining a manner of operation to
the user (an operation guidance image as described previously with
reference to FIG. 37) may be displayed on upper LCD 22. Though the
display processing is performed in step SB10 following the storage
processing in step SB9 in the present embodiment, any of the
storage processing and the display processing may be performed
first. Specifically, in response to a photographing instruction,
CPU 31 may cause upper LCD 22 to display an image stored in
response to the photographing instruction. CPU 31 may not only
display an image stored in response to a photographing instruction
but also may display an image which is to be stored in response to
a photographing instruction. Subsequent to step SB10, processing in
step SB11 is performed.
[0582] FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed on LCDs 12 and 22 when step SB10 is performed. As shown
in FIG. 40, in the present embodiment, in accordance with a
photographing instruction (a photographing operation), an image 263
stored in response to the photographing instruction is displayed on
upper LCD 22 (step SB10). Thus, an image representing a result of
photographing can be displayed on upper LCD 22 having a display
screen that faces in a display direction corresponding to the
photographing direction of camera 23 or 25 (in a direction the same
as the photographing direction or in a direction opposite to the
photographing direction). By displaying the image representing the
result of photographing on upper LCD 22, the image representing the
result of photographing can be presented to the user in a manner
easy for the user to recognize the photographing direction. In the
present embodiment, since a real-time image picked-up by camera 23
or 25 is displayed on lower LCD 12 of which display direction does
not correspond to the photographing direction of camera 23 or 25,
it is particularly effective to present the image representing the
result of photographing to the user in a manner easy for the user
to recognize the photographing direction.
[0583] In the present embodiment, an edition result obtained before
a photographing instruction is given is maintained also after the
photographing instruction was given (after an image is stored).
Namely, as shown in FIG. 40, input image 262 input prior to a
photographing instruction is displayed on lower LCD 12 in a manner
superimposed on a live image even after the photographing
instruction was given. In an alternative embodiment, an edition
result obtained before a photographing instruction is given may be
erased in accordance with the photographing instruction, and only a
live image may be displayed on lower LCD 12 after the photographing
instruction was given.
[0584] In an alternative embodiment, an image representing a result
of photographing (a stored image) may be displayed on upper LCD 22
at any timing, without limited to the timing in accordance with a
photographing instruction. For example, CPU 31 may cause upper LCD
22 to display an image representing a result of photographing in
accordance with a user's instruction to view an image (the number
of images may be one or more) or may always display an image
representing a result of photographing on upper LCD 22 instead of
the image for explaining a manner of operation.
[0585] In step SB11, CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the
edition processing. Determination is made based on whether or not
an instruction to end the edition processing has been given by the
user. Specifically, determination in step SB11 is made based on
whether a touch input to an area of end image 259 displayed on
lower LCD 12 has been provided or not. When a result of
determination in step SB11 indicates No, CPU 31 performs the
processing in step SB1 again. Thereafter, the processing loop of
steps SB1 to SB11 is repeatedly performed until determination to
end the photographing processing is made in step SB11. On the other
hand, when the result of determination in step SB11 indicates Yes,
CPU 31 ends the photographing processing shown in FIG. 36.
[0586] Through the photographing processing described above, the
user can store an image picked-up by the camera in accordance with
the photographing instruction.
[0587] Here, in the present embodiment, two display devices are
included, an image being currently taken is displayed on one of the
display devices, and a picture for explaining an operation is
displayed on the other display device. Thus, since the user can
perform the photographing operation while looking at the picture
for explaining the operation in addition to the currently picked-up
image, user-friendly game device 10 can be provided. Further, in
the present embodiment, by providing touch panel 13 in lower LCD
12, an operation can more easily be performed.
[0588] Further, in the present embodiment, the user can provide the
photographing instruction by pressing button 14I or button 14J. By
using button 14I or button 14J as the shutter button, the user can
press the shutter button while holding lower housing 11 with both
hands. Thus, the photographing operation can more easily be
performed. In an alternative embodiment, some of buttons 14B to 14E
may be used as the shutter button. In this case as well, the user
can press the shutter button while holding lower housing 11 with
both hands as in the present embodiment. Alternatively, some
buttons of direction input button A (for example, one direction
input; for example, a left input) and one of buttons 14B to E (for
example, button 14D) may both have a function of the shutter
button. By doing so, either a left-handed user or a right-handed
user can easily operate the shutter button.
Processing Procedure
Second Example
[0589] In the processing procedure above, in the photographing
processing, the case where the user adds an input image to an image
obtained in real time has been described by way of example,
however, in the photographing processing, the user may add an input
image to an image (a still image) picked-up by game device 10. A
second example of the photographing processing will be described
hereinafter with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45.
[0590] FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a flow of photographing
processing (No. 2) in the multifunctional photographing application
in game device 10. When power of game device 10 is turned on by
pressing of power button 14F, CPU 31 of game device 10 initializes
main memory 32 and the like, and then starts execution of a program
for performing the photographing processing shown in FIG. 41. It is
noted that a processing loop of steps SB31 to SB44 shown in FIG. 41
is performed once in a prescribed time period (for example, 1/60
sec.) except for a period when edition processing (step SB43) is
performed.
[0591] In step SB31 shown in FIG. 41, CPU 31 obtains data of an
image picked-up by inner camera 23 or outer camera 25. In the
present second example, an image is picked-up by only any one of
cameras 23 and 25. In step SB31, CPU 31 obtains image data only
from one camera. In the present variation, at the time of start of
the photographing processing, a camera for image pick-up is set to
outer camera 25. Subsequent to step SB31, processing in step SB32
is performed.
[0592] In step SB32, CPU 31 performs display processing for
displaying prescribed images on LCDs 12 and 22. FIG. 42 is a
diagram showing an example of an image displayed on LCDs 12 and 22
in step SB32. As shown in FIG. 42, CPU 31 causes upper LCD 22 to
display a real-time image (a picked-up image) 51 taken by camera 23
or 25. In other words, CPU 31 outputs the image data obtained in
step SB31 to upper LCD 22. Further, in the present variation, an
image 272 showing a current date is displayed on upper LCD 22 in a
manner superimposed on picked-up image 271.
[0593] In the present variation, magnification data indicative of a
magnification of the picked-up image displayed on upper LCD 22 is
stored in main memory 32. In step SB32, the picked-up image is
displayed on upper LCD 22 at a magnification indicated by the
magnification data. In other words, CPU 31 determines an area in
the picked-up image to be displayed in accordance with the
magnification above, zooms in an image of the determined area to
have a size of upper LCD 22 as necessary, and causes upper LCD 22
to display that image. It is noted that, at the time of start of
the photographing processing, the magnification data is set so as
to indicate a predetermined prescribed magnification (for example,
a magnification with which an entirety of the picked-up image is
displayed on upper LCD 22 (one time)). Content of the magnification
data is changed when a zoom change instruction which will be
described later is given. Therefore, when the picked-up image is
zoomed in and displayed on upper LCD 22, not the entirety but only
a part of the picked-up image may be displayed.
[0594] On the other hand, CPU 31 causes lower LCD 12 to display an
operation screen for operating game device 10. As shown in FIG. 42,
the operation screen displayed in step SB32 includes stored images
273A to 273D and instruction images 274 to 278 for giving various
instructions to game device 10 using touch panel 13.
[0595] Stored images 273A to 273D are images previously taken by
game device 10 and stored in game device 10 (or alternatively in
memory card 28) (referred to as stored images). In the present
variation, among the stored images, a prescribed number of images
(four in FIG. 42) are displayed on lower LCD 12. It is noted that,
in main memory 32, data indicative of stored images to be displayed
on lower LCD 12 (displayed stored images) is stored as displayed
stored image data. The displayed stored image data is, for example,
data indicative of an ID assigned to a stored image. In FIG. 42,
stored images 273A to 273D are aligned and displayed in order of
date (time and date) of photographing. Here, leftmost stored image
273A is an image taken at the earliest time, and the time of
photographing is earlier in order of stored image 273B which is
second from the left, stored image 273C which is second from the
right, and rightmost stored image 273D. In the present variation,
an instruction to perform edition processing for editing a stored
image (an edition instruction) can be given by providing a touch
input to displayed stored images 273A to 273D through touch panel
13.
[0596] Further, as the instruction images above, a photographing
instruction image 274, a camera change image 275, a zoom bar 276, a
zoom cursor 277, and display change images 278A and 278B are
displayed on lower LCD 12. Photographing instruction image 274 is
an image for giving a photographing instruction using touch panel
13. The photographing instruction is an instruction for causing
camera 23 or 25 of game device 10 to perform photographing. Camera
change image 275 is an image for giving a camera change instruction
using touch panel 13. The camera change instruction is an
instruction to change the camera for image pick-up between inner
camera 23 and outer camera 25. Zoom bar 276 and zoom cursor 277 are
images for giving a zoom change instruction using touch panel 13.
The zoom change instruction is an instruction to zoom in/out the
picked-up image displayed on upper LCD 22. Display change images
278A and 278B are images for giving a display change instruction.
The display change instruction is an instruction for changing
stored images to be displayed as stored images 273A to 273D on
lower LCD 12 among the stored images stored in game device 10. A
manner of giving each of these instructions and processing
performed by game device 10 in accordance with each of the
instructions will be described later.
[0597] Referring back to the description in connection with FIG.
41, subsequent to step SB32, processing in step SB33 is performed.
In step SB33, CPU 31 accepts an input to each input device. In
other words, CPU 31 obtains operation data from operation button
group 14 and obtains touch position data from touch panel 13. The
obtained operation data and touch position data are stored in main
memory 32. Subsequent to step SB33, processing in step SB34 is
performed.
[0598] In step SB34, CPU 31 determines whether the photographing
instruction has been given or not. In the present variation, the
photographing instruction is given by pressing a prescribed button
(for example, button 14I or button 14J) or by providing to touch
panel 13, an input to touch an area where photographing instruction
image 274 is displayed. Therefore, in the determination processing
in step SB34, CPU 31 determines whether or not the prescribed
button above has been pressed or whether or not the input to touch
the area where photographing instruction image 274 is displayed has
been provided. Determination in step SB34 can be made by referring
to the operation data and the touch position data stored in main
memory 32 in step SB33. When a result of determination in step SB34
indicates Yes, processing in step SB35 is performed. On the other
hand, when the result of determination in step SB34 indicates No,
processing in step SB36 which will be described later is
performed.
[0599] In step SB35, CPU 31 performs the photographing processing.
In other words, CPU 31 causes data memory 34 for storage to store
(save) the image data obtained from the camera in step SB31. In an
alternative embodiment, CPU 31 may cause any of LCDs 12 and 22 to
display the image data obtained from the camera in step SB31, and
inquire of the user whether or not to store the image data. Only
when the user provides an instruction to store the image data, CPU
31 may cause data memory 34 for storage to store (save) the image
data. Further, in an alternative embodiment, CPU 31 may cause
memory card 28 to store data of the picked-up image, or may cause
the user to indicate whether the image data should be stored in a
device main body (data memory 34 for storage) or in memory card 28.
Subsequent to step SB35, processing in step SB42 which will be
described later is performed.
[0600] On the other hand, in step SB36, CPU 31 determines whether
the camera change instruction has been given or not. In the present
variation, the camera change instruction is given by pressing a
prescribed button (for example, button 14B, button 14C, button 14D,
or button 14E) or by providing to touch panel 13, an input to touch
an area where camera change image 275 is displayed. Thus, in the
determination processing in step SB36, CPU 31 determines whether or
not the prescribed button above has been pressed or whether or not
the input to touch the area where camera change image 275 is
displayed has been provided. Determination in step SB36 can be made
by referring to the operation data and the touch position data
stored in main memory 32 in step SB33. When a result of
determination in step SB36 indicates Yes, processing in step SB37
is performed. On the other hand, when the result of determination
in step SB36 indicates No, processing in step SB38 which will be
described later is performed.
[0601] In step SB37, CPU 31 changes the camera for image pick-up.
In other words, when the camera for image pick-up is set to inner
camera 23, CPU 31 changes the camera for image pick-up to outer
camera 25. When the camera for image pick-up is set to outer camera
25, CPU 31 changes the camera for image pick-up to inner camera 23.
Specifically, CPU 31 gives an instruction to stop an operation to
one of cameras 23 and 25 picking up an image and gives an
instruction to perform image pick-up (an image pick-up execution
instruction) to the other camera. If the processing in step SB37
above is performed, in step SB31 that will subsequently be
performed, data of an image picked-up by the camera after the
change is obtained by CPU 31, and in subsequent step SB32, the
image picked-up by the camera after the change is displayed on
upper LCD 22. Subsequent to step SB37, processing in step SB42
which will be described later is performed.
[0602] On the other hand, in step SB38, CPU 31 determines whether
the zoom change instruction has been given or not. In the present
variation, the zoom change instruction is given by moving zoom
cursor 277 on zoom bar 276 upward or downward by using a prescribed
button (for example, an up button or a down button of direction
input button 14A) or by providing an input to touch panel 13.
Specifically, zoom cursor 277 is moved upward by a prescribed
distance in accordance with pressing of the up button of direction
input button 14A and moved downward by a prescribed distance in
accordance with pressing of the down button of direction input
button 14A. In addition, the user can move zoom cursor 277 upward
or downward by initially touching a screen area where zoom cursor
277 is displayed and performing an operation with respect to touch
panel 13 to slide a touch position upward or downward while
touching the screen area. Therefore, in the determination
processing in step SB38, CPU 31 determines whether or not the
prescribed button above has been pressed or whether or not the
operation with respect to touch panel 13 for moving zoom cursor 277
has been performed. Determination in step SB38 can be made by
referring to the operation data and the touch position data stored
in main memory 32 in step SB33. When a result of determination in
step SB38 indicates Yes, processing in step SB39 is performed. On
the other hand, when the result of determination in step SB38
indicates No, processing in step SB40 which will be described later
is performed.
[0603] In step SB39, CPU 31 zooms in/out the picked-up image
displayed on upper LCD 22 in accordance with the zoom change
instruction. In other words, when an instruction for moving zoom
cursor 277 upward is given, CPU 31 changes the content of the
magnification data stored in main memory 32 such that the
magnification is lowered. Thus, in step SB32 that will subsequently
be performed, a picked-up image is displayed with the image being
zoomed out as compared to preceding step SB32. On the other hand,
when an instruction for moving zoom cursor 277 downward is given,
CPU 31 changes the content of the magnification data stored in main
memory 32 such the magnification is increased. Thus, in step SB32
that will subsequently be performed, a picked-up image is displayed
with the image being zoomed in as compared to preceding step SB32.
Subsequent to step SB39, processing in step SB42 which will be
described later is performed.
[0604] On the other hand, in step SB40, CPU 31 determines whether
the display change instruction has been given or not. In the
present variation, the display change instruction is given by
pressing a prescribed button (for example, a left button or a right
button of direction input button 14A) or by providing to touch
panel 13, an input to touch an area where display change image 278A
is displayed or an area where display change image 278B is
displayed. Therefore, in the determination processing in step SB40,
CPU 31 determines whether or not the prescribed button above has
been pressed or whether or not the input to touch the area where
display change image 278A is displayed or the area where display
change image 278B is displayed has been provided. Determination in
step SB40 can be made by referring to the operation data and the
touch position data stored in main memory 32 in step SB33. When a
result of determination in step SB40 indicates Yes, processing in
step SB41 is performed. On the other hand, when the result of
determination in step SB40 indicates No, processing in step SB42
which will be described later is performed.
[0605] In step SB41, CPU 31 changes stored images to be displayed
on lower LCD 12 (displayed stored images) among the stored images.
Specifically, when the right button of direction input button 14A
is pressed or when display change image 278B is touched, the
displayed stored images are shifted by one image toward recent
images. In other words, among the four currently displayed stored
images, the image taken at the earliest time is removed from the
displayed stored images. In addition, a stored image taken
subsequent to the image taken most recently among the four
currently displayed stored images is added as a new displayed
stored image. On the other hand, when the left button of direction
input button 14A is pressed or when display change image 278A is
touched, the displayed stored images are shifted by one image
toward old images. In other words, among the four currently
displayed stored images, the image taken most recently is removed
from the displayed stored images. In addition, a stored image taken
immediately before the image taken at the earliest time among the
four currently displayed stored images is added as a new displayed
stored image. In main memory 32, data indicative of the displayed
stored images after the change in step SB40 is stored as new
displayed stored image data. Subsequent to step SB41, processing in
step SB42 which will be described later is performed.
[0606] In step SB42, CPU 31 determines whether an edition
instruction has been given or not. In the present variation, the
edition instruction is given by providing through touch panel 13, a
touch input to a display area of a stored image of which edition is
desired among displayed stored images 273A to 273D. Thus, in the
determination processing in step SB42, CPU 31 determines whether
the input to touch any of the areas where stored images 273A to
273D are displayed respectively has been provided or not.
Determination in step SB42 can be made by referring to the
operation data and the touch position data stored in main memory 32
in step SB33. When a result of determination in step SB42 indicates
Yes, processing in step SB43 is performed. On the other hand, when
the result of determination in step SB42 indicates No, processing
in step SB44 which will be described later is performed.
[0607] In step SB43, CPU 31 performs the edition processing. The
edition processing is processing for editing a stored image.
Hereinafter, a stored image to be edited is referred to as an
edited image. The edition processing will be described hereinafter
in detail with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45.
[0608] FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a flow of the edition
processing (step SB43) shown in FIG. 41. In the edition processing,
initially in step SB51, CPU 31 determines whether or not the
current edition mode is set to the pen mode. Here, in the present
variation, in the edition processing, three modes of the pen mode,
the seal mode and the eraser mode are prepared in advance. In the
pen mode, an image of an input trail input through touch panel 13
can be added to an edited image. In the seal mode, a seal image
prepared in advance can be added to an edited image. In the eraser
mode, an image added in the pen mode or the seal mode can be
erased. In the present variation, it is assumed that the edition
mode has been set to the pen mode at the time of start of the
edition processing. When a result of determination in step SB51
indicates Yes, processing in step SB52 is performed. On the other
hand, when the result of determination in step SB51 indicates No,
processing in step SB58 which will be described later is
performed.
[0609] In steps SB52 to SB57, processing in the pen mode is
performed. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed on LCDs 12 and 22 in the pen mode in the edition
processing. As shown in FIG. 44, during the edition processing, an
operation screen for edition (an edition screen) is displayed on
lower LCD 12. Specifically, a part or an entirety of an edited
image 281 is displayed on lower LCD 12. Edited image 281 is a
stored image to be edited, that is, a stored image designated with
a touch input from among stored images 273A to 273D shown in FIG.
42. Further, images 284 to 290 for performing various operations
are displayed on lower LCD 12. Operations using these images 284 to
290 will be described in detail later. On the other hand, during
the edition processing, as shown in FIG. 44, entire edited image
281 is displayed on upper LCD 22. It is noted that a dotted-line
area 282 shown in FIG. 44 shows an area in edited image 281 being
displayed on lower LCD 12. An image of such a dotted-line area 282
may or may not be displayed on upper LCD 22. Since a real-time
image picked-up by camera 23 or 25 is not displayed during the
edition processing, CPU 31 may give an instruction not to perform
an image pick-up operation to each of cameras 23 and 25. The
processing in the pen mode (the steps SB52 to SB57) will be
described hereinafter in detail with reference to FIG. 44.
[0610] In step SB52, CPU 31 accepts an input to touch panel 13. In
other words, CPU 31 obtains touch position data from touch panel
13. The obtained touch position data is stored in main memory 32.
Subsequent to step SB52, processing in step SB53 is performed.
[0611] In step SB53, CPU 31 has an image of an input trail 283
displayed in accordance with an input to touch panel 13. In other
words, when a touch input through touch panel 13 to an area of
edited image 281 is provided, the image of input trail 283 is
displayed. Input trail 283 is an image showing a trail of positions
of touch input to touch panel 13. Specifically, when the touch
position data obtained in step SB52 indicates a position in an area
where edited image 281 is displayed, CPU 31 adds the image of input
trail 283 at the position in edited image 281. Edited image 281 to
which the image has been added is displayed on LCDs 12 and 22.
Since a processing loop of steps SB51 to SB56 is repeated once in a
prescribed time period (one frame time ( 1/60 sec.)) during the pen
mode, the processing in steps SB52 and SB53 is repeated during the
pen mode. Therefore, when the user continuously provides input to
touch panel 13 to draw a trail, the image of input trail 283 is
generated and displayed in a manner showing the trail. It is noted
that generation and display processing of input trail 283 in step
SB53 is performed only when a touch input to the area of edited
image 281 is provided, and it is not performed when a touch input
is not provided or when a touch input to an area other than the
area of edited image 281 is provided. Subsequent to step SB53,
processing in step SB54 is performed.
[0612] In step SB54, CPU 31 performs zoom in/out processing of
edited image 281 displayed on lower LCD 12. The zoom in/out
processing is performed when a magnification change instruction is
given, that is, when an input to an area of a magnification change
instruction image 289 displayed on lower LCD 12 is provided through
touch panel 13. Magnification change instruction image 289 is an
image for giving an instruction to zoom in or out edited image 281
displayed on lower LCD 12. In step SB54, CPU 31 changes a
magnification for displaying edited image 281 displayed on lower
LCD 12 when the touch position data obtained in step SB52 indicates
a position in the area where magnification change instruction image
289 is displayed. In the present variation, the magnification for
displaying edited image 281 has, for example, three levels, and CPU
31 changes the magnification in order of a low magnification, an
intermediate magnification, and a high magnification each time the
magnification change instruction is given. When the magnification
change instruction is given in the case of high magnification, CPU
31 changes the magnification to the low magnification. Thus, when
the magnification change instruction is given by the user, the
magnification for edited image 281 displayed on lower LCD 12 is
changed. It is noted that the magnification change processing in
step SB54 is performed only when a touch input to the area of
magnification change instruction image 289 is provided, and it is
not performed when an input to touch panel 13 is not provided or
when a touch input to an area other than the area of magnification
change instruction image 289 is provided. Subsequent to step SB54,
processing in step SB55 is performed.
[0613] In step SB55, CPU 31 performs movement processing of edited
image 281 displayed on lower LCD 12. The movement processing is
performed when a movement instruction is given, that is, when a
touch input to an area of a movement instruction image 290
displayed on lower LCD 12 is provided. Movement instruction image
290 is an image for giving an instruction to move (scroll) edited
image 281 displayed on lower LCD 12. In step SB55, CPU 31 scrolls
for display, edited image 281 displayed on lower LCD 12 when the
touch position data obtained in step SB52 indicates a position in
the area where movement instruction image 290 is displayed. In the
present variation, as shown in FIG. 44, movement instruction image
290 includes images indicating four directions of an upward
direction, a downward direction, a left direction, and a right
direction (triangle images in FIG. 44). When a touch input to any
of areas of these images is provided, CPU 31 scrolls edited image
281 in a direction corresponding to the image to which the touch
input was provided. It is noted that the movement processing in
step SB55 is performed only when a touch input to the area of
movement instruction image 290 is provided, and it is not performed
when an input to touch panel 13 is not provided or when a touch
input to an area other than the area of movement instruction image
290 is provided. Subsequent to step SB55, processing in step SB56
is performed.
[0614] In step SB56, CPU 31 determines whether or not to change the
edition mode. Determination is made based on whether or not a mode
change instruction has been given by the user. Specifically,
determination in step SB56 is made by determining whether a touch
input to any of areas of a pen mode image 284, an eraser mode image
285, and a seal mode image 286 displayed on lower LCD 12 has been
provided or not. Pen mode image 284 is an image for giving an
instruction to change the edition mode to the pen mode. Eraser mode
image 285 is an image for giving an instruction to change the
edition mode to the eraser mode. Seal mode image 286 is an image
for giving an instruction to change the edition mode to the seal
mode. In step SB56, when the position indicated by the touch
position data obtained in step SB52 is within the area where any of
pen mode image 284, eraser mode image 285, and seal mode image 286
is displayed, CPU 31 determines that a determination result
indicates Yes. Then, CPU 31 changes the edition mode to a mode
corresponding to the image to which input was provided. On the
other hand, when the position indicated by the touch position data
is not within the area where any of pen mode image 284, eraser mode
image 285, and seal mode image 286 is displayed, CPU 31 determines
that the determination result indicates No. In this case, the
edition mode is not changed. When the result of determination in
step SB56 indicates Yes, the processing in step SB51 is performed
again. On the other hand, when the result of determination in step
SB56 indicates No, processing in step SB57 is performed.
[0615] In step SB57, CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the
edition processing. Determination is made based on whether an
instruction to end the edition processing has been given by the
user or not. Specifically, determination in step SB57 is made based
on whether a touch input to any of areas of a stop instruction
image 287 and a completion instruction image 288 displayed on lower
LCD 12 has been provided or not. Stop instruction image 287 is an
image for giving an instruction to stop the edition processing.
Completion instruction image 288 is an image for giving an
instruction to complete the edition processing. In step SB57, when
the position indicated by the touch position data obtained in step
SB52 is within the area where any of stop instruction image 287 and
completion instruction image 288 is displayed, CPU 31 determines
that a determination result indicates Yes. On the other hand, when
the position indicated by the touch position data obtained in step
SB52 is not within the area where any of stop instruction image 287
and completion instruction image 288 is displayed, CPU 31
determines that the determination result indicates No. When the
result of determination in step SB57 indicates Yes, processing in
step SB72 which will be described later is performed. On the other
hand, when the result of determination in step SB57 indicates No,
the processing in step SB52 is performed again.
[0616] As described above, the processing in the pen mode (steps
SB52 and SB57) is repeated until the result of determination in
step SB56 indicates Yes or until the result of determination in
step SB57 indicates No. Further, when the user inputs a trail to
touch panel 13 in the pen mode, the image of input trail 283 is
added to the edited image (see FIG. 44).
[0617] On the other hand, in step SB58, CPU 31 determines whether
the current edition mode is set to the seal mode or not. When a
result of determination in step SB58 indicates Yes (that is, when
the current edition mode is set to the seal mode), processing in
step SB59 is performed. On the other hand, when the result of
determination in step SB58 indicates No (that is, when the current
edition mode is set to the eraser mode), processing in step SB66
which will be described later is performed.
[0618] In steps SB59 to SB65, processing in the seal mode is
performed. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of an image
displayed on LCDs 12 and 22 in the seal mode of the edition
processing. As shown in FIG. 45, in the seal mode as well, as in
the pen mode, edited image 281 is displayed on LCDs 12 and 22, and
images 264 to 270 for performing various operations are displayed
on lower LCD 12. The processing in the seal mode (steps SB59 to
SB65) will be described hereinafter in detail with reference to
FIG. 45.
[0619] In step SB59, CPU 31 selects a seal image to be added to
edited image 281. Selection of the seal image is made by user's
designation of a desired seal image from among seal images stored
in advance in main memory 32, data memory 34 for storage, or memory
card 28. When a seal image is selected in step SB59, the selected
seal image is added at a prescribed position (for example, at a
center position) in edited image 281. Thus, a seal image 291 is
added to edited image 281 and displayed on LCDs 12 and 22 (FIG.
45). Subsequent to step SB59 above, processing in step SB60 is
performed.
[0620] In step SB60, CPU 31 accepts an input to touch panel 13. The
processing in step SB60 is the same as in step SB52 above. In the
following step SB61, CPU 31 moves seal image 291 on edited image
281 in accordance with the input to touch panel 13. An operation
for moving seal image 291 is performed by performing the same
operation as that for the aforementioned zoom change instruction
(step SB38). In other words, the user can move seal image 291 by
initially touching an area where seal image 291 is displayed and
performing an operation to slide a touch position on touch panel 13
while touching the area. CPU 31 can detect the operation for moving
seal image 291 by referring to touch position data stored in main
memory 32 in step SB60. It is noted that the processing for moving
seal image 291 in step SB61 is performed only when the operation
for moving seal image 291 above is performed, and it is not
performed when an input to touch panel 13 is not provided or when
an operation other than such an operation is performed. Subsequent
to step SB61, processing in step SB62 is performed.
[0621] In step SB62, CPU 31 performs processing for zoom-in/out of
edited image 281 displayed on lower LCD 12. The processing in step
SB62 is the same as in step SB54 above. In the seal mode, when the
magnification for edited image 281 displayed on lower LCD 12 is
changed, seal image 291 is also zoomed in or out in accordance with
zoom in or out of edited image 281, and a ratio between a size of
edited image 281 and a size of seal image 291 is not changed. In
the following step SB63, CPU 31 performs processing for moving
edited image 281 displayed on lower LCD 12. The processing in step
SB63 is the same as in step SB55 above. Subsequent to step SB63,
processing in step SB64 is performed.
[0622] In step SB64, CPU 31 determines whether or not to change the
edition mode. The processing in step SB64 is the same as in step
SB56 above. When a result of determination in step SB64 indicates
Yes, the processing in step SB51 is performed again. On the other
hand, when the result in step SB64 indicates No, processing in step
SB65 is performed.
[0623] In step SB65, CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the
edition processing. The processing in step SB65 is the same as in
step SB57 above. When a result of determination in step SB65
indicates Yes, processing in step SB72 which will be described
later is performed. On the other hand, when the result of
determination in step SB65 indicates No, the processing in step
SB60 is performed again.
[0624] As described above, the processing in the seal mode (steps
SB60 to SB65) is repeated until the result of determination in step
SB64 indicates Yes or until the result of determination in step
SB65 indicates No. Seal image 291 is added to edited image 281 in
the seal mode, and the user can arrange a seal image at a desired
position by providing an input to touch panel 13.
[0625] On the other hand, when the result of determination in step
SB58 indicates No, that is, when the current edition mode is set to
the eraser mode, processing in steps SB66 to SB71 is performed. In
the eraser mode as well, as in the pen mode and the seal mode,
edited image 281 is displayed on LCDs 12 and 22, and images 264 to
270 for performing various operations are displayed on lower LCD
12. Further, in the eraser mode, input trail 283 and seal image 291
added during a period from the time of start of the edition
processing to the time of transition to the eraser mode are
displayed together with edited image 281 on LCDs 12 and 22.
[0626] In step SB66, CPU 31 accepts an input to touch panel 13. The
processing in step SB66 is the same as in step SB52 above. In the
following step SB67, CPU 31 erases the image of input trail 283 or
seal image 291 on edited image 281 in accordance with the input to
touch panel 13. Specifically, when touch position data obtained in
step SB66 indicates a position in an area where input trail 283 or
seal image 291 added to edited image 281 is displayed, CPU 31
erases the image added at the position in edited image 281. Then,
CPU 31 causes LCDs 12 and 22 to display edited image 281 from which
the image has been erased. It is noted that the processing for
erasing an image in step SB67 is performed only when a touch input
to the area of input trail 283 or the area of seal image 291 is
provided, and it is not performed when an input to touch panel 13
is not performed or when a touch input to an area other than the
area of input trail 283 and seal image 291 is provided. Subsequent
to step SB67, processing in step SB68 is performed.
[0627] In step SB68, CPU 31 performs processing for zooming in/out
edited image 281 displayed on lower LCD 12. In step SB69, CPU 31
performs processing for moving edited image 281. The processing in
steps SB68 and SB69 is the same as in steps SB54 and SB55 above,
respectively.
[0628] In the following step SB70, CPU 31 determines whether or not
to change the edition mode. The processing in step SB70 is the same
as in step SB56 above. When a result of determination in step SB70
indicates Yes, the processing in step SB51 is performed again. On
the other hand, when the result of determination in step SB70
indicates No, processing in step SB71 is performed.
[0629] In step SB71, CPU 31 determines whether or not to end the
edition processing. The processing in step SB71 is the same as in
step SB57 above. When a result of determination in step SB71
indicates Yes, processing in step SB72 is performed. On the other
hand, when the result of determination in step SB71 indicates No,
the processing in step SB66 is performed again.
[0630] As described above, the processing in the eraser mode (steps
SB66 to SB71) is repeated until the result of determination in step
SB640 indicates Yes or until the result of determination in step
SB71 indicates No. In the eraser mode, the image of input trail 283
and seal image 291 is erased in accordance with an input to touch
panel 13.
[0631] When end of the edition processing is determined in step
SB57, SB65, or SB71 above, the processing in step SB72 is
performed. In step SB72, CPU 31 determines whether or not to store
edited image 281 edited in the edition processing. Determination is
made by determining whether a touch input to any of stop
instruction image 287 and completion instruction image 288 has been
provided or not based on the touch position data obtained in step
SB52, SB60 or SB66. In other words, when a touch input to the area
of stop instruction image 287 has been provided, CPU 31 stops the
edition processing, that is, determines not to store the edited
image. On the other hand, when a touch input to the area of
completion instruction image 288 has been provided, CPU 31
completes the edition processing, that is, determines to store the
edited image. When a result of determination in step SB72 indicates
Yes, processing in step SB73 is performed. On the other hand, when
the result of determination in step SB72 indicates No, CPU 31 skips
the processing in step SB73 and ends the edition processing shown
in FIG. 43.
[0632] In step SB73, CPU 31 stores (saves) edited image 281 in data
memory 34 for storage. It is noted that edited image 281 may be
written over the stored image before the edition processing or
stored separately from the stored image before the edition
processing, or the user may be caused to select between writing of
edited image 281 over the stored image before the edition
processing or storage of edited image 281 separately therefrom.
Further, edited image 281 may be stored in memory card 28 instead
of in data memory 34 for storage. Subsequent to step SB73, CPU 31
ends the edition processing shown in FIG. 43.
[0633] According to the edition processing described above, the
user can add a character and a drawing to an edited image by
providing an input to draw a trail on touch panel 13. Further, the
user can add a seal image at a desired position on the edited
image.
[0634] Referring back to the description in connection with FIG.
41, subsequent to the edition processing (step SB43) above,
processing in step SB44 is performed. In step SB44, CPU 31
determines whether or not to end the photographing processing.
Specifically, CPU 31 determines whether power button 14F has been
pressed or not.
[0635] When a result of determination in step SB44 indicates No,
CPU 31 performs the processing in step SB31 again. Thereafter, the
processing loop of steps SB31 to SB44 is repeatedly performed until
end of the photographing processing is determined in step SB44. On
the other hand, when the result of determination in step SB44 is
affirmative, CPU 31 ends the photographing processing shown in FIG.
41.
[0636] Through the photographing processing described above, the
user can store the image picked-up by the camera in accordance with
the photographing instruction. In the present variation, two
display devices are included, a currently picked-up image is
displayed on one of the display devices, and an operation screen
and a previously taken image are displayed on the other display
device. Thus, as the user can perform a photographing operation
while looking at the currently taken image displayed on upper LCD
22 as well as the operation screen and the previously taken image,
user-friendly game device 10 can be provided. Further, in the
present variation, by providing touch panel 13 on lower LCD 12, an
operation is more easily performed.
[0637] <Calendar Function>
[0638] A calendar function launched when a touch input of calendar
button 106 is made in the image displayed in the multifunctional
photographing processing shown in FIG. 31 will now be described
with reference to FIG. 46.
[0639] FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an image displayed in calendar
processing according to the present embodiment. It is noted that
the image shown in FIG. 46 is displayed on upper LCD 22 while the
image displayed in the multifunctional photographing processing
shown in FIG. 31 is displayed on lower LCD 12. When a touch input
of calendar button 106 is then made, the image shown in FIG. 46 is
now displayed on lower LCD 12 with a display effect as if the image
moved from upper LCD 22 to lower LCD 12.
[0640] As shown in FIG. 46, various buttons 302, 303, 304, and 305
in addition to a calendar image 306 of one month are displayed on
lower LCD 12. When a touch input of any date included in calendar
image 306 is made and if a picked-up image taken on the date
indicated with the touch input, a memo input on that date or the
like has been stored in any of main memory 32, data memory 34 for
storage, and memory card 28, a corresponding picked-up image and/or
memo is read and the content thereof is displayed on upper LCD
22.
[0641] Scroll buttons 304 and 305 are button images for selecting
displayed calendar image 306. Namely, when a touch input of scroll
button 304 or 305 is made, month and year displayed as calendar
image 306 is successively changed.
[0642] A memo button 303 is a button image for performing an
operation to store a memo input by the user in data memory 34 for
storage or the like in correspondence with the designated date.
Namely, when a touch input of memo button 303 is made, switching to
a not-shown memo content accepting screen is made so that the user
can input any character or graphic by using touch pen 27 etc. on
the memo content accepting screen.
[0643] An end button 302 is a button image for performing an
operation to end the calendar processing. Namely, when a touch
input of end button 302 is made, the calendar processing ends and
the image shown in FIG. 46 is displayed on upper LCD 22 with a
display effect as if the image moved from lower LCD 12 to upper LCD
22, and substantially at the same time, the image shown in FIG. 46
is again displayed on lower LCD 12.
8. Image Communication Function
[0644] <Overview>
[0645] Processing provided by an image communication program
executed as a result of launch of communication application program
55 will now be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 55. Prior to
description of a specific processing operation, an exemplary
display manner on lower LCD 12 and/or upper LCD 22 through
execution of the image communication processing, exemplary
connection to another device, and the like will initially be
described.
[0646] FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating an exemplary image
communication system in which a plurality of game devices 10 are
connected to each other. FIGS. 48 and 49 are diagrams showing
exemplary screen display provided on lower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22
of game device 10 before determination as to whether game device 10
should serve as a transmission-end device or a reception-end
device. FIGS. 50 to 54 are diagrams showing exemplary screen
display provided in the first stage to the fifth stage of a
communication application program respectively, on lower LCD 12 and
upper LCD 22 of each of transmission-end game device 10t1 and
reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3. FIG. 55 is a diagram
showing exemplary screen display provided on lower LCD 12 and upper
LCD 22 of each of transmission-end game device 10t1 and
reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3 when communication is
disconnected.
[0647] In FIG. 47, a plurality of game devices 10 transmit and
receive image data such as a photograph (picked-up image) and the
like through wireless communication. As described above, game
device 10 can establish wireless communication with another game
device 10 through wireless communication module 38 or local
communication module 39, however, an example in which game device
10 establishes wireless communication to game devices of the same
type through local communication module 39 based on a prescribed
communication scheme will be described here. In order to make the
description specific, it is assumed that each of game devices 10t1
to 10t3 shown in FIG. 47 is a transmission-end game device 10t
serving to transmit image data and each of game devices 10r1 to
10r3 is a reception-end game device 10r serving to receive image
data.
[0648] In the present embodiment, a user is allowed to select
whether his/her game device is to serve to transmit image data or
to serve to receive image data when the image communication program
is executed. Namely, whether game device 10 serves as a
transmission-end game device or a reception-end game device is
determined based on user's selection. It is noted, however, that a
transmission-end device for executing only a transmission-end
program may be different from a reception-end device for executing
only a reception-end program.
[0649] Transmission-end game device 10t includes game device 10t1
used by a user "Ichiro", game device 10t2 used by a user "Taro",
and game device 10t3 used by a user "Hanako". On the other hand,
reception-end game device 10r includes game device 10r1 used by a
user "Jiro", game device 10r2 used by a user "Saburo", and game
device 10r3 used by a user "Shiro". Here, transmission-end game
devices 10t1 to 10t3 perform broadcast transmission of signals
(transmitter data) indicating that transmission-end game devices
10t1 to 10t3 are transmitters of image data. An example in which
the users "Jiro", "Saburo" and "Shiro" receive image data from game
device 10t1 serving as a transmitter used by the user "Ichiro"
among transmission-end game devices 10t will be described.
"Ichiro", "Taro" and the like represent a user name stored in a
main body of game device 10, and a user may set any user name. The
user name is stored in preset data memory 35, data memory 34 for
storage or the like in the main body of game device 10.
[0650] Initially, for example on lower LCD 12 of each game device
10, information for inquiring of a user whether a storage memory in
the main body (for example, data memory 34 for storage) or a memory
card (for example, memory card 28) is to be used is displayed (FIG.
48). The user of game device 10 can select a storage medium to be
used by performing a touch operation for selection from among
options displayed on lower LCD 12 through touch panel 13.
[0651] Next, for example on lower LCD 12 of each game device 10,
information for inquiring of a user whether a photograph is to be
transmitted to another game device or to be received from another
game device is displayed (FIG. 49). When the user of game device 10
performs a touch operation for selection from among options
displayed on lower LCD 12 through touch panel 13, the user can
determine whether his/her game device is to serve as a transmitter
(for example, transmission-end game device 10t1, 10t2 or 10t3) or
as a receiver (for example, reception-end game device 10r1, 10r2 or
10r3).
[0652] For example on lower LCD 12 of reception-end game devices
10r1 to 10r3, a message that it is searching for game device 10t to
serve as a transmitter (for example, character information
indicating that "searching for transmitter from which you receive
photograph") is displayed until the transmitter data is received
from transmission-end game device 10t (the right drawing in FIG.
50). On the other hand, for example on lower LCD 12 of
transmission-end game device 10t1, a message that it is searching
for game device 10r to serve as a receiver (for example, character
information indicating that "searching for receiver to which you
transmit photograph") is displayed while it invites a request for
image data reception from reception-end game device 10 by
transmitting the transmitter data above (the left drawing in FIG.
50).
[0653] Next, when reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3 receive
the transmitter data from transmission-end game devices 10t1 to
10t3, for example on lower LCD 12 of reception-end game devices
10r1 to 10r3, information indicating a user name of transmitter
game device 10t from which the transmitter data has been received
is displayed. For example, user names Nt1 to Nt3 of respective
transmission-end game devices 10t1 to 10t3 are displayed on lower
LCD 12 of reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3 in an example in
the right drawing in FIG. 51. A user of each of reception-end game
devices 10r1 to 10r3 performs through touch panel 13, a touch
operation to touch one of user names Nt1 to Nt3 displayed on lower
LCD 12, so that the user can select one of transmission-end game
devices 10t1 to 10t3 as a transmitter. When the user of each of
reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3 performs the operation to
select a transmitter, reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3
transmit receiver data representing a reception request to any
selected transmission-end game devices 10t1 to 10t3.
[0654] On the other hand, when transmission-end game device 10t1
receives the receiver data from reception-end game devices 10r1 to
10r3, information indicating a user name of game device 10r serving
as a receiver from which the receiver data has been received is
displayed, for example on lower LCD 12. In the example shown in the
left drawing in FIG. 51, on lower LCD 12 of transmission-end game
device 10t1, user names Nr1 to Nr3 of respective reception-end game
devices 10r1 to 10r3 that have issued a reception request are
displayed. In the present embodiment, transmission-end game device
10t1 has no right to select a reception-end device from among a
plurality of displayed reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3 and
it is only allowed to determine whether to transmit image data to
all displayed reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3 or to stop
transmission. For example, when a user of transmission-end game
device 10t1 performs through touch panel 13, a touch operation to
touch an operation button icon Bs representing "start" displayed on
lower LCD 12, transition to image transmission processing can be
made.
[0655] Next, transmission-end game device 10t1 performs processing
for selecting an image to be transmitted, from among images stored
in a memory (for example, data memory 34 for storage) in the main
body of game device 10t1 or in a memory card (for example, memory
card 28). Though an image taken by game device 10t1 is typically
transmitted, another image (for example, an image received from
another device or a stored image other than a taken image) may be
transmitted. For example, in an example shown in the left drawing
in FIG. 52, thumbnail images of images stored in data memory 34 for
storage of game device 10t1 or memory card 28 are displayed in a
thumbnail display area At on lower LCD 12. Further, the thumbnail
images displayed in thumbnail display area At are scrolled to the
right or left by performing a touch operation to touch a scroll
button icon B1 or Br through touch panel 13 for display. A user of
transmission-end game device 10t1 can select a thumbnail image
surrounded by a cursor C displayed on lower LCD 12 as an image to
be transmitted. Here, a thumbnail image IM (that is, an image to be
transmitted) surrounded by cursor C is displayed on upper LCD 22.
When the user of transmission-end game device 10t1 performs through
touch panel 13, a touch operation to touch an operation button icon
Bt representing "transmit" displayed on lower LCD 12, image data of
image IM currently selected as an image to be transmitted can be
transmitted. When the user of transmission-end game device 10t1
performs a touch operation through touch panel 13 to touch an
operation button icon Bf representing "end" displayed on lower LCD
12, the image transmission processing itself can end.
[0656] On the other hand, for example on lower LCD 12 of
reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3, a message that a user of
transmission-end game device 10t1 is selecting an image (for
example, character information indicating that "waiting for
selection of photograph by transmitter") is displayed while the
user of transmission-end game device 10t1 is selecting an image to
be transmitted (the right drawing in FIG. 52).
[0657] Next, transmission-end game device 10t1 outputs to each of
reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3, image data of image IM
selected as an image to be transmitted from among images stored in
the memory in the main body of game device 10t1 or in the memory
card. Here, on lower LCD 12 and/or upper LCD 22 of transmission-end
game device 10t1, a message that selected image IM is being
transmitted from game device 10t1 to reception-end game devices
10r1 to 10r3 is displayed. For example, as shown in the left
drawing in FIG. 53, image IM being transmitted is displayed on
upper LCD 22 and character information indicating that
"transmitting photograph" is displayed on lower LCD 12.
[0658] On the other hand, for example on lower LCD 12 of
reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3, a message indicating that
the image data is being received from transmission-end game device
10t1 (for example, character information indicating that "receiving
photograph") is displayed while the image data is being transmitted
from transmission-end game device 10t1 (the right drawing in FIG.
53).
[0659] Next, when reception of the image data transmitted from
transmission-end game device 10t1 ends, for example on upper LCD 22
of reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3, image IM represented by
the image data received from transmitter game device 10t1 is
displayed, and a user is urged to determine whether or not to
further receive image data from game device 10t1. For example, as
shown in the right drawing in FIG. 54, received image IM is
displayed on upper LCD 22 and character information indicating that
"photograph has been received. Do you want more?" is displayed on
lower LCD 12. When a user of each of reception-end game devices
10r1 to 10r3 performs through touch panel 13, a touch operation to
touch an operation button icon By of "YES" displayed on lower LCD
12, the user can request further reception of image data from
transmitter game device 10t1. Here, the screen described in
connection with the right drawing in FIG. 52 is displayed on
reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3, and reception-end game
devices 10r1 to 10r3 wait until a user of transmission-end game
device 10t1 selects again an image to be transmitted. Further, when
the user of each of reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3
performs through touch panel 13, a touch operation to touch an
operation button icon Bn of "NO" displayed on lower LCD 12,
subsequent reception of image data can be stopped to disconnect
communication with transmission-end game device 10t1.
[0660] On the other hand, when transmission of the image data to
reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3 ends, transmitted image IM
is displayed, for example, on upper LCD 22 of transmission-end game
device 10t1 and a message that reception-end game devices 10r1 to
10r3 are determining whether or not to further receive image data
is displayed. For example, as shown in the left drawing in FIG. 54,
transmitted image IM is displayed on upper LCD 22 and character
information indicating that "receiver is still thinking whether or
not to receive more" is displayed on lower LCD 12. When information
indicating whether or not to further receive image data is obtained
from all reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3 and a reception
request for requesting further reception of image data is received
from at least one of reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3, the
screen described in connection with the left drawing in FIG. 52 is
displayed and the user of transmission-end game device 10t1 selects
again an image to be transmitted.
[0661] When users of transmission-end game device 10t1 and/or
reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3 perform an operation for
ending the image transmission processing, information inquiring of
a user whether or not a photograph is to be transmitted to another
game device or to be received from another game device as shown in
FIG. 49 is displayed, for example on lower LCD 12 of each game
device 10, and the process described above is repeated. When all
reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3 end reception from
transmission-end game device 10t1 or when transmission-end game
device 10t1 ends transmission to reception-end game devices 10r1 to
10r3, a message that communication was disconnected is displayed.
For example, as shown in the left drawing and the right drawing in
FIG. 55, when communication is disconnected, character information
indicating that "communication was disconnected" is displayed, for
example, on lower LCD 12 of each of transmission-end game device
10t1 and reception-end game devices 10r1 to 10r3. When the user of
each of transmission-end game device 10t1 and reception-end game
devices 10r1 to 10r3 performs through touch panel 13, a touch
operation to touch operation button icon By of "YES" displayed on
lower LCD 12, the process returns to an initial stage of the image
transmission processing and new image transmission processing is
started.
[0662] <Data Structure>
[0663] Next, various data to be used for executing the image
communication application program will now be described with
reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram illustrating an example
of various data stored in main memory 32 in accordance with
execution of the image communication application program.
[0664] In FIG. 56, main memory 32 stores programs read from memory
cards 28 and 29 and data memory 34 for storage and temporary data
generated in processing. In FIG. 56, operation data Da,
identification data Db, user data Dc, transmitter data Dd, receiver
data De, image data Df, and the like are stored in a data storage
area of main memory 32. Further, various programs Pa including the
image communication application program and the like are stored in
a program storage area of main memory 32.
[0665] Operation data Da includes data of a touch coordinate
representing a touch position TP in a screen coordinate system of
touch panel 13 touched by a player (touch coordinate point data)
and data representing a state of operation of operation button
group 14 by a player (operation button data). For example, the
touch coordinate data and the operation button data are acquired
every unit time (for example, 1/60 sec.) in which game device 10
performs game processing, and they are updated and stored as
operation data Da when acquired.
[0666] Identification data Db includes data representing a unique
identification number for identifying game device 10. For example,
data representing an own device ID set in advance in preset data
memory 35 or the like of game device 10 is stored as identification
data Db. The own device ID may be stored as a unique serial number
assigned in a manufacturing plant or as identification information
generated at random in game device 10.
[0667] User data Dc includes data representing a user name set in
advance by a user of game device 10. For example, in preset data
memory 35 or the like of game device 10, a user name input by a
user is described and data representing the user name is stored
therein as user data Dc.
[0668] Transmitter data Dd includes data representing the
identification number and the user name of game device 10 serving
as a transmitter when image data is transmitted and received.
Receiver data De includes data representing the identification
number and the user name of game device 10 serving as a receiver
when image data is transmitted and received.
[0669] Image data Df includes transmitted image data Df1, received
image data Df2, operation image data Df3, and the like. As
transmitted image data Df1, image data of an image to be
transmitted to another game device 10 is temporarily stored. As
received image data Df2, image data of an image received from
another game device 10 is temporarily stored. Operation image data
Df3 is image data representing operation buttons for operating game
device 10 and information of which the user is to be informed.
[0670] <Processing Procedure>
[0671] A specific processing operation based on the image
communication application program executed by game device 10 will
now be descried with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. 57 is a
flowchart showing an example in which game device 10 performs image
communication processing by executing the image communication
application program. FIG. 58 illustrates sub routine showing in
detail an operation in image transmission processing performed in
step SC52 in FIG. 57. FIG. 59 illustrates sub routine showing in
detail an operation in image reception processing performed in step
SC53 in FIG. 57. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing exemplary signals
transmitted and received between game device 10t serving as a
transmitter and game device 10r serving as a receiver. A program
for performing the processing is included in a program stored in
data memory 34 for storage, and when power of game device 10 is
turned on, the program is read from data memory 34 for storage into
main memory 32 through memory control circuit 33 and executed by
CPU 31. Though the image communication application program is
stored in advance in data memory 34 for storage in the present
embodiment, the program may be downloaded to game device 10 through
the Internet or the like. Further, the program stored in memory
card 28 or memory card 29 may be read and executed.
[0672] Initially, when power of game device 10 (power button 14F)
is turned on, CPU 31 executes a boot program (not shown) so that a
launcher program stored in data memory 34 for storage for
selectively executing a plurality of application programs is loaded
to main memory 32 and executed by CPU 31. Thereafter, an image
communication application is selected and executed on the launcher
program, so that the image communication application program is
loaded to main memory 32. The loaded image communication
application program is executed by CPU 31.
[0673] The image communication application program in the present
embodiment includes not only an image communication function but
also a photographing function and a taken image display function to
display a taken image. A user can selectively perform a function
through an operation of the touch panel and the buttons. When the
photographing function is selected here, a video image picked-up by
the camera currently selected from inner camera 23 and outer camera
25 is displayed on lower LCD 12 in real time. When L button 14I or
R button 14J is operated in this state, the photographing
processing is performed to store the taken image in a storage
medium selected from the storage memory in the main body (for
example, data memory 34 for storage) and a memory card (for
example, memory card 28). The taken image may be displayed on lower
LCD 12 immediately after photographing. Further, when the taken
image display function is selected, images desired by a user from
among the taken images stored in the storage medium selected from
the storage memory in the main body and the memory card may be
displayed one by one or in a list. Further, before selection of
each function, a user selects whether the storage memory in the
main body or the memory card is to be used, so that storage means
selected here serves to store the taken image in the photographing
function and serves as a source of reading of an image to be
displayed in the taken image display function. An image to be
transmitted from the transmission-end device in the image
communication function is read from this selected storage means,
and an image received by the reception-end device is also stored in
this selected storage means. When a user selects and performs the
image communication function, processing in step SC51 and
subsequent steps shown in FIG. 57 is performed.
[0674] In FIG. 57, CPU 31 determines whether a memory in the main
body (for example, data memory 34 for storage) or a memory card
(for example, memory card 28) is to be used in subsequent
processing based on operation data Da (step SC50). For example, an
indication urging a user to select whether to use the storage
memory in the main body or the memory card is provided on lower LCD
12 and/or upper LCD 22 of game device 10 (see FIG. 48). CPU 31 then
determines which storage medium is to be used in accordance with
the user's operation for selection from among the options. When the
memory card is to be used, the process proceeds to next step SC57.
On the other hand, when the storage memory in the main body is to
be used, the process proceeds to next step SC51.
[0675] In step SC57, CPU 31 determines whether the memory card (for
example, memory card 28) for storing an image in game device 10 is
attached to a connector of game device 10 or not. When the memory
card above is attached to the connector of game device 10, the
process proceeds to step SC51. On the other hand, when the memory
card above is not attached to the connector of game device 10, CPU
31 causes lower LCD 12 and/or upper LCD 22 to display notification
for urging a user to attach the memory card (step SC58), and the
process returns to step SC50 and the processing is repeated.
[0676] In step SC51, CPU 31 determines whether an image is to be
transmitted to another game device 10r or received from another
game device 10t in subsequent processing based on operation data
Da. For example, an indication urging a user to select whether or
not a photograph is to be transmitted to another game device 10r or
to be received from another game device 10t is provided on lower
LCD 12 and/or upper LCD 22 of game device 10 (see FIG. 49). CPU 31
then determines whether an image is to be transmitted to another
game device 10r or to be received from another game device 10t in
accordance with the user's operation for selection from among the
options. When an image is to be transmitted to another game device
10r, the process proceeds to next step SC52. On the other hand,
when an image is to be received from another game device 10t, the
process proceeds to next step SC53.
[0677] In step SC52, CPU 31 performs image transmission processing
and the process proceeds to next step SC54. Detailed operation in
the image transmission processing performed in step SC52 above will
be described hereinafter with reference to FIG. 58.
[0678] In FIG. 58, CPU 31 performs broadcast transmission of
transmitter data indicating that the own device is a transmitter of
image data, for example through local communication module 39 (step
SC63), and the process proceeds to next step SC. For example, CPU
31 generates the transmitter data by using data representing the
identification number and the user name stored as identification
data Db and user data Dc respectively, and has the generated data
stored as transmitter data Dd. Then, broadcast transmission of the
transmitter data stored as transmitter data Dd is performed, so
that another game device 10r that can receive the transmitter data
is informed of presence of game device 10 to serve as a transmitter
(see FIG. 60).
[0679] Next, CPU 31 searches for another game device 10r to serve
as a receiver (step SC64) and the process to a next step. As will
be clarified in the description below, another game device 10r to
serve as the receiver selects game device 10t to serve as a
transmitter from which reception is desired, based on the received
transmitter data. The receiver data indicating that another game
device 10r serves as the receiver of image data is transmitted to
selected game device 10t serving as the transmitter (see FIG. 60).
In step SC64 above, CPU 31 waits until the receiver data is
received, for example through local communication module 39. When
the receiver data is received, CPU 31 then describes the
identification number and the user name of another game device 10r
to serve as the receiver, that are represented by the receiver
data, as receiver data De. While another game device 10r to serve
as the receiver is being searched for, CPU 31 causes, for example,
lower LCD 12 to display notification that game device 10r to serve
as the receiver is currently being searched for (see the left
drawing in FIG. 50). Further, when the receiver data is received
from another game device 10r serving as the receiver, CPU 31
causes, for example, lower LCD 12 to display information indicating
the user name of another game device 10r serving as the receiver
that is represented by the receiver data (see user names Nr1 to Nr3
in the left drawing in FIG. 51).
[0680] Next, CPU 31 determines whether or not to start processing
for transmitting an image to another game device 10r serving as the
receiver as a result of search based on operation data Da (step
SC65). For example, CPU 31 provides an indication (operation button
icon Bs) on lower LCD 12 and/or upper LCD 22 urging a user to
perform an operation for starting the image transmission
processing. In response to the user's operation for starting the
image transmission processing, it is determined that the processing
is to be started, and the process proceeds to next step SC66. On
the other hand, when the processing for transmitting an image is
not to be started, the process returns to step SC64 above, and
search for another game device 10r to serve as the receiver is
continued.
[0681] In a period from determination of start of the image
transmission processing to determination of an image to be
transmitted, game device 10t serving as the transmitter transmits
transmission ready data indicating that transmission to game device
10r serving as the receiver is ready. On the other hand, when game
device 10r serving as the receiver is ready to receive image data,
game device 10r serving as the receiver transmits reception ready
data indicating that reception of image data is ready to game
device 10t serving as the transmitter, in response to reception of
the transmission ready data (see FIG. 60).
[0682] In step SC66, CPU 31 determines, based on operation data Da,
whether an image to be transmitted to another game device 10r has
been selected or not. For example, CPU 31 causes lower LCD 12
and/or upper LCD 22 to display a screen for allowing a user to
select an image to be transmitted to another game device 10r (see
the left drawing in FIG. 52), so as to urge the user to select an
image to be transmitted. Then, the process proceeds to next step
SC69 in response to the user's operation to determine an image to
be transmitted (for example, an operation to touch operation button
icon Bt). On the other hand, when the user does not perform the
operation to determine an image to be transmitted (No in step
SC66), the process proceeds to next step SC67.
[0683] In step SC69, CPU 31 transmits image data representing a
transmitted image selected in step SC66 above to another game
device 10r serving as the receiver, and the process proceeds to a
next step. For example, CPU 31 extracts the image data
corresponding to the transmitted image selected in step SC66 from
the storage medium selected in step SC50 above, and has the
extracted image data stored as transmitted image data Df1. CPU 31
then identifies another game device 10r currently serving as the
receiver by referring to receiver data De, and transmits the image
data stored as transmitted image data Df1 to identified another
game device 10r, for example, through local communication module 39
(see FIG. 60). While the image data is transmitted to another game
device 10r serving as the receiver, CPU 31 provides an indication,
for example on lower LCD 12, that the image data is being
transmitted to game device 10r currently serving as the receiver
(see the left drawing in FIG. 53).
[0684] Next, CPU 31 waits for a receiver response transmitted from
each game device 10r serving as the receiver (step SC70). The
receiver response includes a response indicating further reception
of image data (reception request) or a response indicating end of
reception (end of reception). After receiving the image data, each
game device 10r serving as the receiver transmits any response to
game device 10t serving as the transmitter (see FIG. 60). CPU 31
waits for a response from all game devices 10r currently serving as
the receiver. When the reception request is received from at least
one game device 10r serving as the receiver (Yes in step SC71), the
process returns to step SC66 above and the processing is repeated.
On the other hand, when CPU 31 waits for a response from all game
devices 10r currently serving as the receiver and the end of
reception is received from all game devices 10r serving as the
receiver (No in step SC71), CPU 31 ends the processing in the sub
routine. When CPU 31 receives the end of reception from game device
10r serving as the receiver, CPU 31 erases data of game device 10r
serving as the receiver from receiver data De. Further, while CPU
31 waits for the response from another game device 10r serving as
the receiver, CPU 31 provides an indication, for example on lower
LCD 12, that the response from game device 10r currently serving as
the receiver is awaited (see the left drawing in FIG. 54).
[0685] On the other hand, when the user has not yet performed the
operation to determine a transmitted image in step SC66 above, CPU
31 determines whether or not to end the processing for transmitting
an image based on operation data Da (step SC67). For example, CPU
31 determines whether or not to end the processing for transmitting
an image in accordance with a user's operation (for example, an
operation to touch operation button icon Bf). When the processing
for transmitting an image should end, CPU 31 transmits data
indicating that transmission should end (end of transmission; see
FIG. 60) to each game device 10r currently serving as the receiver
(step SC68), and the processing in the sub routine ends. On the
other hand, when the processing for transmitting an image should
not end, the process returns to step SC66 above and the processing
is repeated.
[0686] Referring back to FIG. 57, following the image transmission
processing in step SC52 above, CPU 31 determines whether or not a
receiver is absent (step SC54). For example, when determination in
step SC71 above indicates No (that is, end of reception is received
from all game devices 10r serving as the receiver), CPU 31
determines that no receiver exists. When no receiver exists, the
process proceeds to next step SC56. On the other hand, when
determination in step SC67 above indicates Yes (that is, when the
user selects end of transmission), CPU 31 disconnects communication
with game device 10r serving as the receiver. The process returns
to step SC51 above and the processing is repeated.
[0687] CPU 31 performs the image reception processing in step SC53
and the process proceeds to next step SC55. Detailed operation in
the image reception processing performed in step SC53 above will be
described hereinafter with reference to FIG. 59.
[0688] In FIG. 59, CPU 31 receives the transmitter data indicating
a transmitter of image data (step SC84) and the process proceeds to
a next step. Here, as described above, game device 10t serving as a
transmitter performs broadcast transmission of the transmitter data
indicating that game device 10t is a transmitter of image data, for
example, through local communication module 39 (see FIG. 60). In
step SC84 above, when CPU 31 receives the transmitter data
transmitted through broadcast transmission, CPU 31 can know
presence of another game device 10t serving as a transmitter. When
CPU 31 receives the transmitter data, CPU 31 acquires the
identification number and the user name of game device 10t serving
as the transmitter that are represented by the transmitter data and
describes the identification number and the user name as
transmitter data Dd.
[0689] While another game device 10t serving as a transmitter is
being searched for, CPU 31 provides an indication, for example on
lower LCD 12, that game device 10t serving as a transmitter is
currently being searched for (see the right drawing in FIG. 50).
Further, when the transmitter data is received from another game
device 10t serving as the transmitter, CPU 31 causes, for example,
lower LCD 12 to display information indicating the user name of
another game device 10t serving as the transmitter, that is
represented by the transmitter data (see the right drawing in FIG.
51).
[0690] Next, CPU 31 determines, based on operation data Da, whether
or not a transmitter has been determined from among game devices
10t serving as the transmitter that have been searched for (step
SC85). For example, CPU 31 provides an indication urging selection
from information indicating the user name of another game device
10t serving as the transmitter, on lower LCD 12 and/or upper LCD 22
(see user names Nt1 to Nt3 in the right drawing in FIG. 51). In
accordance with a user's operation to select any of the user names,
the selected user is determined as a transmitter from which an
image is to be received, and the process proceeds to next step
SC86. On the other hand, when a transmitter from which an image is
to be received is not determined, the process returns to step SC84
above, and search for another game device 10t serving as the
transmitter is continued.
[0691] In step SC86, CPU 31 transmits receiver data indicating that
the own device is a receiver of image data to another game device
10t to serve as the transmitter, for example, through local
communication module 39, and the process proceeds to a next step.
For example, CPU 31 generates the receiver data by using the
identification number and the user name stored as identification
data Db and user data Dc respectively, and has the generated data
stored as receiver data De. When the receiver data stored as
receiver data De is transmitted to another game device 10t serving
as the transmitter, another game device 10t serving as the
transmitter that has received the receiver data is informed of
presence and the user name of game device 10 serving as a receiver
(see FIG. 60).
[0692] In a period from determination of start of the image
transmission processing to determination of an image to be
transmitted in another game device 10t serving as the transmitter,
transmission ready data indicating that transmission to game device
10r serving as the receiver is ready is transmitted. Here, when
game device 10r serving as the receiver is ready to receive image
data, game device 10r serving as the receiver transmits reception
ready data indicating that reception of the image data is ready to
another game device 10t serving as the transmitter, in response to
reception of the transmission ready data (see FIG. 60).
[0693] Next, CPU 31 determines whether or not data indicating end
of transmission has been received from another game device 10t
serving as the transmitter (step SC87), determines whether or not
the user has performed an operation to end reception (step SC88)
based on operation data Da, and determines whether or not the image
data has been received from another game device 10t serving as the
transmitter (step SC89). For example, when another game device 10t
serving as the transmitter is selecting an image to be transmitted,
CPU 31 causes lower LCD 12 and/or upper LCD 22 to display a screen
indicating that the receiver is waiting for selection of a
photograph by the transmitter (see the right drawing in FIG. 52)
and informs a user of a current state. In accordance with the
user's operation to stop reception of an image (for example, an
operation to touch operation button icon Bf), CPU 31 determines
that a user has performed an operation to cancel reception (Yes in
step SC88) and the process proceeds to next step SC93. Further,
when end of transmission is received from another game device 10t
serving as the transmitter (see step SC68 in FIG. 58, and FIG. 60)
(Yes in step SC87), CPU 31 ends the processing in the sub routine.
Further, when reception of image data from another game device 10t
serving as the transmitter is started (see step SC69 in FIG. 58,
and FIG. 60) (Yes in step SC89), the process proceeds to next step
SC90. On the other hand, when each determination indicates No (that
is, when determination in each of steps SC87 to SC89 indicates No),
CPU 31 repeats determination in steps SC87 to SC89.
[0694] In step SC90, CPU 31 has the image data received from
another game device 10t (see FIG. 60) stored as received image data
Df2. CPU 31 then causes the storage medium selected in step SC50
above to store the image data stored as received image data Df2,
and the process proceeds to a next step. Here, when reception of
the image data from another game device 10t is started, CPU 31
causes, for example, lower LCD 12 to display a message that the
image data is currently being received from game device 10t serving
as the transmitter while the image data is received (see the right
drawing in FIG. 53).
[0695] Next, CPU 31 determines whether or not to further receive an
image from another game device 10t serving as the transmitter based
on operation data Da. For example, CPU 31 causes lower LCD 12
and/or upper LCD 22 to display a screen for having a user determine
whether or not to further receive an image from another game device
10t serving as the transmitter (see the right drawing in FIG. 54)
and urges the user to make selection. The process proceeds to next
step SC92 in accordance with the user's operation to request
further reception of an image (for example, an operation to touch
operation button icon By). On the other hand, the process proceeds
to next step SC93 in accordance with the user's operation to end
reception of an image (for example, an operation to touch operation
button icon Bn).
[0696] In step SC92, CPU 31 transmits to another game device 10t
serving as the transmitter, data indicating further reception of
image data (reception request; see FIG. 60), and the process
returns to step SC87 and the processing is repeated.
[0697] On the other hand, in step SC93, CPU 31 transmits to another
game device 10t serving as the transmitter, data indicating that
reception should end (end of reception: see FIG. 60), and the
processing in the sub routine ends. In determination in step SC88,
reception may automatically be canceled regardless of a user's
operation. For example, a remaining storage capacity of the storage
medium selected in step SC50 above is monitored, and when the
remaining capacity indicates an amount equal to or lower than a
prescribed amount, a user may be informed that storage capacity for
0 image is available, and the processing in step SC93 may be
performed.
[0698] Referring back to FIG. 57, after the image reception
processing in step SC53, CPU 31 determines whether or not end of
transmission has been received (step SC55). For example, when
determination in step SC87 above indicates Yes (that is, when end
of transmission is received from game device 10t serving as the
transmitter), the process proceeds to next step SC56. On the other
hand, when determination in step SC91 above indicates No (that is,
when the user selects end of reception), communication with game
device 10t serving as the transmitter is disconnected, and the
process returns to step SC51 and the processing is repeated.
[0699] In step SC56, CPU 31 performs communication disconnection
processing, and the processing in the flowchart ends. For example,
CPU 31 ends (disconnects) communication with another game device 10
with which communication is currently established, and causes lower
LCD 12 and/or upper LCD 22 to display a screen indicating that
communication was disconnected (see the left drawing or the right
drawing in FIG. 55), so as to inform a user of a current state.
[0700] Thus, when game device 10 according to the present
embodiment serves as a receiver of image data, game device 10
serving as the receiver can select a transmitter from which the
image data is to be received. Therefore, when images are
transmitted and received among devices, game device 10 can select a
transmission-end device desired by a user to receive an image from
the transmission-end device.
[0701] In the description above, though game device 10r serving as
a receiver that receives image data has the right to select game
device 10t serving as a transmitter that transmits the image data,
game device 10t serving as the transmitter may also have the right
to select game device 10r serving as the receiver that receives
image data. For example, in the processing in step SC65 above for
determining start of transmission, when the user determines start
of transmission after the user selects game device 10r to serve as
a receiver, the transmitter can also select the receiver. For
example, when game device 10r serving as a receiver selects a user
to serve as a transmitter, a check box is provided (for example,
next to each of user names Nr1 to Nr3) for each user name serving
as the receiver displayed on a display screen of game device 10t
serving as the transmitter. When a user of game device 10t serving
as the transmitter checks the user name by performing an operation
to touch the check box provided for the user name of the receiver,
image data is transmitted only to the checked user to serve as the
receiver.
[0702] In the processing operation described above, game device 10r
serving as a receiver can leave a group in which images are
transmitted and received at the time desired by a user. Further,
even when game device 10r serving as the receiver leaves the group,
so long as at least one game device 10r serving as the receiver
remains, game device 10t serving as a transmitter can continue
transmission of image data. Thus, even when game device 10r serving
as the receiver leaves the group due to lack of the remaining
storage capacity, game device 10t serving as the transmitter and
other game devices 10r serving as the receiver are not affected. On
the other hand, transmission of image data may be continued only
when all game devices 10r serving as the receiver request to
continue image communication, and when at least one of game devices
10r serving as the receiver leaves the group, any communication in
the group above may end.
[0703] Further, in the processing operation described above, though
game device 10t to initially serve as a transmitter transmits the
transmitter data through broadcast transmission in which data is
transmitted to an unspecified large number of receivers,
communication may be started in another manner. For example, game
device 10r to initially serve as a receiver may transmit the
receiver data to an unspecified large number of transmitters, and
game device 10t to serve as the transmitter that has received the
receiver data may send back the transmitter data. Here, it is not
necessary to describe as the receiver data to initially be
transmitted, the user name of game device 10r that transmits the
receiver data.
[0704] Further, in the processing procedure described above, game
device 10r to serve as a receiver that communicates with game
device 10t serving as a transmitter is determined first, and
thereafter an image to be transmitted from game device 10t to game
device 10r is selected. Thus, game device 10t serving as the
transmitter can sequentially transmit selected transmitted images
to determined game device 10r serving as the receiver, so that
various images can readily be transmitted. When such an effect is
not expected, however, an image to be transmitted may be determined
in another procedure. For example, game device 10t serving as a
transmitter determines an image to be transmitted to another game
device 10, and thereafter determines game device 10r to serve as a
receiver. In this case, when game device 10t to initially serve as
the transmitter transmits the transmitter data to an unspecified
large number of receivers, and such data is transmitted together
with data representing the image determined as an image to be
transmitted. Thus, a user of game device 10r serving as the
receiver can select a transmitter from which the image data is to
be received after reviewing the user name of the transmitter and an
image to be transmitted, so that information for selection is
increased and the transmitter that better matches expectations can
be selected.
[0705] Further, in the processing procedure described above, when
an operation to touch button Bt is performed, a thumbnail image
surrounded by cursor C is selected as an image to be transmitted,
that is, the image is selected and transmitted one by one. On the
other hand, a plurality of images may be selected and transmitted.
For example, in the left drawing in FIG. 52, in a selection
operation for selecting a thumbnail image displayed in thumbnail
display area At (for example, an operation to directly touch a
thumbnail image), the thumbnail image is highlighted and an image
corresponding to the thumbnail image is selected. Further, the
selection operation is performed multiple times, so that a
plurality of images are in the selected state. The operation to
touch button Bt may be performed in this state, so that the
plurality of images in the selected state are transmitted.
[0706] In the former case, as an image is selected and transmitted
one by one, the number of images transmitted at a time is
accordingly limited to one. On the other hand, in the latter case,
by limiting the number of selectable images, the number of images
transmitted at a time is limited to the number of selectable
images. Specifically, in the latter case, a prescribed number of
images or more may not be selected at a time, or further selection
of images at a time may be prohibited when the total capacity of
selected images is equal to or greater than a prescribed capacity.
Further alternatively, the number of images transmitted at a time
may be limited separately from the number of selectable images. In
this case, the number of selectable images may be greater than the
number of images transmitted at a time. Here, for a single image
selection operation, the image transmission processing for
transmitting the limited number of images is repeated multiple
times for completing the processing for transmitting the selected
images. In any image selection manner/image transmission limitation
manner, a user of reception-end game device 10 can cancel further
reception of an image while an image is being received, and can
determine whether or not to continue reception based on the number
of received images.
[0707] Further, when game device 10t to initially serve as a
transmitter transmits the transmitter data to an unspecified large
number of receivers, the transmitter data may be transmitted
together with additional information to game device 10r to serve as
a receiver. For example, information indicating a title of an image
or the number of images to be transmitted from game device 10t
serving as the transmitter may be included in the transmitter data
above and transmitted. Thus, game device 10r serving as the
receiver can display information representing a title of an image
and the number of images included in the received transmitter data
together with the user name of the transmitter, so that information
for helping a user of the receiver select a transmitter is
increased and selection of a transmitter that better matches
expectations can be made. A user of game device 10t serving as the
transmitter may select a title of an image to be included in the
transmitter data from among predetermined typical titles, or the
user may freely input a title thereof. Further, the number of
images to be transmitted by a user of game device 10t serving as
the transmitter may be input as the number of images to be included
in the transmitter data, or the number of photographs stored in
game device 10t may be included as the number of images to be
included in the transmitter data.
[0708] Further, screen display as described above is only by way of
example, and another screen display may naturally be employed. For
example, though notification that image data is being transmitted
or received is displayed in the exemplary screen display shown in
FIG. 53, notification may not be displayed when a time period for
transmitting or receiving the image data is extremely short.
[0709] Though a still image taken by game device 10 or the like is
transmitted and received among game devices 10 in the description
above, a moving image may be transmitted and received. In this
case, a moving image to be transmitted may be a moving image taken
by game device 10, a moving image received from another device, or
a stored moving image other than a taken moving image.
[0710] In addition, in the present embodiment described above, the
process returns to step SC51 when a user himself/herself selects
end of transmission or end of reception. Specifically, though an
exemplary operation in which the process returns to processing for
urging a user to determine whether an image is to be transmitted to
another game device 10r or to be received from another game device
10t is described, the process may not return to that processing.
For example, even when a user himself/herself selects end of
transmission or end of reception, the processing in step SC56 may
be performed. That is, communication with another game device 10
with which communication has been established may be disconnected
and a screen indicating that communication was disconnected may be
displayed (see the left drawing or the right drawing in FIG. 55)
and the processing in the flowchart may end.
[0711] Further, in the present embodiment described above, lower
LCD 12 and upper LCD 22 physically separated from each other and
disposed vertically are described by way of example of a liquid
crystal display portion having two screens (two screens of an upper
screen and a lower screen), however, the display screen including
two screens may differently be structured. For example, lower LCD
12 and upper LCD 22 may be arranged side-by-side on one main
surface of lower housing 11. Alternatively, a vertically long LCD
having a width equal to lower LCD 12 and a length twice as large as
lower LCD 12 (that is, a physically single LCD having a vertical
length equivalent to two display screens) may be disposed on one
main surface of lower housing 11 and two images may vertically be
displayed (that is, two images are displayed vertically adjacent to
each other, with no boundary portion being interposed
therebetween). Alternatively, a horizontally long LCD having a
length equal to lower LCD 12 and having a width twice as large as
lower LCD 12 may be disposed on one main surface of lower housing
11 and two game images may horizontally be displayed side-by-side
(that is, two game images may be displayed horizontally adjacent to
each other, with no boundary portion being interposed
therebetween). That is, a physically single screen may be divided
in two parts to display two images respectively. For any form of
images, the present invention can similarly be implemented by
disposing touch panel 13 on the screen for displaying a display
image displayed on lower LCD 12 described above. Further, in a case
where a physically single screen is divided into two parts to
display two images above, touch panel 13 may be disposed over the
entire screen.
[0712] In addition, in the present embodiment described above,
touch panel 13 is integrally provided in game device 10, however,
the present invention can also be implemented in such a manner that
the game device and the touch panel are separately provided.
Further, touch panel 13 may be provided on the upper surface of
upper LCD 22 to display thereon a display image that has been
displayed on lower LCD 12 described above. Furthermore, though two
display screens (lower LCD 12 and upper LCD 22) are provided in the
present embodiment, a single display screen may be provided. That
is, in the present embodiment, only lower LCD 12 may serve as a
display screen and touch panel 13 may be provided thereon without
providing upper LCD 22. In addition, in the present embodiment,
touch panel 13 may be provided on the upper surface of upper LCD 22
without providing lower LCD 12, and a display image that has been
displayed on lower LCD 12 described above may be displayed on upper
LCD 22.
[0713] In addition, in the present embodiment, though touch panel
13 is used as input means in game device 10 for providing a
coordinate input, another pointing device may be used. Here, the
pointing device is an input device for designating an input
position or a coordinate on a screen. For example, the present
invention can similarly be implemented by employing a mouse, a
track pad, a track ball, or the like as input means and by using
positional information based on a screen coordinate system
calculated from an output value output from the input means.
[0714] Furthermore, in such a stationary game device that a player
enjoys a game while holding a game controller, another type of a
pointing device may also be employed. For example, a camera
securely fixed to a housing of a game controller may be used as the
pointing device. In this case, an image picked-up by the camera
varies depending on variation of a position indicated by the
housing of the game controller. Therefore, by analyzing the
picked-up image, a coordinate on a display screen indicated by the
housing above can be calculated. The present invention can
naturally be implemented even though game device 10 does not
include a pointing device itself such as touch panel 13.
[0715] Moreover, in the present embodiment described above, though
portable game device 10 or a stationary game device is described by
way of example, an information processing device such as a general
personal computer may execute the image communication application
program of the present invention so as to implement the present
invention.
[0716] The shape of game device 10 described above as well as a
shape, the number, a setting position, or the like of operation
button 14 group and touch panel 13 provided in game device 10 are
only by way of example, and the present invention can naturally be
implemented even though the shape, the number, and the setting
position thereof may be different. An order of performing the
steps, a screen display example, or the like used in the image
communication processing described above is only by way of example,
and the present invention can naturally be implemented even though
the order of performing the steps or screen display may be
different.
9. Sound Function
[0717] Processing provided by the sound program executed as a
result of launch of sound application program 57 will now be
described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 101.
[0718] <Exemplary Usage of Game Device>
[0719] FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an exemplary sound selection
screen 400 in a sound function in game device 10 according to the
present embodiment.
[0720] Referring to FIG. 61, game device 10 according to the
present embodiment includes a plurality of functions including a
function for reproduction of a recording data file freely recorded
by the user through the microphone in the main body or reproduction
of a music file which is music data stored in an SD card, and the
user can arbitrarily select a desired function on sound selection
screen 400 shown in FIG. 61.
[0721] In the example shown in FIG. 61, a plurality of icons 402
and 404 corresponding to respective functions incorporated in game
device 10 are displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12.
[0722] Here, when a "play with sound recorded through microphone"
icon 402 is selected, transition to a microphone recording and
reproduction mode of a function allowing the user to create a
recording data file by freely recording sound through the
microphone in the main body or to reproduce the created recording
data file or to edit the created recording data file is made.
[0723] On the other hand, when a "play with music in SD card" icon
404 is selected, transition to a music reproduction mode of a
function to reproduce a music file which is music data stored in
the SD card is made. In the present embodiment, for example, the
music file is stored in the SD card as appropriate through a
personal computer or the like, however, wireless communication
module 38 described above may be used to transmit and receive data
to and from a server storing music files through the Internet, and
a downloaded music file may be stored in the SD card.
[0724] Alternatively, when the user selects a "setting" icon 408
here, the user can freely select a function relating to setting
processing.
[0725] Alternatively, when a "quit" icon 406 is selected, a sound
function ends and the screen returns to a not-shown menu
screen.
[0726] In addition, in FIG. 61, an object 410 in a bird shape is
displayed in a lower portion of the screen of lower LCD 12. While
object 410 in a bird shape is being displayed, it is assumed that
an automatic recording and reproduction function which will be
described later is being performed.
[0727] The music reproduction mode, which is a function to perform
processing or the like for reproducing a music file which is music
data stored in the SD card, will initially be described
hereinafter.
[0728] Specifically, when "play with music in SD card" icon 404 is
selected, transition to the music reproduction mode is made and a
music reproduction folder list selection screen 500 is
displayed.
[0729] FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating music reproduction folder
list selection screen 500 according to the present embodiment.
[0730] FIG. 62(a) shows a case where music reproduction folder list
selection screen 500 is displayed on the screen of lower LCD
12.
[0731] In addition, in FIG. 62(b), a list screen 500# of music
files included in a currently selected folder is displayed on the
screen of upper LCD 22.
[0732] Referring to FIG. 62(a), the user can select any folder in a
folder list display range 530 in music reproduction folder list
selection screen 500 by touching the screen of lower LCD 12 with
touch pen 27 etc. For example, a case in which folders are
diagonally displayed along the circumference of a disc in folder
list display range 530 is shown.
[0733] For example, it is assumed that a cursor 520 selects the
folder displayed at the top of folder list display range 530.
Processing for scroll display of the folder list in accordance with
a trail of movement of the touch pen is performed by touching a
position where another folder is displayed in folder list display
range 530 on the screen of lower LCD 12 with touch pen 27 etc. or
by touching the screen and moving touch pen 27 etc. while
maintaining the touched state. In the present example, for example,
it is assumed that the position of cursor 520 is not changed and a
folder at the top in the folder list currently displayed in folder
list display range 530 is set to a selected state. Therefore,
processing for scroll display of the folder list is performed such
that the disc turns in accordance with the trail of movement of the
touch pen.
[0734] In the present example, though the description is given by
way of example, assuming that the position of cursor 520 is not
changed, the position of cursor 520 may be moved to a position in
accordance with a touch position which is a position touched with
touch pen 27. Specifically, when the screen is touched and
thereafter an operation to reset the touched state without changing
the touch position from the originally touched position is
performed (off the screen), only cursor 520 moves in accordance
with the touch position. Here, the processing for scroll display of
the folder list is not performed. Specifically, when a "random"
folder is touched in FIG. 62(a), only cursor 520 moves to the
position of the "random" folder.
[0735] Meanwhile, when an operation to touch the screen and move
touch pen 27 etc. while maintaining the touched state, that is, an
operation to change the touch position from the originally touched
position while maintaining the touched state (drag operation), is
performed, the processing for scroll display of the folder list is
performed in accordance with the trail of movement (travel
distance) of the touch pen. Here, cursor 520 can be maintained at
the position of cursor 520 before scroll display processing or the
folder at the top of the folder list can be set in a selected
state.
[0736] In addition, when the position of cursor 520 is varied and
the selected folder is changed, FIG. 62(b) is updated to list
screen 500# of music files included in the folder selected by
cursor 520. Specifically, when a favorite folder which will be
described later is touched, a list of music files registered in the
favorite folder is displayed. Alternatively, when the random folder
is touched, random reproduction as will be described later is
carried out and a list of music files to be reproduced in random
reproduction is displayed. In random reproduction, a file name of
an already reproduced music file may be displayed, but a file name
of a music file which has not yet been reproduced may be displayed
with its name being replaced with a different symbol or the like.
Through this processing, in random reproduction, the user cannot
know a music file to be reproduced next until this music file is
reproduced. Thus, the user can have expectation and enjoy
reproduction of music data.
[0737] Even when the position of cursor 520 is not varied, the
folder selected by cursor 520 is changed in accordance with the
processing for scroll display of the folder list. Therefore, in
list screen 500# displayed on the screen of upper LCD 22, update to
the list of music files in the selected folder is made.
[0738] In addition, the user can move a slider 518 on a folder list
scroll bar 510 displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12, by using
touch pen 27 etc.
[0739] By moving slider 518 on folder list scroll bar 510, the
folder list displayed in folder list display range 530 is updated
and a folder list in accordance with the cursor position is
displayed.
[0740] Moreover, the user can set a volume at which output from the
speaker or the like is provided, by designating a volume setting
icon 550 with touch pen 27 etc.
[0741] Further, the user can return to sound selection screen 400,
which is a preceding screen, by selecting a "back" icon 512.
[0742] In addition, by selecting an "open" icon 514, a music file
selection screen is displayed.
[0743] Moreover, by selecting a selection function icon 516 in FIG.
62(a), the user can perform the function corresponding to the
selection function icon. It is assumed that display and setting of
the selection function icon are switched in correspondence with the
folder currently selected by cursor 520. Here, for example, a case
where a "best 10" folder which is one of the favorite folder is
selected is shown, and selection function icon 516 of "all erase"
is provided in correspondence with this folder. When selection
function icon 516 of "all erase" is selected, processing for
erasing all music files registered in the best 10 folder is
performed. The favorite folder which will be described later may be
displayed when a music file is registered in the folder but it may
not be displayed when no music file is registered.
[0744] The "random" folder is displayed as a folder next to the
"best 10" folder. It is assumed that, when this "random" folder is
selected and executed, reproduction of all music files is started
such that the order of reproduction from the first file to the last
file is randomly designated. It is then assumed that, when
reproduction of the last designated music file ends, reproduction
is continued in such a manner that the order of reproduction is
again randomly designated. When the "random" folder is selected,
random reproduction is carried out but the order of reproduction is
designated. Therefore, reproduction can be repeated from a music
file that was once reproduced. In addition, in an example where
reproduction of the last designated music file ends and then the
order of next reproduction is randomly designated, in case that the
last designated music file happens to be the same as the first
music file in subsequent reproduction, processing for setting the
order of reproduction again is performed. As a result of this
processing, successive reproduction of the same music piece can be
suppressed and stress imposed on the user can be suppressed. In
addition, it is assumed that, when the "random" folder is selected,
reproduction processing is automatically started and hence a
reproduction operation selection screen 503 which will be described
later is displayed.
[0745] Here, for example, subsequent to "best 10", the "random"
folder, a "memories" folder and a "collection" folder that are
other favorite folders are sequentially displayed, however, the
order of display is not particularly limited as such and a manner
of display can freely be set. For example, the "random" folder and
"best 10" may be displayed with their positions being interchanged.
For example, when an initial position of cursor 520 is on the
"random" folder, the reproduction processing above is automatically
started. Therefore, music data can be reproduced without any
selection by the user.
[0746] FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating another music reproduction
folder list selection screen 501 according to the present
embodiment.
[0747] FIG. 63(a) shows a case where music reproduction folder list
selection screen 501 is displayed on lower LCD 12.
[0748] In addition, in FIG. 63(b), a list screen 501# of music
files included in the currently selected folder is displayed on the
screen of lower LCD 12.
[0749] For example, a case where the user uses touch pen 27 etc. to
attain scroll display of the folder list in folder list display
range 530 in FIG. 62(a) is shown.
[0750] Specifically, for example, the touch pen is moved while it
keeps touching the screen in folder list display range 530 (slide
operation), so that the folder list is updated in accordance with
the trail of movement.
[0751] Therefore, FIG. 63(a) shows a case where the position of
cursor 518# on folder list scroll bar 510 has moved from the
initial position.
[0752] In addition, list screen 501# in FIG. 63(b) shows that a
music folder FA is selected with cursor 520 and a plurality of
music files are stored in this music folder FA. As other features
are as described in connection with FIG. 62, detailed description
thereof will not be repeated.
[0753] As the favorite folder such as "best 10", the "random"
folder and the like and the music folders are displayed in parallel
in the same folder list display range 230, a folder to be
designated can be grasped at a glance and user's operability in
selection from the folder list is improved.
[0754] FIG. 62(a) shows by way of example a case that "best 10",
"memories" and "collection" are provided as the favorite folders.
In addition to the folders above, though not shown, a "practice"
folder and a folder that can be displayed in a special manner in
accordance with user's preference can also be provided. For
example, such a "secret" folder that only first several characters
of a music file included in the folder are displayed and remaining
characters are not shown (hidden) may be provided. Registration of
this folder will be described later.
[0755] FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating a music file selection
screen 502 according to the present embodiment.
[0756] Referring to FIG. 64(a), a music file list 540 is displayed
on the screen of lower LCD 12.
[0757] When "open" icon 514 is selected in the preceding music
reproduction folder list selection screen, the list of music files
included in the selected music folder is displayed.
[0758] In addition, the user can move a slider 518# on a file list
scroll bar 510# on the screen of lower LCD 12, by using touch pen
27 etc.
[0759] By moving the slider on file list scroll bar 510#, the file
list displayed in the file list selection screen is scrolled and
the list of music files in accordance with the cursor position is
displayed.
[0760] Moreover, by selecting the selection function icon in FIG.
64(a), the user can perform the function corresponding to the
selection function icon. It is assumed that display and setting of
the selection function icon are switched in correspondence with the
folder currently selected by cursor 520. Here, a selection function
icon 515 of "favorite" is provided. When selection function icon
515 of "favorite" is selected, a favorite folder selection screen
is displayed.
[0761] FIG. 102 is a diagram illustrating a favorite folder
selection screen 509 according to the present embodiment.
[0762] Referring to FIG. 102, a case where a "best 10" registration
icon 700, a "memories" registration icon 702, a "collection"
registration icon 704, a "practice" registration icon 706, and a
"secret" registration icon 708 that are favorite folders are
provided on the screen of lower LCD 12 is shown.
[0763] The user selects any of the registration icons above in
favorite folder selection screen 509, so that a music file selected
with a cursor 520# in FIG. 64(a) above is registered in the
selected folder and displayed.
[0764] When a "back" icon 710 is selected, music file selection
screen 502 which is the preceding screen is displayed.
[0765] Referring again to FIG. 64(a), a reproduction mode switching
icon 517 is provided in music file selection screen 502.
[0766] In addition, the user can make switching among reproduction
modes in the folder based on selection of reproduction mode
switching icon 517. Specifically, switching among a reproduction
mode in which a music file being reproduced is repeatedly
reproduced, a reproduction mode in which music files are
sequentially reproduced and reproduction is repeated from the
beginning when reproduction is completed, a reproduction mode in
which music files are sequentially reproduced and reproduction is
stopped when reproduction is completed, a reproduction mode in
which random reproduction is performed, and a reproduction mode in
which only a set section is repeatedly reproduced can sequentially
be made for execution.
[0767] In addition, information on the selected music folder is
displayed on upper LCD 22 in FIG. 64(b).
[0768] In FIG. 64(a), the user selects a "start" icon 516 to
perform the operation of reproducing the music file selected with
cursor 520#, and the reproduction operation selection screen is
displayed.
[0769] FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating reproduction operation
selection screen 503 according to the present embodiment.
[0770] FIG. 65(a) shows a case where reproduction operation
selection screen 503 for allowing an operation with music being
modified in the reproduction operation or the like is displayed on
lower LCD 12.
[0771] Specifically, for example, the user can switch between sound
effects output from a speaker or the like by operating R button 14J
and L button 14I after selection of a sound effect selection icon
532, 534 with the touch pen etc.
[0772] In addition, the user can perform the function to vary a
reproduction speed or a key of a reproduction signal by selecting a
speed and key adjustment icon 541.
[0773] Moreover, the user can perform the function of change to
another tone by modulating a frequency of the reproduction signal
or performing filtering processing or the like, by selecting a tone
adjustment icon 542.
[0774] Further, the user can perform the function to output as
sound effect from the speaker, a recording data file created by
recording voice and sound which will be described later, by
selecting a recording data selection icon 544.
[0775] In addition, it is assumed that a slider 519 moves in
accordance with a reproduction position in a total duration of the
music file within the display range of a reproduction time bar 511.
When the user touches a position within the display range of
reproduction time bar 511 with touch pen 27 etc., processing for
reproducing the music file can be started from the time
corresponding to the touch position. Here, it is assumed that
slider 519 moves to the position where the reproduction processing
is started. By selecting slider 519 with touch pen 27 etc. and
performing the slide operation, the reproduction processing may be
started from the position resulting from the slide operation.
[0776] In addition, the user can cause the music file being
reproduced to pause, by selecting a pause command icon 522.
Moreover, the user can select a next music file included in the
folder to perform the reproduction operation thereof, by selecting
a next music selection command icon 524. Further, the user can
select a previous music file included in the folder to perform the
reproduction operation thereof, by selecting a previous music
selection command icon 520.
[0777] In addition, the user can perform visualizer processing
which will be described later, by pressing a visualizer switching
icon 531.
[0778] In addition, the user can make switching among reproduction
modes in the folder by pressing reproduction mode switching icon
517. Specifically, switching among the reproduction mode in which a
music file being reproduced is repeatedly reproduced, the
reproduction mode in which music files are sequentially reproduced
and reproduction is repeated from the beginning when reproduction
is completed, the reproduction mode in which music files are
sequentially reproduced and reproduction is stopped when
reproduction is completed, the reproduction mode in which random
reproduction is performed, and the reproduction mode in which only
a set section is repeatedly reproduced can sequentially be made for
execution.
[0779] In addition, by pressing "favorite" icon 515, the user can
have favorite folder selection screen 509 as described in
connection with FIG. 102 displayed. As described above, by
selecting any of the registration icons in favorite folder
selection screen 509, the currently reproduced music file can be
registered in the selected folder and displayed.
[0780] FIG. 65(b) shows a case where music file list 540 displayed
on the screen of lower LCD 12 in FIG. 64(a) is displayed on the
screen of upper LCD 22 as a music file selection list screen 503#.
A music file included in the same folder where the music file being
reproduced is included can be selected by operating direction input
button 14A. Specifically, after the music file is selected with the
touch pen etc. on the screen of lower LCD 12 in FIG. 64(a) (start
is pressed), on the screen of lower LCD 12 in FIG. 65(a),
processing relating to the operation for reproducing the music file
selected with the touch pen etc. is selected in the reproduction
operation selection screen with the touch pen etc., and on the
screen of upper LCD 22, a music file can be selected with direction
input button 14A.
[0781] For example, by using direction input button 14A to select
the music file and pressing any of operation buttons 14B to 14E,
the music file being reproduced is switched to the selected music
file and the reproduction operation thereof can be performed.
[0782] Therefore, the processing in reproduction operation
selection screen 503 on lower LCD 12 and the processing in music
file selection list screen 503# on upper LCD 22 can be performed in
parallel, which contributes to convenience of the user.
[0783] Detailed processing of the sound function according to the
present embodiment will be described hereinafter.
[0784] A processing procedure relating to the "sound function"
according to the present embodiment described above will be
described with reference to the following flow. It is noted that
each step is implemented representatively by reading of a program
or the like stored in memory card 29 to main memory 32 and
execution thereof by CPU 31.
[0785] <Function Selection Processing>
[0786] FIG. 66 is a flowchart illustrating processing relating to
function selection in game device 10 according to the present
embodiment. It is noted that the flow shown in FIG. 66 illustrates
the processing in sound selection screen 400 in FIG. 61.
[0787] Referring to FIG. 66, when the power of game device 10 is
turned on or the start button is pressed and thereafter the user
selects a prescribed icon in a not-shown menu screen, the sound
function is performed.
[0788] In step SD1, CPU 31 causes lower LCD 12 to display sound
selection screen 400 as shown in FIG. 61.
[0789] Thereafter, CPU 31 starts automatic recording and
reproduction processing (step SD2). The automatic recording and
reproduction processing will be described later. It is noted that
the processing in steps SD 1 and SD2 may be interchanged.
[0790] Thereafter, CPU 31 determines whether data of the touch
position has been input from touch panel 13 or not (step SD3). CPU
31 determines whether or not the touch position data has been input
from touch panel 13 through I/F circuit 42. Namely, CPU 31
determines whether a touch operation with touch pen 27 etc. by the
user has been performed or not. When the touch position data has
not been input (NO in step SD3), the processing in step SD3 is
repeated.
[0791] On the other hand, when the touch position data has been
input (YES in step SD3), the process proceeds to step SD4.
[0792] In step SD4, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate value
indicated by the touch position data is within a display range of
the function selection icon or not. Specifically, CPU 31 determines
which of "play with sound recorded through microphone" icon 402 or
"play with music in SD card" icon 404 has been selected.
[0793] Then, when the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the display range of "play with sound
recorded through microphone" icon 402 or "play with music in SD
card" icon 404 (YES in step SD4), the process proceeds to step
SD8.
[0794] On the other hand, when the coordinate value indicated by
the touch position data is out of the display range of "play with
sound recorded through microphone" icon 402 or "play with music in
SD card" icon 404 (NO in step SD4), the process proceeds to step
SD5.
[0795] When CPU 31 determines in step SD4 that the coordinate value
indicated by the touch position is within the display range of the
function selection icon, the processing for automatic recording and
reproduction processing ends in step SD8 (step SD8).
[0796] Then, CPU 31 performs processing for transition to a next
selected function mode (step SD9). The processing for transition to
the selected function mode will be described later.
[0797] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD4 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is not within
the display range of the function selection icon, CPU 31 then
determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position is within the display range of "setting" icon 408 or not
(step SD5).
[0798] When CPU 31 determines in step SD5 that the coordinate value
indicated by the touch position is within the display range of
"setting" icon 408, the automatic recording and reproduction
processing ends (step SD10).
[0799] Thereafter, CPU 31 performs the setting processing (step
SD11). The setting processing will be described later.
[0800] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD5 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is not within
the display range of "setting" icon 408, CPU 31 then determines
whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is
within the display range of "end" icon 406 or not (step SD6).
[0801] When CPU 31 determines in step SD6 that the coordinate value
indicated by the touch position is within the display range of
"end" icon 408, the automatic recording and reproduction processing
ends and the function selection processing ends (end). Namely, the
screen thus returns to the not-shown menu screen.
[0802] On the other hand, when the coordinate value indicated by
the touch position is not within the display range of "end" icon
408 in step SD6, the process returns to step SD3.
[0803] FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of the processing for transition to a selection function mode in
FIG. 66.
[0804] Referring to FIG. 67, CPU 31 determines whether the
coordinate value indicated by the touch position is within the
display range of "play with music in SD card" icon 404 or "play
with sound recorded through microphone" icon 402 (step SD20).
[0805] When the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is
within the display range of "play with music in SD card" icon 404,
the process proceeds to step SD21.
[0806] Then, CPU 31 determines whether the SD card has been
inserted or not (step SD21). When CPU 31 determines that the SD
card has been inserted, transition to the music reproduction mode
is then made (step SD22). The music reproduction mode will be
described later. When the music reproduction mode ends, the screen
again returns to the sound selection screen in step SD1 in FIG. 1
(return).
[0807] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD21 that
the SD card has not been inserted, CPU 31 performs error indication
processing (step SD23). The error indication processing is
processing for performing processing for indicating, for example,
that an "SD card is not inserted" or the like and urging the user
to insert the SD card. Then, the process again returns to step SD1
(return).
[0808] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD20 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is within the
display range of "play with sound recorded through microphone" icon
402, transition to the microphone recording and reproduction mode
is made (step SD24). The microphone recording and reproduction mode
will be described later. When the microphone recording and
reproduction mode ends, the screen again returns to the sound
selection screen in step SD1 in FIG. 1 (return).
[0809] <Music Reproduction Mode>
[0810] The music reproduction mode will now be described.
[0811] FIG. 68 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
in the music reproduction mode.
[0812] Referring to FIG. 68, initially, CPU 31 performs processing
for search of a folder in an SD card (step SD30).
[0813] Then, CPU 31 generates the folder list (step SD31).
[0814] Then, CPU 31 has the music reproduction folder list
selection screen displayed (step SD32). FIGS. 62 and 63 above show
examples of display of music reproduction folder list selection
screen 500.
[0815] The processing for search of a folder in an SD card will be
described here.
[0816] FIG. 69 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of the processing for search of a folder in an SD card.
[0817] Referring to FIG. 69, CPU 31 sets a search initial path to
be first searched, among paths associated with the folders stored
in the SD card (step SD50). Thereafter, CPU 31 performs processing
for searching for a music file in accordance with the search
initial path (step SD51).
[0818] Then, CPU 31 determines whether or not a music file is
present in the folder through the processing for search for the
music file in accordance with the search initial path (step
SD52).
[0819] When CPU 31 determines in step SD52 that the music file is
present, the music folder including the music file is extracted
(step SD53).
[0820] Whether the music file is present or not can be determined,
for example, by referring to an extension for identifying a file.
Here, determination may also be made by referring to identification
information stored in a header or the like of a file, without
limited to determination based on the extension, and a
determination method is not limited.
[0821] Thereafter, CPU 31 determines whether search of all paths
has been completed or not (step SD54).
[0822] When CPU 31 determines in step SD54 that search of all paths
has not been completed, CPU 31 sets a next search path to be
searched next (step SD25).
[0823] Then, the process returns to step SD51 and the processing
for searching for the music file which is the processing described
above is performed.
[0824] The processing in steps SD51 to SD54 described above is
repeated until search of all paths is completed. When CPU 31
determines in step SD54 that search of all paths has been
completed, the process ends (return).
[0825] Thus, all folders in which a music file is present can be
extracted from the attached SD card.
[0826] FIG. 70 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
for generating a folder list.
[0827] Referring to FIG. 70, initially, CPU 31 performs processing
for determining a folder name (step SD60). Thereafter, CPU 31
performs folder arrangement processing (step SD61).
[0828] FIG. 71 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of the processing for determining a folder name.
[0829] Referring to FIG. 71, CPU 31 selects a first folder
extracted in the processing for search of the folder in FIG. 69
(step SD65). Then, CPU 31 determines whether there is an identical
folder name or not (step SD66).
[0830] When CPU 31 determines in step SD66 that there is an
identical folder name, CPU 31 merges the folders (step SD67).
[0831] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD66 that
there is no identical folder, the process proceeds to step SD68.
CPU 31 determines in step SD68 whether or not determination has
been completed for all folders extracted in the processing for
search of the folder in FIG. 69.
[0832] When CPU 31 determines in step SD68 that determination has
not been completed for all folders, CPU 31 selects a next folder
extracted in the processing for search of the folder in FIG. 69
(step SD69). Then, the process returns to step SD66 and the
processing in steps SD66 to SD69 described above is repeated.
[0833] When CPU 31 determines in step SD68 that determination has
been completed for all folders, the process then proceeds to the
folder arrangement processing (step SD61) in FIG. 70.
[0834] Referring again to FIG. 70, in the folder arrangement
processing (step SD61), the folders or the like merged in the
folder name determination processing (step SD60) are arranged in
accordance with a prescribed order of arrangement based on a name,
a symbol, or the like.
[0835] Then, the process again returns to FIG. 68 (return).
[0836] Referring to FIG. 68, in step SD32, in accordance with the
order of folders arranged in the folder arrangement processing
(step SD61), the folder list is then displayed on the music
reproduction folder list selection screen (step SD32).
[0837] FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating a specific example
illustrating the folder search processing.
[0838] Here, for example, a list structure of music files and
folders stored in one SD card is shown.
[0839] Referring to FIG. 72, specifically, for example, a case
where a folder FD1 and a folder FD2 are provided and music folder
FA and music folder FB are provided in folder FD 1 is shown.
[0840] Then, a case where a music file MAA, a music file MBB, . . .
are included in music folder FA is shown.
[0841] In addition, a case where a music file . . . are included in
music folder FB is shown.
[0842] A case where music folder FA and a music folder FC are
provided in folder FD2 is shown.
[0843] Then, a case where music files MX, MY are included in music
folder FA is shown.
[0844] In addition, a case where a music file . . . are included in
music folder FC is shown.
[0845] In a case where folders having such a tree structure are
stored in the SD card, four music folders of music folders FA, FB,
FA, FC storing music files are extracted in the processing in
accordance with the flow described in connection with FIG. 69.
[0846] In the processing in accordance with the flow described in
connection with FIG. 71, as music folder FA stored in folder FD1
and music folder FA stored in folder FD2 have the same folder name,
music files stored in respective music folders FA are merged. As a
result of such merging, in the example described above, music file
MAA, music file MBB, . . . , music file MX, music file MY, . . .
are displayed in a list as music files belonging to music folder
FA, in music file list screen 501# as illustrated in FIG. 63(b) or
music file selection list screen 503# as illustrated in FIG.
70(b).
[0847] In this processing, merging is carried out based on the same
folder name, whereby the folder list is displayed on the folder
list selection screen. Thus, if folders having the same name are
present in the attached memory card (SD card), display in a list as
belonging to the same group is provided. Therefore, no
disadvantageous condition in folder extraction processing due to a
folder configuration in the SD card, such as presence of a
plurality of identical folder names, is caused and convenience can
be improved.
[0848] In the present embodiment, in order to group music files
within the attached memory card (SD card), folder information in
the memory card is utilized as it is, without utilizing attribute
information of music files (music files present in the same folder
are handled as belonging to the same group). In addition,
regardless of levels where folders are present, all folders are
displayed in parallel (in one level) in music reproduction folder
list selection screen 500 or the like. Specifically, in the example
of FIG. 72 where music files are present in both of folder FD1 and
folder FD2, folder FD1, folder FD2, music folder FA, music folder
FB, and music folder FC are displayed in a list in parallel on
music reproduction folder list selection screen 500. Thus, in spite
of a complicated level configuration in the memory card, for
example, even a child or the like representative of the user can
readily find a desired music file.
[0849] In addition, since the folder name registered in the memory
card is directly utilized on music reproduction folder list
selection screen 500 or the like as the name of the folder handled
as belonging to the same group, the user can readily locate a
desired music file and convenience is improved.
[0850] In addition, as described previously, in music reproduction
folder list selection screen 500, since the name of each folder
extracted from the memory card (which also serves as a touch button
for display in a list of music files belonging to each folder) and
the favorite folder (which also serves as a touch button for
display in a list of music files registered as favorite) are
displayed in parallel (in one level), an operation to select a
folder is facilitated and convenience is further improved. In
addition, as the "random" folder is displayed in parallel in such a
list, convenience is further improved.
[0851] Referring again to FIG. 68, after the music reproduction
folder list selection screen is displayed in step SD32, CPU 31 then
determines whether the touch position data has been input from
touch panel 13 or not (step SD33). CPU 31 determines whether or not
the touch position data has been input from touch panel 13 through
I/F circuit 42. Namely, CPU 31 determines whether a touch operation
with touch pen 27 by the user has been performed or not. In other
words, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate value input through
the user's operation of touch panel 13 is detected or not. When the
touch position data has not been input (NO in step SD33), the
processing in step SD33 is repeated.
[0852] On the other hand, when the touch position data has been
input (YES in step SD33), the process proceeds to step SD34.
[0853] Then, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate value
indicating the touch position data is within the display range of
the folder list or not (step SD34).
[0854] When CPU 31 determines in step SD34 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of the folder list, CPU 31 performs the processing for scroll
display of the folder list in accordance with the trail of movement
from the touch position or the touch position with the touch pen
(step SD35).
[0855] Thereafter, CPU 31 performs the processing for moving the
slider position on folder list scroll bar 510 in accordance with
the position of the selected folder in the folder list (step
SD35#). Then, the process again returns to step SD33. It is noted
that the processing in steps SD35 and SD35# may be interchanged,
which is also applicable hereinafter.
[0856] In the present example, as the description is given by way
of example assuming that the position of cursor 520 is not changed,
only the processing for scroll display of the folder list is
described. As described above, however, display processing can also
be performed such that the position of cursor 520 is moved to a
position in accordance with a touch position which is a position
touched with touch pen 27.
[0857] In this case, when the screen is touched and thereafter an
operation to reset the touched state without changing the touch
position from the originally touched position is performed (off the
screen), only cursor 520 moves in accordance with the touch
position. Here, the processing for scroll display of the folder
list and the processing for moving the slider position on the
folder list scroll bar are not performed.
[0858] Meanwhile, when an operation to touch the screen and move
touch pen 27 etc. while maintaining the touched state, that is, an
operation to change the touch position from the originally touched
position while maintaining the touched state (drag operation), is
performed, the processing for scroll display of the folder list is
performed in accordance with the trail of movement (travel
distance) of the touch pen. Here, the processing for moving also
the slider position on the folder list scroll bar is performed.
[0859] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD34 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the display range of the folder list, CPU 31 determines
whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data
is within the display range of volume setting icon 550 or not (step
SD36).
[0860] When CPU 31 determines in step SD36 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of volume setting icon 550, CPU 31 then performs the volume
setting processing (step SD37). Then, the process again returns to
step SD33. The volume setting processing will be described
later.
[0861] When CPU 31 determines in step SD36 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of volume setting icon 550, CPU 31 then determines
whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data
is within the display range of "open" icon 514 or not (step
SD38).
[0862] When CPU 31 determines in step SD36 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of "open" icon 514, CPU 31 then performs music file selection
processing (step SD39). The music file selection processing will be
described later.
[0863] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD38 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the display range of "open" icon 514, CPU 31 then determines
whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data
is within the display range of folder list scroll bar 510 or not
(step SD40).
[0864] When CPU 31 determines in step SD40 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of folder list scroll bar 510, CPU 31 performs the processing
for scroll display of the folder list in accordance with the touch
position (step SD41).
[0865] Thereafter, the processing for moving the slider position on
folder list scroll bar 510 in accordance with the position of the
selected folder in the folder list is performed (step SD42). Then,
the process again returns to step SD33.
[0866] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD40 that
the coordinate indicated by the touch position data is not within
the display range of folder list scroll bar 510, CPU 31 then
determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the display range of the selection function
icon or not (step SD43).
[0867] When CPU 31 determines in step SD43 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of the selection function icon, CPU 31 performs the function
corresponding to the selection function icon (step SD44).
[0868] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD43 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the display range of the selection function icon, CPU 31
then determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the display range of "back" icon 512 or not
(step SD45).
[0869] When CPU 31 determines in step SD45 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of "back" icon 512, the processing in the music reproduction
mode ends and the sound selection screen in step SD1 in FIG. 66 is
displayed.
[0870] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD45 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the display range of "back" icon 512, the process returns to
step SD33.
[0871] FIG. 73 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of the processing for selecting a music file.
[0872] Referring to FIG. 73, CPU 31 initially has music file
selection screen 502 as described in connection with FIG. 64
displayed (step SD70).
[0873] CPU 31 then determines whether the touch position data has
been input from touch panel 13 or not (step SD70#). CPU 31
determines whether or not the touch position data has been input
from touch panel 13 through I/F circuit 42. Namely, CPU 31
determines whether a touch operation with touch pen 27 by the user
has been performed or not. In other words, CPU 31 determines
whether the coordinate value input through the user's operation of
touch panel 13 is detected or not. When the touch position data has
not been input (NO in step SD70#), the processing in step SD70# is
repeated.
[0874] On the other hand, when the touch position data has been
input (YES in step SD70#), the process proceeds to step SD71.
[0875] Then, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate value
indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of
music file list 540 or not (step SD71).
[0876] When CPU 31 determines in step SD71 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of music file list 540, CPU 31 performs the processing for
scroll display of music file list 540 in accordance with the touch
position (step SD72).
[0877] Thereafter, CPU 31 performs the processing for moving the
slider position on music file list scroll bar 510# in accordance
with the position of the selected music file in the music file list
(step SD73). Then, the process again returns to step SD70#.
[0878] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD71 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the display range of music file list 540, CPU 31 then
determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the display range of volume setting icon
550 or not (step SD74). When CPU 31 determines in step SD74 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within
the display range of volume setting icon 550, CPU 31 performs the
volume setting processing (step SD75). Then, the process again
returns to step SD70#. The volume setting processing will be
described later.
[0879] When CPU 31 determines in step SD74 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of volume setting icon 550, CPU 31 determines whether
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within
the display range of a "start" icon 526 (step SD76).
[0880] When CPU 31 determines in step SD76 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of "start" icon 526, CPU 31 performs the music file
reproduction processing (step SD76#). The music file reproduction
processing will be described later.
[0881] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD76 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the display range of "start" icon 526, CPU 31 then
determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the display range of music file list scroll
bar 510# or not (step SD77).
[0882] When CPU 31 determines in step SD77 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of music file list scroll bar 510#, CPU 31 performs the
processing for scroll display of music file list 540 in accordance
with the touch position data (step SD78).
[0883] Thereafter, CPU 31 performs the processing for moving the
slider position on music file list scroll bar 510# in accordance
with the position of the selected music file in the music file list
(step SD79). Then, the process again returns to step SD70#.
[0884] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD77 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the display range of music file list scroll bar 510#, CPU 31
then determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the display range of the selection function
icon or not (step SD80).
[0885] When CPU 31 determines in step SD80 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of the selection function icon, CPU 31 performs the function
corresponding to the selection function icon (step SD81). Then, the
process again returns to step SD70#. For example, when
determination that the coordinate value is within the display range
of selection function icon 515 of "favorite" is made, favorite
folder selection screen 509 described in connection with FIG. 102
above is displayed. By selecting any of the registration icons,
processing for registering the music file in the selected folder is
performed.
[0886] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD80 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the display range of the selection function icon, CPU 31
then determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the display range of a "back" icon 512# or
not.
[0887] When it is determined in step SD82 that the coordinate value
indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of
"back" icon 512#, the process proceeds to "A" and the music
reproduction folder list selection screen in step SD32 in FIG. 68
is displayed.
[0888] FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating sub routine processing of
the processing for reproducing a music file.
[0889] Referring to FIG. 74, CPU 31 starts reproduction of the
selected music file (step SD90).
[0890] As described above, in response to an instruction from CPU
31, audio output control circuit 42c provides output to the
headphone through headphone amplifier 48 when headphone 18 is
connected, and it provides output to right speaker 45, 47 through
amplifier 44, 46 when the headphone is not connected.
[0891] Thereafter, the music file selection screen is displayed on
upper LCD 22 and the reproduction operation selection screen is
displayed on lower LCD 12 (step SD91).
[0892] Thereafter, CPU 31 determines whether the touch position
data has been input from touch panel 13 or not (step SD92).
[0893] When CPU 31 determines in step SD92 that the touch position
data has not been input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 then determines
whether the operation of direction input button 14A has been
performed or not (step SD93).
[0894] When CPU 31 determines in step SD93 that the operation of
direction input button 14A has been performed, CPU 31 performs the
processing for scroll display of the music file list selected by
the cursor position on the music file selection screen in
accordance with the operation of direction input button 14A (step
SD94).
[0895] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD93 that
the operation of direction input button 14A has not been performed,
the process again returns to step SD92.
[0896] Then, CPU 31 determines whether a prescribed button has been
pressed or not (step SD94#).
[0897] When the prescribed button has been pressed in step SD94#,
CPU 31 starts reproduction of the music file selected by the cursor
position (step SD90).
[0898] On the other hand, when the prescribed button has not
pressed in step SD94#, the process again returns to step SD92.
Here, it is assumed that any of operation buttons 14B to 14E is set
as the prescribed button.
[0899] When the touch position data has been input from touch panel
13 in step SD92, CPU 31 then determines whether the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of reproduction time bar 511 or not (step SD95).
[0900] When CPU 31 determines in step SD95 that indication by the
touch position data is within the display range of reproduction
time bar 511, CPU 31 performs the processing for reproducing the
music file from the time corresponding to the touch position (step
SD96).
[0901] Then, CPU 31 performs the processing for moving the slider
position indicating the reproduction position in the total duration
of the music file on reproduction time bar 511 in accordance with
the touch position (step SD97). Then, the process again returns to
step SD92.
[0902] When CPU 31 determines in step SD95 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of reproduction time bar 511, CPU 31 then determines
whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data
is within the display range of volume setting icon 550 or not (step
SD98).
[0903] When CPU 31 determines in step SD98 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of volume setting icon 550, CPU 31 performs the volume
setting processing (step SD99). Then, the process again returns to
step SD92. The volume setting processing will be described
later.
[0904] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD98 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the display range of volume setting icon 550, CPU 31 then
determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the range of visualizer switching icon 531
or not (step SD100).
[0905] When CPU 31 determines in step SD100 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of visualizer switching icon 531, CPU 31 then performs the
visualizer display processing (step SD101). Then, the process again
returns to step SD92. The visualizer display processing will be
described later.
[0906] When CPU 31 determines in step SD100 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of visualizer switching icon 531, CPU 31 then
determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the display range of a reproduction
operation command icon or not (step SD402). Here, pause command
icon 522, next music selection command icon 524 and previous music
selection command icon 520 are provided by way of example of the
reproduction operation command icon.
[0907] When CPU 31 determines in step SD402 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of the reproduction operation command icon, CPU 31 performs
the function corresponding to the reproduction operation command
(step SD103). Then, the process again returns to step SD92.
[0908] Specifically, when it is determined that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of pause command icon 522, CPU 31 causes the reproduction
operation to pause. Alternatively, when it is determined that the
coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the
display range of next music selection command icon 524, CPU 31
starts reproduction of the next selected music file. On the other
hand, when it is determined that the coordinate value indicated by
the touch position data is within the display range of previous
music selection command icon 521, CPU 31 starts reproduction of the
previously selected music file.
[0909] When CPU 31 determines in step SD402 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of the reproduction operation command icon, CPU 31
then determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the display range of the selection function
icon or not.
[0910] When CPU 31 determines in step SD104 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of the selection function icon, CPU 31 then performs the
function corresponding to the selection function icon (step SD
105). Then, the process again returns to step SD92. For example, in
the present example, "favorite" icon 515, reproduction mode
switching icon 517, speed and key adjustment icon 541, tone
adjustment icon 542, and recording data selection icon 544 are
displayed as the selection function icon.
[0911] Specifically, as described above, when CPU 31 determines
that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is
within the display range of "favorite" icon 515, CPU 31 performs
the processing for moving the currently selected music file to the
favorite folder.
[0912] Alternatively, when CPU 31 determines that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of reproduction mode switching icon 517, CPU 31 switches the
setting of the reproduction mode for display.
[0913] Alternatively, when CPU 31 determines that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of speed and key adjustment icon 541, CPU 31 performs the
function to change a reproduction speed or a key which will be
described later.
[0914] Alternatively, when CPU 31 determines that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of tone adjustment icon 542, CPU 31 performs the function for
change to another tone by performing filtering processing for
modulating a frequency which will be described later.
[0915] Alternatively, when CPU 31 determines that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of recording data selection icon 544, CPU 31 performs the
function to output an audio data file in which sound is recorded
from the speaker as sound effect, as will be described later.
[0916] When CPU 31 determines in step SD104 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of the selection function icon, CPU 31 then
determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the display range of a "back" icon 512a or
not (step SD106).
[0917] When CPU 31 determines in step SD106 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of "back" icon 512a, the process returns to step
SD92.
[0918] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 106
that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is
within the display range of "back" icon 512a, the process proceeds
to "B" and the music file selection screen is displayed in step
SD70 in FIG. 73.
[0919] <Volume Setting Processing>
[0920] The volume setting processing will now be described.
[0921] FIG. 75 is an enlarged view of volume setting icon 550.
[0922] Referring to FIG. 75(a), volume setting icon 550 is provided
with a slider 552, for example, of which position on the horizontal
axis from left toward right indicates a greater volume.
[0923] Slider 552 is displayed at a position in accordance with a
current value within a volume level parameter setting range.
[0924] Here, a region in a direction of lower volume relative to a
position corresponding to the current value, at which slider 552 is
displayed, is identified as a volume low region 554, and a region
in a direction of higher volume relative to the position
corresponding to the current value, at which slider 552 is
displayed, is identified as a volume high region 555.
[0925] In the embodiment of the present invention, in a case where
slider 552 is selected with the touch pen etc., the slider can
continuously be operated to move (what is called a drag operation)
in any direction toward volume low region 554 and volume high
region 555 from the position corresponding to the current value, in
accordance with a subsequent touch-and-slide operation (an
operation to change the touch position with a touch-on state being
maintained).
[0926] The case where slider 552 is selected with the touch pen
etc. includes (i) a case where slider 552 is touched and (ii) a
case where the touch position enters slider 552 during the touch
operation. Here, the drag operation of slider 552 may be performed
only in the case (i), the drag operation may be performed only in
the case (ii), or the drag operation may be performed in either of
the case (i) or (ii).
[0927] Referring to FIG. 75(b), in a case where volume low region
554 other than slider 552 is touched with the touch pen etc.,
slider 552 can instantaneously be operated to move to the touch-on
position. Thus, change to a volume lower than a current volume
value can instantaneously be made. On the other hand, when volume
high region 555 other than slider 552 is touched with the touch pen
etc., slider 552 is not instantaneously operated to move to the
touch-on position. Thus, change to a volume higher than the current
volume value cannot instantaneously be made.
[0928] The case where volume low region 554 is touched includes (i)
a case where somewhere within volume low region 554 is touched and
(ii) a case where the touch position enters volume low region 554
during the touch operation. Here, slider 552 may instantaneously be
moved to the touch-on position only in the case (i), slider 552 may
instantaneously be moved to the touch position only in the case
(ii), or slider 552 may instantaneously be moved in either of the
case (i) or (ii).
[0929] In addition, when volume low region 554 is touched, slider
552 is instantaneously moved to the touch position, and when the
slide operation follows, the drag operation as described above can
be performed.
[0930] FIG. 76 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of the volume setting processing according to the present
embodiment.
[0931] Referring to FIG. 76, when CPU 31 determines that the
coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within the
display range of volume setting icon 550, CPU 31 determines whether
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within
the display range of slider 552 or not (step SD110).
[0932] When CPU 31 determines in step SD110 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of the slider, slider 552 is moved to and displayed at the
most recent touch position in accordance with the trail of movement
of the touch pen that keeps touching the screen (slide operation)
(step SD114). Namely, a continuous operation of movement of slider
552 from the current position to a desired position within the
volume level parameter setting range is accepted.
[0933] Then, CPU 31 sets the volume in accordance with the position
of slider 552 (step SD115). Namely, the volume level parameter is
updated to a value in accordance with the position of slider 552
resulting from movement in accordance with a moving operation. In
this regard, as slider 552 continuously moves from the current
position to the desired position, the volume level parameter is
gradually adjusted along with movement.
[0934] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD110 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the display range of slider 552, CPU 31 then determines
whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data
is within the display range of acceptable volume input or not (step
SD111).
[0935] When CPU 31 determines in step SD111 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of acceptable volume input, slider 552 is moved to and
displayed at the position input with the touch pen (step SD112).
Then, the volume in accordance with the position of slider 552
within the parameter setting range is set (step SD115).
[0936] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 111
that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is
not within the display range of acceptable volume input, CPU 31
performs invalid input determination processing (step SD113).
Namely, processing for determining the input as invalid is
performed. Then, the process ends.
[0937] In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the volume low
region is set as inside of the display range of acceptable volume
input. Volume high region 555 is not set as inside of the display
range of acceptable volume input. Specifically, in a case where the
slider is moved in a direction of decrease from the current value
of the parameter, in the present example, the input indicating the
operation of moving the slider to the desired position in the
volume low region is accepted. In a case where the slider is moved
in a direction of increase from the current value of the parameter,
in the present example, the input indicating the operation of
moving the slider to the desired position in the volume high region
is not accepted.
[0938] Therefore, slider 552 is immediately moved to the touch
position in the volume low region and the volume in accordance with
the slider position is set. On the other hand, touching the volume
high region results in the invalid input determination processing,
so that the slider is not moved and the volume in accordance with
the slider position is not set.
[0939] As a result of such processing, abrupt increase in the
volume caused by a user's erroneous operation while the volume
setting processing is performed with the touch pen is avoided.
Specifically, the position of the slider is varied with the touch
pen in a direction of decrease in the volume and the volume setting
processing in accordance with the slider position can be performed.
In the direction of increase in the volume, however, the position
of the slider is not varied with the touch pen and the volume is
not increased.
[0940] In particular, in performing the setting processing using
the touch pen, the user can freely designate any position on the
touch panel but a display range of volume setting icon 550 cannot
be great owing to layout restrictions. Accordingly, in performing
the volume setting processing, though attention should be paid in
designating a position in accordance with a desired volume level
within the display range of volume setting icon 550, it is very
likely that the user erroneously designates the direction of
increase in the volume with the touch pen. Therefore, as a result
of this processing, such stress imposed on the user that he/she
operates game device 10 while being anxious about the possibility
of abrupt increase in the volume caused by his/her erroneous
operation can be suppressed.
[0941] In the above, regarding the operation of moving the slider
to the desired position, a case where the slider is immediately
moved to the position in the volume low region so that the volume
in accordance with the slider position is set has been described,
however, as in the continuous operation of moving the slider, such
setting that the volume level parameter is gradually adjusted can
also be made.
[0942] FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating another example of the
volume setting icon.
[0943] Referring to FIG. 77(a), a volume setting region for setting
a volume at which output is provided from the right speaker and the
left speaker is shown here.
[0944] Specifically, the ordinate (R) represents a volume level of
the right speaker and the abscissa (L) represents a volume level of
the left speaker. Namely, a coordinate value (position) at any
point is associated with the volume level of the right speaker and
the left speaker. Here, a point 552# indicating a position
corresponding to the current volume level of the right speaker and
the left speaker is displayed.
[0945] By touching point 552# with the touch pen, point 552# is
selected. By moving the touch pen while the screen is being touched
(performing the slide operation), the pointer is moved and
displayed in accordance with the trail of movement. On the other
hand, when a position other than point 552# is touched with the
touch pen and this touched position is within the display range of
acceptable audio input, point 552# is moved and displayed at the
position of input with the touch pen.
[0946] Though a case where setting of two types of parameters, that
is, the volume level of the right speaker and the left speaker, is
associated with the coordinate value (position) on the abscissa and
the ordinate has been described here, the setting may be associated
with more types of parameters, without limited to two types of
parameters. Regarding display of a parameter setting range, when a
single parameter is set, for example, a position of the parameter
may be displayed one-dimensionally, that is, on the abscissa. On
the other hand, for example, when two parameters are set, a
position of the parameters may be displayed two-dimensionally, that
is, on the ordinate and the abscissa. Further, when a plurality of
types of parameters are set, a position of the parameters may be
displayed multi-dimensionally, in accordance with the number of
types thereof.
[0947] Referring to FIG. 77(b), the case where a position within
the display range of acceptable volume input is touched with the
touch pen and the volume level in accordance with this position is
immediately set is shown here. Namely, for example, a direction of
decrease in the volume of at least any one of the right speaker and
the left speaker with the use of the touch pen is set as inside of
the display range of acceptable volume input, however, other
regions are not set as inside of the display range of acceptable
volume input.
[0948] Therefore, when a position other than point 552# is touched,
pointer 552# is not moved in a direction of increase in the volume,
which is outside of the display range of acceptable audio input, in
spite of touch with the touch pen. Thus, the volume is prevented
from becoming excessively high and having the user feel
uncomfortable can be suppressed.
[0949] In the present example, a case where the display range of
volume setting icon 550 is divided into the display range of
acceptable audio input and otherwise has been described. Such
division, however, is not limited to division relating to volume
setting, and for example, the reproduction time bar described in
connection with FIG. 65 can also be divided into a display range of
acceptable input and otherwise. For example, an already-reproduced
position is defined as inside of the display range of acceptable
input, and a position where reproduction has not yet been carried
out is defined as outside of the display range of acceptable input
so that only a continuous operation of moving slider 519 is
allowed. As a result of such processing, start of reproduction in
response to touching with the touch pen from a position where
reproduction has not yet been carried out is prevented and having
the user feel uncomfortable can be suppressed.
[0950] <Speed and Key Adjustment Processing>
[0951] FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a function to change a
reproduction speed or a key by selecting speed and key adjustment
icon 541.
[0952] Referring to FIG. 78, a speed and key adjustment screen
displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12 by pressing speed and key
adjustment icon 541 is shown here.
[0953] Here, the user uses the touch pen etc. to select and move a
slider 553, so that adjustment to a reproduction speed and a key
corresponding to a moved position can be made. Specifically, by
moving the slider toward the right from a current position of
slider 553, the reproduction speed can be made faster. In contrast,
by moving the slider toward the left, the reproduction speed can be
made slower. In addition, by moving slider 553 upward from the
current position of slider 553, the key can be made higher. In
contrast, by moving slider 553 downward, the key can be
lowered.
[0954] By performing this function, the reproduced and output audio
signal can be varied as the user desires.
[0955] <Tone Adjustment Processing>
[0956] FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a function for change to
another tone by modulating a frequency of a reproduction signal or
performing filtering processing or the like based on selection of
tone adjustment icon 542.
[0957] Referring to FIG. 79, a tone adjustment icon selection
screen displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12 by pressing tone
adjustment icon 542 is shown here.
[0958] Four tone adjustment selection icons are provided here.
Specifically, a "radio" icon 542a for adjusting sound to such a
tone as heard on a radio by modulating a frequency, a "karaoke"
icon 542b suppressing vocals based on subtraction of left and right
sound from a stereophonic sound source, an "echo" icon 542c for
making sound echo through filtering processing, and an "electronic
sound" icon 542d for varying sound to an electronic tone by
modulating a frequency are provided. When the user selects any of
these four tone adjustment selection icons by using the touch pen
etc., the function of the selected icon is performed.
[0959] Though a case where four tone adjustment selection icons are
provided and sound can be adjusted to four types of tones has been
described here, any number of icons may be provided, without
particularly limited to four. By providing a plurality of tone
adjustment selection patterns, adjustment to a tone as desired by
the user can be made.
[0960] Here, regarding the function of "karaoke" icon 542b, a case
of suppression of vocals based on subtraction of left and right
sound from the stereophonic sound source is described. This
processing is performed generally because vocal sound or the like
is localized in the center of a sound field of the stereophonic
sound source and ambient sound or the like is localized on the left
and right except for the center. Vocals can also be suppressed with
other methods without particularly limited to this method.
[0961] <Sound Effect Selection Processing>
[0962] FIG. 80 is a diagram illustrating a case where sound effect
output from a speaker or the like is changed in response to a
user's operation of R button 14J and L button 14I for selecting
sound effect selection icon 532, 534. In the present embodiment, by
operating R button 14J and L button 14I, sound effect can
additionally be produced for fun during reproduction of music based
on a music file.
[0963] Referring to FIG. 80, the sound effect can be changed by
selecting sound effect selection icon 532, 534 shown in FIG. 65.
Specifically, in an initial state, a "no sound effect" state is set
(step SD120). Thereafter, sound effect selection icon 532 is
selected once, to set the sound effect of "drum" (step SD121).
Thereafter, by selecting sound effect selection icon 532, the sound
effect of "cymbal" is set (step SD122). Thereafter, by selecting
sound effect selection icon 532, the sound effect of "trumpet" is
set (step SD123). By selecting sound effect icon 532 again, the "no
sound effect" state is set (step SD120). Namely, switching between
the sound effects output from the speaker or the like can be made
in accordance with the number of times of selection of the sound
effect selection icon. In the present example, by selecting sound
effect selection icons 532, 534 with R button 14J and L button 14I
respectively, sound effect in accordance with the button operation
can be set.
[0964] Here, a case where switching in the order of "no sound
effect", "drum", "cymbal", and "trumpet" is made is described,
however, the order is not particularly limited as such and any
order can be set. In addition, such setting as switching to a
plurality of sound effects can also naturally be made. Moreover,
such setting that types of sound effects are different between R
button 14J and L button 14I respectively can also be made.
[0965] <Visualizer Display Processing>
[0966] FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating visualizer display
processing according to the present embodiment.
[0967] When CPU 31 determines in step SD100 in FIG. 74 that the
coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within a
range of visualizer switching icon 531, CPU 31 performs the
visualizer display processing.
[0968] FIG. 81(a) shows the reproduction operation selection screen
on lower LCD 12. As the screen is the same as described in
connection with FIG. 65, detailed description thereof will not be
repeated.
[0969] FIG. 81(b) shows the visualizer display screen on upper LCD
22.
[0970] FIG. 82 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of the visualizer display processing.
[0971] Referring to FIG. 82, initially, an audio output level is
sensed (step SD130). Specifically, output level sensing circuit 42d
senses the output level of the audio signal output from audio
output control circuit 42c to amplifiers 44, 46 and outputs the
result to CPU 31.
[0972] Thereafter, CPU 31 generates an object in accordance with
the output level sensed by output level sensing circuit 42d (step
SD131).
[0973] Thereafter, scroll display of the object is provided (step
SD132). The process again returns to step SD130 and the processing
above is repeated.
[0974] Specifically, in FIG. 81(b), as the output level of the
audio signal being reproduced is successively sensed, new objects
are successively generated at positions in accordance with the
output level, and scroll display of these objects is provided. In
the present embodiment, an object 801 (specifically, a ground
object) is sequentially generated at a height in accordance with
the output level at the right end of a visualizer display area and
scroll display of the entire picture toward the left is provided.
In addition, on the ground object thus generated, another object
(in the present example, objects 802 and 803, for example) in
automatically controlled operation is provided (that is, moves
horizontally along the ground on the screen or jumps).
[0975] In the present example, the height of the ground object is
determined by the total output level of the audio signal being
reproduced from right and left speakers 45 and 47, or alternatively
the controlled operation of a first object (in the present
embodiment, object 802 in a motorcycle form) (speed, acceleration,
height of jump, etc.) is determined by the output level of right
speaker 45 and the controlled operation of a second object (in the
present embodiment, object 803 in a motorcycle form) is determined
by the output level of left speaker 47.
[0976] Without limited to the above, in yet another example, the
height of the ground object for the first object (in the present
embodiment, object 802) or the controlled operation (speed,
acceleration, height of jump, etc.) of the first object may be
determined by the output level of a signal for right speaker 45 of
the audio signal, and the height of the ground object for the
second object (in the present embodiment, object 803) or the
controlled operation of the second object may be determined by the
output level of a signal for left speaker 47 of the audio
signal.
[0977] The user can visually recognize variation of the output
level based on the height of a geographic feature in accordance
with the output level of the audio signal. In addition, as two
objects 802 and 803 in a motorcycle form jump in accordance with
the height of the geographic feature, the user can visually
recognize variation of the output level of the audio signal also
based on variation of objects 802 and 803.
[0978] In addition, relative positional relation between two
objects 802 and 803 in a motorcycle form may be varied, depending
on a difference in the volume level between the audio signal output
from right speaker 45 and the audio signal output from left speaker
47.
[0979] If the processing for reproducing the selected music file
pauses, there is no variation of the geographic feature in
accordance with the output level above and hence scroll display of
a flat geographic feature object is provided. Here, for example,
when the user operates L button 14I and R button 14J described
above, the sound effect is output from the speaker or the like.
Therefore, the output level of the audio signal of the sound effect
is sensed, the geographic object in accordance with the output
level of the audio signal is generated, and scroll display thereof
is provided. The visualizer display screen hereinafter is also
processed in accordance with a similar scheme.
[0980] FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating another visualizer display
screen.
[0981] Referring to FIGS. 83 (a) and (b), a visualizer for
generation and scroll display on upper LCD 22 of an object 301a in
a snowball shape having a size in accordance with the sensed output
level of the audio signal is shown here. Scroll display of a
geographic feature showing a slope is provided behind object 301a
in a snowball shape and such scroll display as object 301a in a
snowball shape rolling down the slope is provided.
[0982] Comparing FIG. 83(a) with FIG. 83(b), a case that object
301a in a snowball shape in FIG. 83(a) is greater than object 301a
in a snowball shape in FIG. 83(b) in accordance with the sensed
output level of the audio signal is shown here.
[0983] As a size of object 301a in a snowball shape varies, the
user can visually recognize variation of the output level of the
audio signal in accordance with the size of object 301a in a
snowball shape.
[0984] In addition, as object 301a in a snowball shape bounds at
prescribed timing during scroll display of the geographic feature
showing the slope, the size of object 301a in a snowball shape can
further visually be recognized.
[0985] FIG. 84 is a diagram illustrating yet another visualizer
display screen.
[0986] Referring to FIG. 84, a visualizer for generation and scroll
display on upper LCD 22 of an object 301# in a prescribed character
shape at a height in accordance with the sensed output level of the
audio signal is shown here. In addition, setting is made such that
scroll display of a background region of the screen from a right
end of the screen to a left end of the screen is provided, and
objects 606 in a coin shape are continuously arranged at prescribed
intervals from the position of object 301# in a prescribed
character shape and scroll display thereof from the right end of
the screen to the left end of the screen is provided.
[0987] In addition, setting is made such that an object 605 in
another prescribed character shape is displayed, and for example,
the object can jump in the screen in response to a user's
operation. Moreover, setting is made such that, when object 605 in
a prescribed character shape is superimposed on object 606 in a
coin shape, object 605 in a coin shape disappears and the number of
times of superposition on object 605 in a coin shape is displayed
in the upper left field of the screen.
[0988] Therefore, the user can visually recognize variation of the
output level of the audio signal based on variation of the height
of object 301#. In addition, as objects 606 in a coin shape are
also continuously arranged in accordance with the height of object
301#, the user can visually recognize variation of the output level
of the audio signal also based on the height of object 606 in a
coin shape.
[0989] Namely, a display position of a third object (in the present
embodiment, object 806 in a coin shape) is determined by the output
level of the audio signal. Specifically, the third object is
displayed at the height in accordance with the output level, at an
end portion of a display area of a virtual space and thereafter
scroll display of the third object in a direction toward an
opposite end portion is provided. Then, in response to the user's
operation, movement of a fourth object (in the present embodiment,
object 805 in a prescribed character shape) is controlled.
Prescribed game processing is then performed in accordance with
positional relation between the third object and the fourth object.
Thus, the output level can be checked during reproduction of music
and the user can have fun based on his/her operation.
[0990] Further, as the user can operate object 605 in a prescribed
character shape by providing an operation input. As object 606 in a
coin shape disappears when object 605 is superimposed on object 606
in a coin shape, the user can recognize variation of the output
level of the audio signal also based on his/her own operation input
(pressing of a button).
[0991] In the present example, visualizer display processing in
three patterns has been described, however, the pattern is not
limited to three. A single pattern may be provided, or a function
of visualizer display processing in a further greater number of
patterns may also be provided.
[0992] For example, such setting that switching among three
patterns of visualizer display processing is successively made in
accordance with the number of times of touch with the touch pen of
a position within a display range of visualizer switching icon 531
on the reproduction operation selection screen on lower LCD 12
shown in FIG. 81(a) can be made. For example, setting can be such
that, by touching the position within the display range of
visualizer switching icon 531 with the touch pen four times, the
visualizer display processing ends and the screen in FIG. 65(b) is
shown.
[0993] As described previously, in the present embodiment, the user
can have fun by additionally producing the sound effect by
performing the prescribed operation during reproduction of music
based on the music files. In detection of the output level of the
audio signal described above, not only the output of reproduction
of music based on the music files but also the output of sound
effect based on the user's operation are considered. Namely, the
total output level of both of the audio signal based on the music
files and the audio signal of the sound effect based on the user's
operation is sensed as the output level of the audio signal
described above. Thus, display contents on the visualizer are
indirectly varied in response to the user's operation, and more
specifically, a display position or an operation content of the
object is varied.
[0994] <Headphone Output Processing>
[0995] FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating a flow in a case where the
headphone is sensed according to the present embodiment. It is
noted that headphone output processing is performed independently
of other processing while the sound function is being
performed.
[0996] Referring to FIG. 85, initially, whether the headphone is
sensed or not is determined (step SD140). Specifically, OF circuit
42 senses insertion of the plug of the headphone into the jack by
sensing turn-on of a mechanical switch, for example, resulting from
insertion of the plug of the headphone into jack 62 described in
connection with FIG. 2 or an electrically conducting state
resulting from insertion of the plug of the headphone into jack 62.
Thereafter, OF circuit 42 outputs the result of sensing to CPU 31,
and CPU 31 determines attachment of the headphone upon receiving a
signal indicating the result of sensing from OF circuit 42.
[0997] When the headphone is sensed, CPU 31 then performs equalizer
adjustment processing (step SD141).
[0998] The process then ends (end).
[0999] Comparing a case where the user wears the headphone to
listen to the reproduced audio signal with a case where the user
listens to the reproduced audio signal output from the speaker,
wearing the headphone means covering of earholes. Accordingly,
acoustic characteristics are significantly different from a case
not wearing the headphone and hence the user may feel
discomfort.
[1000] Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the headphone is
sensed, equalization adjustment processing for adjusting a
prescribed frequency band of audio data is performed so as not to
produce an audio signal disagreeable to the user due to variation
of acoustic characteristics.
[1001] Thus, even when the user listens to music data through the
headphone, the audio signal agreeable to the user can be output. In
addition, the volume of sound effect output in response to the
user's operation of L button 14I and R button 14J can also be
adjusted, or a type of sound effect described in connection with
FIG. 80 can also be varied in accordance with sensing of the
headphone.
[1002] Here, though a case where the equalization adjustment
processing for adjusting a prescribed frequency band when the
headphone is sensed is performed has been described, the processing
is not particularly limited as such. When the headphone is sensed,
the audio signal itself to be reproduced may be made different from
the audio signal for reproduction from the speaker. For example,
sound of high key that gives no uncomfortable feeling in
reproduction from the speaker but sounds too high in listening
through the headphone may be replaced with different sound of lower
key, or sound accompanying noise in listening through the headphone
may be replaced with different sound.
[1003] Alternatively, when the headphone is sensed, instead of
changing the audio signal itself to be reproduced, the volume of
the audio signal to be reproduced may be made different from the
volume thereof in reproduction from the speaker. For example, an
audio signal reproduced in balance without giving uncomfortable
feeling in reproduction from the speaker but reproduced in poor
volume balance in listening through the headphone may be adjusted
by increasing or decreasing the volume thereof to attain
balance.
[1004] <Sleep Processing>
[1005] FIG. 86 is a flowchart illustrating sleep processing in a
case where game device 10 is folded to a folded position.
[1006] Referring to FIG. 86, CPU 31 determines whether a folded
position has been detected or not (step SD150). Specifically,
whether a determination signal indicating the closed state has been
input from folded position detection sensor 50 or not is
determined. When it is determined that the determination signal
indicating the closed state has been input from folded position
detection sensor 50, that is, when the folded position is detected,
CPU 31 then determines whether the music reproduction operation is
being performed or not (step SD151). Specifically, CPU 31
determines whether or not the "start" icon is selected and the
processing for reproducing the selected music file is being
performed as described above.
[1007] Receiving the input of the determination signal indicating
the closed state output from folded position detection sensor 50,
for example, if game device 10 is operating, CPU 31 stops the
operation and sets what is called a sleep state in which data of
that state of operation is stored. On the other hand, receiving
input of the determination signal indicating the opened state
output from folded position detection sensor 50 after game device
10 enters the sleep state, CPU 31 performs processing for
recovering from the sleep state to the original state based on the
stored data of the state of operation.
[1008] When CPU 31 determines in step SD151 that the music
reproduction operation is not being performed, CPU 31 performs
sleep processing (step SD154). Namely, when other function is
operated, the operation is stopped and the data of that state of
operation is stored. Thus, when music is being reproduced through
the speaker, music reproduction is stopped by folding game device
10 from the unfolded state to the folded state.
[1009] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 151
that the music reproduction operation is being performed, CPU 31
then determines whether the headphone is sensed or not (step
SD152). Specifically, CPU 31 determines whether a signal indicating
a result of sensing involved with attachment of the headphone from
I/F circuit 42 has been received or not as described above. On the
other hand, as will be described later, when music is being
reproduced through the headphone, reproduction of music is
continued also after game device 10 is folded from the unfolded
state to the folded state.
[1010] When CPU 31 determines in step SD152 that the headphone is
not sensed, CPU 31 performs sleep processing (step SD154). Namely,
when the music reproduction operation is being performed but the
headphone is not sensed, CPU 31 stops the operation as in the case
of other active functions and has the data of the state of
operation stored.
[1011] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 152
that the headphone is sensed, transition to a sleep music
reproduction mode is made (step SD153).
[1012] FIG. 87 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
in the sleep music reproduction mode.
[1013] Referring to FIG. 87, CPU 31 continues only the music
reproduction function and performs the sleep processing for other
functions (step SD160). For example, display processing or the like
is set to the sleep state.
[1014] Thereafter, CPU 31 determines whether a continuous
reproduction operation has been set or not (step SD161).
Specifically, it is determined whether the reproduction mode is set
to the reproduction mode in which data being reproduced is
repeatedly reproduced, to the reproduction mode in which data is
sequentially reproduced and reproduction is repeated from the
beginning when reproduction is completed, or to the reproduction
mode in which only a set section is repeatedly reproduced, or
whether or not the "random" folder is selected and executed.
[1015] When CPU 31 determines in step SD161 that the continuous
reproduction operation has been set, CPU 31 continues the music
reproduction operation (step SD 162).
[1016] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 161
that the continuous reproduction operation has not been set, the
reproduction operation ends with the current music file (step
SD163). Then, the sleep processing described above is performed
(step SD164).
[1017] According to this method, when the user folds game device 10
and does not operate game device 10, the sleep processing is
performed except for a case where the music reproduction operation
is being performed. Therefore, this processing allows extension of
a service life of a power supply of game device 10. In addition,
when the user folds game device 10 during performance of the music
reproduction function and when the headphone is sensed and the
continuous reproduction operation is set, the music reproduction
operation is continued.
[1018] In general, it is highly likely that the user carries game
device 10 in the folded state in a bag or in a pocket or the like
of clothing. Therefore, as it is less likely that the user operates
game device 10 in such a folded state, the sleep processing is
normally performed.
[1019] On the other hand, it would be convenient for the user if
the function of the music reproduction operation can be performed
while carrying game device 10 in the folded state although not
operating game device 10.
[1020] Therefore, in spite of game device 10 being in the folded
state, if the music reproduction operation is being performed, the
headphone is sensed and the continuous reproduction operation is
set, the music reproduction operation is continued, to thereby
contribute to convenience of the user. In addition, when the
continuous reproduction operation is not set, it can be determined
that the user does not desire to continue the music reproduction
operation. Therefore, after the reproduction operation of the
current music file ends, normal sleep processing is performed, to
thereby contribute to convenience of the user. In particular, as
the normal sleep processing is performed after the reproduction
operation of the current music file ends, the reproduction
operation can end without giving uncomfortable feeling to the user
who enjoys the music reproduction operation.
[1021] <Automatic Recording and Reproduction Processing>
[1022] In the automatic recording and reproduction processing,
processing of two functions of an automatic recording mode and an
automatic reproduction mode is performed independently of each
other. As described in step SD2 in FIG. 66, the automatic recording
and reproduction processing is started after sound selection screen
400 is displayed.
[1023] FIG. 88 is a flowchart illustrating the automatic recording
mode according to the present embodiment.
[1024] Referring to FIG. 88, whether the volume of input from
microphone 43 is equal to or greater than a threshold value is
determined (step SD170). Specifically, audio input control circuit
42b senses whether the volume of input from microphone 43 is equal
to or greater than the threshold value. When the sensed volume of
input from microphone 43 is equal to or greater than the threshold
value, audio input control circuit 42b outputs the result of
sensing to CPU 31.
[1025] When CPU 31 determines in step SD 170 that the volume of
input from microphone 43 is equal to or greater than the threshold
value, CPU 31 performs the recording processing (step SD171).
Specifically, CPU 31 performs the recording processing, upon
receiving the input of the result of sensing from audio input
control circuit 42b that the volume of input from microphone 43 is
equal to or greater than the threshold value.
[1026] FIG. 89 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of the recording processing according to the present
embodiment.
[1027] Referring to FIG. 89, initially, CPU 31 determines whether
audio input is present or not (step SD180). When CPU 31 determines
that audio input is present, CPU 31 temporarily has the recording
data input from audio input control circuit 42b stored (step
SD181). Specifically, CPU 31 causes the main memory to temporarily
store the recording data.
[1028] Thereafter, CPU 31 determines whether a capacity of the
recording data has reached a capacity limit of a slot or not (step
SD182). Here, the slot refers to a recording data storage area in
memory 34 for storage, in which the recording data is stored as a
recording data file. In the present example, it is assumed that a
plurality of slots used for recording processing are provided in
advance in memory 34 for storage. In the present example, for
example, it is assumed that recording data of 10 seconds can be
stored in one slot.
[1029] When CPU 31 determines in step SD 182 that the capacity of
the recording data has not reached the capacity limit of the slot,
the processing in step SD 180 and step SD181 is repeated and the
recording data is temporarily stored.
[1030] When CPU 31 determines in step SD 182 that the capacity of
the recording data has reached the capacity limit of the slot, the
process proceeds to step SD 184 and the recording ends. Then,
referring back to FIG. 88, the process proceeds to step SD172.
[1031] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 180
that audio input is not present, the process then proceeds to step
SD183.
[1032] In step SD183, CPU 31 determines whether or not audio input
is absent for a prescribed period. For example, the prescribed
period for determining absence of sound can be set to three
seconds. This period is merely by way of example, and an
appropriate period may be set.
[1033] When CPU 31 determines in step SD183 that audio input is
absent for the prescribed period, recording ends (step SD184).
Then, referring back to FIG. 88, the process proceeds to step
SD172.
[1034] On the other hand, when it is not determined in step SD 183
that audio input is absent for the prescribed period, that is, when
the audio input is made again, the process again returns to step
SD180 and proceeds to step SD181.
[1035] According to this recording processing, when audio input is
present, the recording data is automatically stored until the
capacity limit of the slot is reached, and when there is no longer
audio input, the recording processing automatically ends.
[1036] Through a series of processing as above (SD180 to SD183),
voice and sound is automatically recorded while sound selection
screen 400 is displayed. Speech of the user while sound selection
screen 400 is displayed (including unconscious utterance) is
automatically recorded in the slot as the recording data so long as
the capacity of the slot is available.
[1037] Referring again to FIG. 88, thereafter, CPU 31 determines
whether the capacity of the recording data is equal to or greater
than a prescribed capacity or not (step SD 172). Specifically, CPU
31 determines whether the capacity of the recording data
temporarily stored in the main memory is equal to or greater than
the prescribed capacity or not. For example, the prescribed
capacity can be set to a capacity not less than a minimum period of
time that can be recognized by the user as the audio signal in
reproduction. In other words, a capacity less than the prescribed
capacity means a capacity to such an extent that the recording data
cannot be recognized as the audio signal when the user reproduces
the recording data.
[1038] When CPU 31 determines in step SD 172 that the recording
data of the prescribed capacity or greater is stored in the main
memory, CPU 31 performs the processing for storing the recording
data (step SD173). On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in
step SD172 that the recording data of the prescribed capacity or
greater is not stored, the temporarily stored recording data is
erased (step SD174), because an amount of stored data is too small
as the recording data and such data is not recognizable. Here, the
prescribed capacity is assumed as being smaller than the capacity
limit of the slot. Therefore, the recording data of such a length
that the user cannot recognize as the audio signal is automatically
erased.
[1039] FIG. 90 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of the processing for storing the recording data.
[1040] Referring to FIG. 90, initially, CPU 31 checks an empty slot
(step SD190). Specifically, CPU 31 checks whether there is a slot
not including the recording data, among a plurality of slots
provided in advance in memory 34 for storage and serving as a
plurality of recording data storage areas.
[1041] Then, CPU 31 determines whether there is an empty slot or
not (step SD191).
[1042] When CPU 31 determines in step SD 191 that there is an empty
slot, the processing for storing the recording data in the empty
slot as the recording data file is performed (step SD192).
Specifically, CPU 31 causes memory 34 for storage to store the
temporarily stored recording data as the recording data file
through memory control circuit 33. Then, the process returns to the
flow in FIG. 88 (return).
[1043] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 191
that there is no empty slot, one slot is determined from among the
plurality of slots through processing using a random number, and
processing for overwriting the slot determined by using a random
number with the recording data as the recording data file (step
SD193). Then, the process returns to the flow in FIG. 30
(return).
[1044] As a result of this processing, one recording data file is
stored in the slot.
[1045] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD 191
that the capacity of the recording data is not lower than a
capacity limit, erasing processing for erasing an old recording
data file is performed (step SD193). Then, the process again
returns to step SD191, where it is determined whether the capacity
of the recording data is lower than the capacity limit or not. The
processing in step SD193 is repeated until it is determined that
the capacity of the recording data is lower than the capacity
limit. When the capacity of the recording data is lower than the
capacity limit, processing for storage as the recording data file
described above is performed. Therefore, the old recording data
file is automatically updated to a new recording data file.
[1046] The automatic reproduction mode will now be described.
[1047] FIG. 91 is a flowchart of the automatic reproduction mode
according to the present embodiment.
[1048] Referring to FIG. 91, CPU 31 determines whether there is a
slot in which a recording data file is stored or not (step SD200).
Specifically, CPU 31 determines whether or not the recording data
files are present in a plurality of slots provided in advance in
memory 34 for storage through memory control circuit 33.
[1049] When there is no recording data file in a slot in step
SD200, CPU 31 repeats the processing in step SD200.
[1050] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD200 that
there is a recording data file in a slot, CPU 31 performs the
processing for reproducing the recording data file (step SD201).
Thereafter, CPU 31 performs stand-by processing (step SD202).
Specifically, CPU 31 is in a stand-by state for a prescribed period
of time and the process again returns to step SD200. The stand-by
processing may be processing of being in a stand-by state for a
certain prescribed period of time or for a random period of
time.
[1051] Therefore, when there is a recording data file in a slot,
CPU 31 repeats execution of the reproduction processing for a
certain period of time or for a random period of time.
[1052] In addition, when it is determined that the recording data
files are present in the plurality of slots in memory 34 for
storage respectively, the processing for reproducing the recording
data file stored in each slot is sequentially performed. In
addition, during the reproduction processing, object 410 in a bird
shape in FIG. 61 can be displayed in an animated manner. As a
result of such display processing, the user can visually recognize
execution of the reproduction processing based on the operation of
object 410 in a bird shape.
[1053] As a result of this processing, when the user speaks loud
enough for the volume of input from the microphone to exceed the
threshold value while the sound selection screen in FIG. 61 is
displayed, the audio signal representing the speech is stored in
the slot as the recording data file based on the automatic
recording mode. Based on the automatic reproduction mode, the audio
signal stored in the slot as the recording data file is then
automatically reproduced and the reproduction processing is
repeated.
[1054] This function allows the user to create his/her own audio
signal as the recording data file and to enjoy reproduction
thereof.
[1055] The method of performing the recording processing or the
recording and storing processing based on determination as to
whether the capacity of the recording data has reached a prescribed
capacity or not has been described above, however, such
determination can be made, for example, based on a recording period
of time without limited to the capacity, or such determination may
be made based on another parameter.
[1056] <Setting Processing>
[1057] FIG. 92 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
of the setting processing according to the present embodiment.
[1058] Referring to FIG. 92, when CPU 31 determines that the
coordinate value indicated by the touch position is within the
display range of "setting" icon 408 in FIG. 61, CPU 31 has the
setting screen displayed (step SD210).
[1059] FIG. 93 is a diagram illustrating a setting screen 508
according to the present embodiment.
[1060] Referring to FIG. 93, here, a "headphone" setting item 560,
a "touch sound" setting item 562, and a "backlight" setting item
564 are provided. In addition, as "headphone" setting item 560, a
selection function icon 561 for selecting and setting
"stereophonic" or "monaural" is provided. Moreover, as "touch
sound" setting item 562, a selection function icon 563 for
selecting and setting "sound on" or "sound off" is provided.
Further, as "backlight" setting item 564, a selection function icon
565 for selecting and setting "always on" or "automatically turned
off" is provided. In addition, a "saved data initialization" icon
566 is provided, and by selecting this "saved data initialization"
icon 566, the content in the recording data file in the automatic
recording and reproduction processing, the content in the recording
data file created in the microphone recording and reproduction mode
which will be described later, or the music file content registered
in "favorite" is erased. In addition, by selecting a "back" icon
512b, the screen returns to immediately preceding sound selection
screen 400.
[1061] Referring again to FIG. 92, CPU 31 determines whether the
touch position data has been input from touch panel 13 or not (step
SD211).
[1062] When CPU 31 determines in step SD211 that the touch position
data has been input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 determines whether
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within
the display range of the function selection icon of "headphone" or
not (step SD212).
[1063] When CPU 31 determines in step SD212 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of the function selection icon of "headphone", CPU 31
determines whether the current setting is "stereophonic" or not
(step SD213).
[1064] When the current setting is "stereophonic" in step SD213,
CPU 31 makes switching to monaural setting (step SD214).
[1065] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD213 that
the current setting is not "stereophonic", CPU 31 makes switching
to stereophonic setting (step SD215).
[1066] In the "stereophonic" setting, while the headphone is
connected, stereophonic audio output is provided. Namely, output
for the right and output for the left are separately provided. On
the other hand, in the "monaural" setting, while the headphone is
connected, monaural audio output is provided, but while the
headphone is not connected, stereophonic audio output is provided,
regardless of this setting.
[1067] When CPU 31 determines in step SD212 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of the function selection icon of "headphone", CPU 31
then determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the display range of the function selection
icon of "touch sound" or not (step SD216).
[1068] When CPU 31 determines in step SD216 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of the function selection icon of "touch sound", CPU 31
determines whether the current setting is "sound on" or not (step
SD217).
[1069] When CPU 31 determines in step SD217 that the current
setting is "sound on", CPU 31 makes switching to touch sound off
setting (step SD218).
[1070] The process again returns to step SD211.
[1071] When CPU 31 determines in step SD217 that the current
setting is not "sound on", CPU 31 makes switching to touch sound on
setting (step SD219).
[1072] When CPU 31 determines in step SD216 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of the function selection icon of "touch sound", CPU
31 then determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the
touch position data is within the display range of the function
selection icon of the "backlight function" or not (step SD220).
[1073] When CPU 31 determines in step SD220 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of the function selection icon of "backlight", CPU 31
determines whether the current setting is "always on" or not (step
SD221).
[1074] When CPU 31 determines in step SD221 that the current
setting is "always on", CPU 31 makes switching to automatic off
setting (step SD222). As a result of switching to the automatic off
setting, when it is determined that game device 10 is not operated
for a certain period of time, the processing for automatically
turning off the backlight is performed.
[1075] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD221 that
the current setting is not "always on", CPU 31 makes switching to
always on setting (step SD223). Then, the process returns to step
SD211.
[1076] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD220 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the display range of the function selection icon of
"backlight", CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate value
indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of
the function selection icon of "saved data initialization" or not
(step SD224).
[1077] When CPU 31 determines in step SD224 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of the function selection icon of "saved data
initialization", CPU 31 performs processing for erasing the
recording data file and the contents registered in "favorite" (step
SD225). Namely, the processing or the like for erasing the
recording data file stored in data memory 34 for storage is
performed.
[1078] When CPU 31 determines in step SD224 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of the function selection icon of "saved data
initialization," CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate value
indicated by the touch position data is within the display range of
the function selection icon of "back" or not.
[1079] When CPU 31 determines in step SD226 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of the function selection icon of "back", the screen returns
to immediately preceding sound selection screen 400.
[1080] As a result of this setting processing, for example with
regard to the reproduction processing when the headphone for one
ear is attached, the stereophonic setting can be switched to the
monaural setting as desired by the user. As a result of such
switching setting, appropriate reproduction processing can be
selected in accordance with the type of the headphone. Naturally,
in the case of the headphone for both ears, switching to the
monaural setting can also be made.
[1081] <Microphone Recording and Reproduction Mode>
[1082] The microphone recording and reproduction mode will now be
described.
[1083] FIG. 94 is a flowchart illustrating sub routine processing
in the microphone recording and reproduction mode.
[1084] Referring to FIG. 94, when transition to the microphone
recording and reproduction mode is made, initially, CPU 31 has a
recording data file list selection screen for play with sound
recorded through the microphone displayed (step SD230).
[1085] FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating a recording data file list
selection screen 600 according to the present embodiment.
[1086] Referring to FIG. 95, a case where recording data file list
selection screen 600 is displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12 is
shown.
[1087] The user can select any recording data file from a recording
data file list by touching the screen on lower LCD 12 with touch
pen 27 etc. As will be described later, it is assumed that the
recording data file is set to a display color selectively
designated by the user. Here, each recording data file in the
recording data file list corresponds to each one of the plurality
of slots provided in advance in memory 34 for storage for use in
the recording processing.
[1088] For example, it is assumed that a cursor 590 selects a
recording data file displayed at the top left in a recording data
file list 610 on recording data file list selection screen 600. For
example, by touching a recording data file included in recording
data file list 610 with touch pen 27 etc., cursor 590 moves to the
touched recording data file and the recording data file designated
with cursor 590 is in a selected state.
[1089] In addition, it is assumed that, by touching any recording
data file on the screen and moving this recording data file to a
position of any other recording data file while maintaining the
touched state, that is, maintaining the selected state of the
recording data file designated with cursor 590 (performing slide
operation), positions of these recording data files are
interchanged.
[1090] Here, for example, a recording data file 615 is assumed as a
file storing no recording data, which is also applicable to other
files. On the other hand, recording data files other than
aforementioned are assumed as files storing recording data. In the
present example, for example, it is assumed that one file can
record an audio signal for approximately 10 seconds.
[1091] In addition, the user can set the volume at which output is
provided from the speaker or the like by designating volume setting
icon 550 with touch pen 27 etc. Since this processing is as
described above, detailed description thereof will not be
repeated.
[1092] Moreover, the user can return to sound selection screen 400
which is the preceding screen, by selecting a "back" icon 620.
[1093] Further, by selecting a recording data file in recording
data file list selection screen 600 and selecting a "play" icon
570, the reproduction processing is started and a recording data
reproduction operation selection screen 301 is displayed.
[1094] On the other hand, it is assumed that, if a file in which no
recording data is stored is selected from recording data file list
selection screen 600, "play" icon 570 is changed to a "record" icon
570#. Then, by selecting this "record" icon 570#, a recording start
screen 602 which will be described later is displayed.
[1095] In addition, by selecting an "erase" icon 571 with touch pen
27 etc., the currently selected recording data file can be erased
and a file in which no recording data is stored can be set.
[1096] In addition, regarding a manner of display of the recording
data file, a data amount of the recording data included in each
file relative to the total capacity is displayed as a water level.
Based on such a manner of display, the user can sensuously
recognize the amount of data of the recording data file. In
addition, in recording data file list 610, a recording data file
different in shape is shown. For example, when a modification and
edition function by using tone adjustment icon 542 or the like
which will be described later is performed and "overwrite" is
selected, that is, when change to different recording data is made,
display processing is performed such that the shape of the
recording data file is changed in accordance with modification and
edition.
[1097] As a result of this manner of display, the user can
intuitively recognize that a recording data file is a modified and
edited file, which contributes to convenience of the user.
[1098] FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating recording data
reproduction operation selection screen 601 according to the
embodiment of the present invention.
[1099] FIG. 96(a) shows a case that recording data reproduction
operation selection screen 601 is displayed on lower LCD 12.
[1100] Specifically, the user can perform the function of the
operation with music being modified, in the reproduction operation
or the like of the recording data based on selection with the touch
pen etc.
[1101] Here, a case where speed and key adjustment icon 541, tone
adjustment icon 542, reproduction mode switching icon 517, and an
"overwrite" icon 586 are provided as the selection function icon is
shown.
[1102] The user can perform the function to change the reproduction
speed or the key by selecting speed and key adjustment icon 541
described above.
[1103] In addition, the user can perform the function for
modification and edition to another tone by modulating a frequency
of the reproduction signal or by performing filtering processing or
the like based on selection of tone adjustment icon 542.
Specifically, the tone adjustment icon described in connection with
FIG. 79 may be provided or another tone adjustment icon may be
provided.
[1104] In addition, the user can cause the recording data file
being reproduced to pause, by pressing a pause command icon 580
serving as the reproduction operation command icon. Here, display
of pause command icon 580 is changed to display of a play command
icon 582#. Moreover, a reverse play command icon 580 is also
provided as the reproduction operation command icon. When reverse
play command icon 580 is selected, reverse reproduction processing
is performed. Here, display of reverse play command icon 580 is
changed to display of a pause command icon 580#. Two icons of the
play command and the reverse play command are displayed as such
command icons, and the selected icon is switched to the pause
command icon. Therefore, the user can switch between the
reproduction operation and the reverse reproduction operation with
one action by using touch pen 27 etc.
[1105] Specifically, in a reproduction interface for music data
(here, music data will be described by way of example, however, a
video data may be applicable), two command icon areas are provided
(a first command icon area and a second command icon area), any of
the reverse play command icon and the pause command icon is
displayed in a switched manner in the first command icon area, and
any of the play command icon and the pause command icon is
displayed in a switched manner in the second command icon area.
[1106] More specifically, the manner of display is as follows.
[1107] In stop state: The reverse play command icon is displayed in
the first command icon area and the play command icon is displayed
in the second command icon area.
[1108] In play state: The reverse play command icon is displayed in
the first command icon area and the pause command icon is displayed
in the second command icon area.
[1109] In reverse play state: The pause command icon is displayed
in the first command icon area and the play command icon is
displayed in the second command icon area.
[1110] Play command icon: When touched, forward play of audio data
is started.
[1111] Reverse play command icon: When touched, reverse play of
audio data is started.
[1112] Pause command icon: When touched, reproduction of audio data
is caused to pause.
[1113] Though the pause command icon indicating pause has been
described in the present example, a stop command icon indicating
stop instead of pause may be employed.
[1114] Thus, transition to any of play, reverse play and stop can
be made by using two command icon areas in any state of stop, play
and reverse play.
[1115] Speaking more generally, in an information processing device
that can take three states (a first state, a second state, and a
third state), two button areas are provided, and when the
information processing device is currently in the first state, a
button for transition to the second state and a button for
transition to the third state are displayed (i). When the button
for transition from the (i) state to the second state is operated
to make transition to the second state, the button for transition
to the second state is changed to a button for transition to the
first state, and the button for transition to the first state and
the button for transition to the third state are displayed (ii). In
addition, when the button for transition from the (i) state to the
third state is operated to make transition to the third state, the
button for transition to the third state is changed to the button
for transition to the first state, and the button for transition to
the second state and the button for transition to the first state
are displayed (iii). Moreover, when the button for transition from
the (ii) state to the first state is operated to make transition to
the first state, the state returns to the (i) state. Further, when
the button for transition from the (iii) state to the first state
is operated to make transition to the first state, the state
returns to the (i) state. In addition, when the button for
transition from the (ii) state to the third state is operated to
make transition to the third state, the button for transition to
the first state is changed to the button for transition to the
second state, the button for transition to the third state is
changed to the button for transition to the first state, and the
button for transition to the second state and the button for
transition to the first state are displayed. In addition, when the
button for transition from the (iii) state to the second state is
operated to make transition to the second state, the button for
transition to the second state is changed to the button for
transition to the first state, and the button for transition to the
first state is changed to the button for transition to the third
state.
[1116] Thus, two button areas can be used to efficiently make
transition to any of the three states.
[1117] Further, the user can make switching among the reproduction
modes in the recording data file list by pressing reproduction mode
switching icon 517. Specifically, the reproduction mode in which
data being reproduced is repeatedly reproduced, the reproduction
mode in which data is sequentially reproduced and reproduction is
repeated from the beginning when reproduction is completed, the
reproduction mode in which data is sequentially reproduced and
reproduction is stopped when reproduction is completed, the
reproduction mode in which random reproduction is performed, and
the reproduction mode in which only a set section is repeatedly
reproduced can sequentially be switched and executed.
[1118] In addition, by pressing "overwrite" icon 586, for example,
the user can overwrite for storage, the recording data file with a
recording data file modified and edited through filtering
processing or the like based on selection of a tone adjustment icon
588.
[1119] In addition, FIG. 96(b) shows a case where recording data
file list 610 displayed on the screen of lower LCD 12 in FIG. 95 is
now displayed on the screen of upper LCD 22 as a recording data
file selection list screen 601#. The recording data file displayed
on recording data file list 610# can then be selected by operating
direction input button 14A. Namely, after the recording data file
is selected with the touch pen etc. (by pressing play) on the
screen of lower LCD 12 in FIG. 95, on the screen of lower LCD 12 in
FIG. 96(a), the processing for the reproduction operation of the
recording data file selected with the touch pen etc. is selected on
the recording data reproduction operation selection screen with the
touch pen etc. and on the screen of upper LCD 22, the recording
data file can be selected with direction input button 14A.
[1120] For example, by using direction input button 14A to select
the recording data file and pressing any of operation buttons 14B
to 14E, the recording data file being reproduced is switched to the
selected recording data file and the reproduction operation thereof
can be performed.
[1121] Therefore, the processing in reproduction operation
selection screen 601 on lower LCD 12 and the processing in
recording data file selection list screen 601# on upper LCD 22 can
be performed in parallel, which contributes to convenience of the
user.
[1122] In addition, by pressing "overwrite" icon 586, for example,
the user can overwrite for storage, the recording data file with a
recording data file modified and edited through filtering
processing or the like based on selection of a tone adjustment icon
588.
[1123] Specifically, in an information processing device having two
screens (or two display areas), contact detection means (in the
present embodiment, a touch panel) is provided for at least one
screen (in the present embodiment, lower LCD 12). Then, an icon
group (a first icon group; in the embodiment, a group of icons 615
showing respective recording data files) showing a plurality of
choices is displayed on one screen, and selection of any icon is
permitted through the contact detection means. After any icon is
selected from among the plurality of icons by using the contact
detection means, display of the first icon group is moved to the
other screen (in the present embodiment, upper LCD 22) and another
icon group (a second icon group; in the embodiment, 541 and 542) is
displayed on one screen and selection of any icon from this second
icon group is permitted through the contact detection means. Even
after the first icon group has moved to the other screen, one icon
can be selected from the first icon group by using a key switch
(which is a direction key, and in the embodiment, a cross-shaped
key 14A). Thus, selection from the first icon group and selection
from the second icon group can be made in parallel. For example,
first selection may be made with the use of the first icon group
and selection relating to the icon selected in the first selection
may be made with the use of the second icon group (in the present
embodiment, data to be processed is selected in the first selection
and processing content for the selected data is selected in the
second selection). Here, even after transition to a condition for
the second selection is made after the first selection from the
first icon group, selection from the first icon group can be
changed by operating the key switch and hence the first selection
can be redone in parallel after transition to the condition for the
second selection, which contributes to improved convenience.
[1124] Referring again to FIG. 94, CPU 31 determines whether the
touch position data has been input from touch panel 13 or not (step
SD231).
[1125] When CPU 31 determines in step SD231 that the touch position
data has been input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 then determines
whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data
is within the display range of recording data file list 610 or not
(step SD232).
[1126] When CPU 31 determines in step SD232 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of recording data file list 610, the recording data file is
selected and displayed in accordance with the touch position (step
SD233).
[1127] Then, CPU 31 changes a function icon button in accordance
with the recording data file and has the resultant function icon
button displayed (step SD234). The process then again returns to
step SD231. Specifically, when the cursor selects and indicates a
recording data file, "play" icon 570 is displayed. When the cursor
selects and indicates a file in which nothing is recorded, "record"
icon 570# is displayed.
[1128] When CPU 31 determines in step SD232 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of recording file list 610, CPU 31 then determines
whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data
is within the display range of volume setting icon 550 or not (step
SD235).
[1129] When CPU 31 determines in step SD235 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of volume setting icon 550, CPU 31 performs the volume
setting processing (step SD236). As the volume setting processing
has been described above, detailed description thereof will not be
repeated.
[1130] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD235 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the display range of volume setting icon 550, CPU 31 then
determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the display range of "play" icon 570 or not
(step SD237).
[1131] When CPU 31 determines in step SD237 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of "play" icon 570, CPU 31 performs the processing for
reproducing a recording data file (step SD237#). The processing for
reproducing the recording data file will be described later.
[1132] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD237 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the display range of "play" icon 570, CPU 31 then determines
whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data
is within the display range of "erase" icon 571 or not (step
SD238).
[1133] When CPU 31 determines in step SD238 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of "erase" icon 571, CPU 31 performs the processing for
erasing the recording data file (step SD239).
[1134] When CPU 31 determines in step SD238 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of "erase" icon 571, CPU 31 then determines whether
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within
the display range of "record" icon 570# or not (step SD240).
[1135] When CPU 31 determines in step SD240 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of "record" icon 570#, CPU 31 performs processing for
creating the recording data file (step SD241). The processing for
creating the recording data file will be described later.
[1136] When CPU 31 determines in step SD240 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of "record" icon 570#, CPU 31 then determines whether
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within
the display range of "back" icon 620 or not (step SD242).
[1137] When CPU 31 determines in step SD242 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of "back" icon 620, the process again proceeds to
step SD231.
[1138] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD242 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within
the display range of "back" icon 620, sound selection screen 400
shown in FIG. 61 is displayed.
[1139] FIG. 97 is a diagram illustrating sub routine processing of
the processing for reproducing the recording data file.
[1140] Referring to FIG. 97, when CPU 31 determines in step SD237
that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is
within the display range of the "play" icon, CPU 31 then starts the
processing for reproducing the selected recording data file (step
SD250).
[1141] Thereafter, CPU 31 causes upper LCD 22 to display recording
data file selection list screen 601# and lower LCD 12 to display
reproduction operation selection screen 601 (step SD251).
[1142] Thereafter, CPU 31 determines whether the touch position
data has been input from touch panel 13 or not (step SD252).
[1143] When CPU 31 determines in step SD252 that the touch position
data has been input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 then determines
whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data
is within the display range of a reproduction time bar 551 or not
(step SD253).
[1144] When CPU 31 determines in step SD252 that the touch position
data has not been input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 then determines
whether the operation of direction input button 14A has been
performed or not (step SD264).
[1145] When CPU 31 determines in step SD264 that the operation of
direction input button 14A has been performed, CPU 31 performs the
processing for scroll display of the cursor position indicating the
selected recording data file in recording data file selection list
screen 601# in accordance with the operation of direction input
button 14A (step SD265).
[1146] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD264 that
the operation of direction input button 14A has not been performed,
the process again returns to step SD252.
[1147] Then, CPU 31 determines whether a prescribed button has been
pressed or not (step SD266).
[1148] When the prescribed button has been pressed in step SD266,
CPU 31 starts reproduction of the recording data file selected by
the cursor position (step SD250).
[1149] On the other hand, when the prescribed button has not been
pressed in step SD266, the process again returns to step SD252.
Here, it is assumed that the prescribed button is set to any of
operation buttons 14B to 14E.
[1150] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step S252 that
the touch position data has been input from touch panel 13, CPU 31
then determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the display range of reproduction time bar
551 or not (step SD253).
[1151] When CPU 31 determines in step SD253 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of reproduction time bar 251, CPU 31 performs the processing
for reproducing the recording data file from the time corresponding
to the touch position (step SD254).
[1152] In step SD254, CPU 31 then performs the processing for
moving the slider position on reproduction time bar 251 in
accordance with the touch position (step SD255).
[1153] When CPU 31 determines in step SD253 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of reproduction time bar 251, CPU 31 then determines
whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data
is within the display range of volume setting icon 550 or not (step
SD256).
[1154] When CPU 31 determines in step SD256 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of volume setting icon 550, CPU 31 performs the volume
setting processing (step SD257). As the volume setting processing
has been described above, detailed description thereof will not be
repeated.
[1155] When CPU 31 determines in step SD256 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of volume setting icon 550, CPU 31 then determines
whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data
is within the display range of the reproduction operation command
icon or not (step SD258).
[1156] When CPU 31 determines in step SD258 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of the reproduction operation command icon, CPU 31 performs
the function corresponding to the reproduction operation command
(step SD259).
[1157] Thereafter, display of the reproduction operation command is
switched (step SD260).
[1158] Then, the process again returns to step SD252.
[1159] When CPU 31 determines in step SD258 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of the reproduction operation command icon, CPU 31
then determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the display range of the selection function
icon or not (step SD261).
[1160] When CPU 31 determines in step SD261 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of the selection function icon, CPU 31 performs the function
corresponding to the selection function icon (step SD262).
[1161] When CPU 31 determines in step SD261 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of the selection function icon, CPU 31 determines
whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is
within the display range of "back" icon 513.
[1162] When CPU 31 determines in step SD263 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of "back" icon 513, recording data file list selection screen
600 which is the preceding screen is displayed (step SD230).
[1163] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD263 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position is not within
the display range of "back" icon 513, the process returns to step
SD252.
[1164] FIGS. 98 and 100 are flowcharts illustrating sub routine
processing of the processing for creating a recording data
file.
[1165] As described above, it is assumed that a plurality of slots
used for processing for recording in memory 34 for storage are
provided in advance in the present embodiment.
[1166] Referring to FIG. 98, initially, CPU 31 has recording start
screen 602 displayed.
[1167] FIG. 99 is a diagram illustrating recording start screen 602
according to the present embodiment (step SD270).
[1168] Referring to FIG. 99, a recording command icon 610 is
provided in recording start screen 602. In addition, a "quit" icon
615 is provided. By pressing recording command icon 610, recording
is started. In addition, it is assumed that, after recording is
started, display of recording command icon 610 is changed to
display of a stop command icon 610#. By pressing stop command icon
610#, recording is stopped. In addition, by pressing "quit" icon
615, it is assumed that the screen returns to recording data file
list selection screen 600 which is the preceding screen.
[1169] Referring again to FIG. 98, CPU 31 determines whether the
touch position data has been input from touch panel 13 or not (step
SD270#).
[1170] Thereafter, when CPU 31 determines that the touch position
data has been input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 then determines
whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data
is within the display range of the recording command icon or not
(step SD271).
[1171] When CPU 31 determines in step SD271 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of recording command icon 610, CPU 31 then determines whether
the volume of input from the microphone is equal to or greater than
the threshold value or not (step SD272).
[1172] When it is determined that the volume of input from the
microphone is equal to or greater than the threshold value, CPU 31
then starts the recording processing (step SD273).
[1173] Thereafter, CPU 31 makes switching of display of the
recording command (step SD274). Specifically, stop command icon
610# is displayed.
[1174] Thereafter, CPU 31 determines whether the touch position
data has been input from touch panel 13 or not (step SD275).
[1175] When CPU 31 determines that the touch position data has been
input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 determines whether the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of stop command icon 610# or not (step SD276).
[1176] When CPU 31 determines in step SD276 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of stop command icon 610#, the recording processing ends
(step SD277) and the process proceeds to "D".
[1177] Referring to FIG. 100, when the recording processing ends in
step SD277, CPU 31 then stores the recording data file (step
SD290). Specifically, CPU 31 causes data memory 34 for storage to
store the recording data file through memory control circuit
33.
[1178] Thereafter, CPU 31 has a recording data file color
designation screen displayed (step SD291).
[1179] FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating a recording data file
color designation screen 603 according to the present
embodiment.
[1180] Referring to FIG. 101, a case where a message "Recording is
completed. You can play with this sound." is displayed on recording
data file color designation screen 603 according to the present
embodiment is shown. A color designation area 620 is provided and
color designation selection icons 621 to 626 indicating red,
orange, yellow, green, blue, and navy, respectively are provided.
The user can designate any color designation icon by touching the
icon with touch pen 27 etc. A display color of the recording data
file corresponding to the designated slot is registered in this
designated color. In addition, by pressing a "cancel" icon 630, the
recording data file is erased and the screen returns to recording
data file list selection screen 600.
[1181] Referring again to FIG. 100, CPU 31 determines whether the
touch position data has been input from touch panel 13 or not (step
SD292).
[1182] When CPU 31 determines in step SD292 that the touch position
data has been input from touch panel 13, CPU 31 then determines
whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data
is within the color designation area or not (step SD293).
[1183] When CPU 31 determines in step SD293 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the color
designation area, the designated display color is registered (step
SD294). Then, CPU 31 has recording data file list selection screen
600 displayed. Here, the selected recording data file is displayed
in the designated display color.
[1184] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD293 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the color designation area, CPU 31 then determines whether
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within
the display range of "cancel" icon 630 or not (step SD295).
[1185] When CPU 31 determines in step SD295 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is not within the
display range of "cancel" icon 630, the process returns to step
SD292.
[1186] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD295 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is within
the display range of "cancel" icon 630, the recording data file
corresponding to the designated slot is erased (step SD296).
[1187] Then, CPU 31 has recording data file list selection screen
600 displayed. Here, the selected file is displayed as a file in
which no recording data is stored.
[1188] Referring again to FIG. 98, when CPU 31 determines in step
SD276 that the coordinate value indicated by the touch position
data is not within the display range of stop command icon 610#, the
process returns to step SD275.
[1189] When the touch position data has not been input from touch
panel 13 in step SD275, CPU 31 determines whether the capacity of
the recording data has reached the capacity limit of the slot or
not (step SD278).
[1190] When CPU 31 determines in step SD278 that the capacity of
the recording data has not reached the capacity limit of the slot,
the process again returns to step SD275.
[1191] When CPU 31 determines in step SD278 that the capacity of
the recording data has not reached the capacity limit of the slot,
the process again returns to step SD275.
[1192] Then, when CPU 31 determines in step SD278 that the capacity
of the recording data has reached the capacity limit of the slot,
the recording processing ends (step SD279). Then, the process
proceeds to step SD290 in FIG. 100. The subsequent processing is as
described above.
[1193] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD271 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the display range of recording command icon 610, CPU 31 then
determines whether the coordinate value indicated by the touch
position data is within the display range of "quit" icon 615 or
not.
[1194] When CPU 31 determines in step SD280 that the coordinate
value indicated by the touch position data is within the display
range of "quit" icon 615, CPU 31 has recording data file list
selection screen 600 as described in connection with FIG. 95
displayed.
[1195] On the other hand, when CPU 31 determines in step SD280 that
the coordinate value indicated by the touch position data is not
within the display range of "quit" icon 615, the process proceeds
to step SD270#.
[1196] As a result of this processing, the user can create a
recording data file freely recorded by the user through the
microphone in the main body and reproduce the created recording
data file. In addition, the function to display the created
recording data file by selecting recording data selection icon 544
described in connection with FIG. 65 and to output the recording
data file recorded in a similar manner as sound effect from the
speaker can also be performed.
[1197] In the present embodiment described above, for example, a
case where the slot storing the recording data file is provided in
memory 34 for storage embedded in game device 10 has been
described. Storage of the recording data file, however, is not
limited to storage in memory 34 for storage, and for example, the
recording data file may be stored in a memory card such as an SD
card in accordance with a user's operation instruction.
10. Storage Medium Storing Program
[1198] Description above has been provided on the premise that
various application programs to be executed are stored in any of at
least data memory 34 for storage, memory card 28, and memory card
29. A more preferred embodiment of an application program stored in
each storage medium will be exemplified hereinafter.
[1199] FIG. 103 is a diagram for illustrating a storage medium that
can be used with game device 10 according to the present
embodiment.
[1200] Referring to FIG. 103, data memory 34 for storage embedded
in game device 10 is provided with a program area and a data area
separately for each other. Typically, a first photographing
function program 901 (for example, photographing function program
52 or photographing application program 53 described previously), a
first recording function program 902 (for example, sound
application program 57 described previously), a second
photographing function program 903 (which is a program that has not
yet been described so far, for example, a program similar to
photographing application program 53 described previously that
allows storage of taken images also in a memory in an attached card
complying with dedicated specifications in a photographing mode and
allows display of taken images stored in the memory in the attached
card complying with dedicated specifications), a second recording
function program 904 (which is a program that has not yet been
described so far, for example, a program similar to sound
application program 57 described previously that allows storage of
audio data also in a memory in an attached card complying with
dedicated specifications and allows utilization of audio data
stored in the memory in the attached card complying with dedicated
specifications), a first photograph utilization program 905 (which
is a program that has not yet been described so far, for example, a
program having an edition function (only the edition function in
the photographing mode described previously) and a photograph
viewing function (the photograph display mode described previously)
in photographing application program 53 described previously), a
first audio utilization program 906 (which is a program that has
not yet been described so far, for example, a program having
functions of sound application program 57 described previously with
the recording function being deleted therefrom), a second
photograph utilization program 907 (which is a program that has not
yet been described so far, for example, a program that has only the
photograph display mode of photographing application program 53
described previously and in addition allows display of taken images
stored in a memory in an attached card complying with dedicated
specifications), and a second audio utilization program 907 (which
is a program that has not yet been described so far, for example, a
program having functions of sound application program 57 described
previously with the recording function being deleted therefrom,
that allows reproduction or edition of the audio data stored in the
memory in the attached card complying with dedicated
specifications) can be stored in the program area.
[1201] It is assumed that first photographing function program 901,
first recording function program 902, first photograph utilization
program 905, and first audio utilization program 906 among these
programs are stored in advance (pre-installed) in data memory 34
for storage of game device 10.
[1202] In contrast, second photographing function program 903,
second recording function program 904, second photograph
utilization program 907, and second audio utilization program 907
are downloaded from a not-shown distribution server through
wireless communication module 38, local communication module 39, or
other communication means.
[1203] In addition, a data area 909 can store in a non-volatile
manner, image pick-up data obtained by first or second
photographing function program 901 or 903 and/or audio data
obtained by first or second recording function program 902 or 904
or the like. It is noted that image pick-up data obtained by the
first photographing function program and image pick-up data
obtained by the second photographing function program may be stored
in the same area without distinction, so that both of them can be
utilized. Alternatively, the audio data obtained by the first
recording function program and the audio data obtained by the
second recording function program may be stored in the same area
without distinction, so that both of them can be utilized.
[1204] For better understanding, FIG. 103 shows an "embedded NAND"
representing a NAND-type flash memory typically implementing data
memory 34 for storage. Naturally, memory 34 for storage may be
implemented by a non-volatile memory other than the NAND-type flash
memory.
[1205] In addition, memory card 28 (typically an SD card)
implemented by a universal specifications card complying with
universal specifications can be attached to game device 10
according to the present embodiment through memory card interface
36 (FIG. 18). Memory card 28 can store various types of data in a
non-volatile manner. Namely, memory card 28 is provided with a data
area 910.
[1206] Moreover, any of various memory cards 29-1 to 29-4
implemented by a dedicated specifications card complying with
dedicated specifications can selectively be attached to game device
10 according to the present embodiment through memory card
interface 37 (FIG. 18). Each of memory cards 29-1 to 29-4 is
provided with a program area and a data area separately from each
other.
[1207] More specifically, it is assumed that memory card 28-1
stores a photographing function program 921 (a program having a
function similar to that of photographing function program 2
described previously, but different in specific contents thereof)
and a photograph utilization program 922 (a program having a
function similar to that of the second photograph utilization
program described previously, but different in specific contents
thereof). In addition, memory card 29-1 is provided with a data
area 923 where image pick-up data and/or audio data can be stored
in a non-volatile manner.
[1208] Similarly, it is assumed that memory card 29-2 stores a
photographing function program 931 (a program having a function
similar to that of photographing function program 2 described
previously, but different in specific contents thereof; storage
destination of taken images being limited to a non-volatile memory
933 in the card itself) and a photograph utilization program 932 (a
program having a function similar to that of photograph utilization
program 2 described previously, but different in specific contents
thereof; photographs that can be utilized being limited to taken
images stored in non-volatile memory 933 in the card itself). In
addition, memory card 28-2 is provided with a data area 933 where
image pick-up data and/or audio data can be stored in a
non-volatile manner.
[1209] In addition, it is assumed that memory card 29-3 stores a
recording function program 941 (a program having a function similar
to that of recording function program 2 described previously, but
different in specific contents thereof) and an audio utilization
program 942 (a program having a function similar to that of audio
utilization program 2 described previously, but different in
specific contents thereof). Moreover, memory card 28-3 is provided
with a data area 943 where image pick-up data and/or audio data can
be stored in a non-volatile manner.
[1210] Similarly, it is assumed that memory card 28-4 stores a
recording function program 951 (a program having a function similar
to that of recording function program 2 described previously, but
different in specific contents thereof; storage destination of
recorded audio data being limited to a non-volatile memory 953 in
the card itself) and an audio utilization program 952 (a program
having a function similar to that of audio utilization program 2
described previously, but different in specific contents thereof;
audio data that can be utilized being limited to audio data stored
in non-volatile memory 933 in the card itself). Moreover, memory
card 28-4 is provided with a data area 953 where image pick-up data
and/or audio data can be stored in a non-volatile manner.
[1211] Programs stored in respective storage media are different
from each other in a provided function in a part or in its
entirety, for example, even though a program is a photographing
function program providing the same photographing function.
[1212] For example, first photographing function program 901
pre-installed in the main body of game device 10 and second
photographing function program 903 stored in game device 10 as a
result of downloading are different from each other in a variety of
choices of storage destination of image data obtained in
photographing. Namely, according to first photographing function
program 901, the obtained image pick-up data can selectively be
stored in any of embedded data memory 34 for storage (data area
909, embedded NAND) and memory card 28 (SD card). On the other
hand, according to second photographing function program 903, the
obtained image pick-up data can selectively be stored in any of
embedded data memory 34 for storage (data area 909, embedded NAND),
memory card 28 (SD card), and memory card 29 attached to game
device 10 (card complying with dedicated specifications). Namely,
second photographing function program 903 provides more
sophisticated processing than first photographing function program
901, in terms of a variety of choices of storage destination of
image pick-up data.
[1213] The processing as shown in FIG. 30 above is performed as a
result of execution of any photographing function program by CPU
31. Difference in a function between similar photographing function
programs leads to the different number of button images for
selecting a storage destination shown in FIG. 31.
[1214] Similarly, according to first recording function program
902, the obtained audio data can selectively be stored in any of
embedded data memory 34 for storage (data area 909, embedded NAND)
and memory card 28 (SD card). On the other hand, according to
second recording function program 904, the obtained audio data can
selectively be stored in any of embedded data memory 34 for storage
(data area 909, embedded NAND), memory card 28 (SD card), and
memory card 29 attached to game device 10 (card complying with
dedicated specifications). Namely, second photographing recording
program 904 provides more sophisticated processing than first
recording function program 902, in terms of a variety of choices of
storage destination of image pick-up data. It is noted that the
processing as shown in FIG. 30 above is implemented as a result of
execution of the recording function program by CPU 31.
[1215] It is noted that the processing as shown in FIG. 98 above is
implemented as a result of execution of any recording function
program by CPU 31. Difference in a function between similar
recording function programs leads to difference in a variety of
choices of a storage destination of a recording data file, as shown
in step SD290 in FIG. 100.
[1216] In addition, according to first photograph utilization
program 905, image pick-up data stored in any of embedded data
memory 34 for storage (data area 909, embedded NAND) and memory
card 28 (SD card) can selectively be utilized. On the other hand,
according to second photograph utilization program 907, image
pick-up data stored in any of embedded data memory 34 for storage
(data area 909, embedded NAND), memory card 28 (SD card), and
memory card 29 attached to game device 10 (card complying with
dedicated specifications) can selectively be utilized. Namely,
second photograph utilization program 907 provides more
sophisticated processing than first photograph utilization program
905, in terms of a variety of choices of a storage medium from
which image pick-up data can be read and utilized.
[1217] It is noted that the processing as shown in FIG. 32 above is
implemented as a result of execution of any photograph utilization
program by CPU 31. Namely, image pick-up data that has already been
obtained can be viewed (displayed) or the image pick-up data can be
subjected to various types of edition. Difference in a function
between similar photograph utilization programs leads to the
different number of button images for allowing selection of a
source of reading shown in FIG. 31.
[1218] Similarly, according to first audio utilization program 906,
audio data stored in any of embedded data memory 34 for storage
(data area 909, embedded NAND) and memory card 28 (SD card) can
selectively be utilized. On the other hand, according to second
audio utilizing program 908, audio data stored in any of embedded
data memory 34 for storage (data area 909, embedded NAND), memory
card 28 (SD card), and memory card 29 attached to game device 10
(card complying with dedicated specifications) can selectively be
utilized. Namely, second audio utilization program 908 provides
more sophisticated processing than first audio utilization program
906, in terms of a variety of choices of a storage medium from
which audio data can be read and utilized.
[1219] It is noted that the processing as shown in FIG. 97 above is
implemented as a result of execution of any audio utilization
program by CPU 31. Difference in a function between similar audio
utilization programs leads to difference in a variety of choices of
a source from which audio data to be reproduced is read.
[1220] Photographing function program 921 stored in memory card
29-1 provides a function similar to that of second photographing
function program 903 stored in data memory 34 for storage. Namely,
according to photographing function program 921, obtained image
pick-up data can selectively be stored in any of data memory 34 for
storage embedded in the main body of game device 10 (data area 909,
embedded NAND), memory card 28 (SD card), and memory card 29-1
itself (data area 923). Namely, photographing function program 921
provides more sophisticated processing than first photographing
function program 901 stored in data memory 34 for storage embedded
in the main body of game device 10, in terms of a variety of
choices of a storage destination of image pick-up data.
[1221] In contrast, photographing function program 931 stored in
memory card 29-2 is restricted in a function that it can provide,
as compared with photographing function program 921. Namely,
according to photographing function program 931, obtained image
pick-up data can be stored only in memory card 29-2 itself (data
area 933).
[1222] In addition, photograph utilization program 922 stored in
memory card 29-1 provides a function similar to that of second
photograph utilization program 907 stored in data memory 34 for
storage. Namely, according to photograph utilization program 922,
image pick-up data stored in any of data memory 34 for storage
embedded in the main body of game device 10 (data area 909,
embedded NAND), memory card 28 (SD card), and memory card 29-1
itself (data area 923) can selectively be utilized. Namely,
photograph utilization program 922 provides more sophisticated
processing than first photograph utilization program 905 stored in
data memory 34 for storage embedded in the main body of game device
10, in terms of a variety of choices of a storage medium from which
image pick-up data can be read and utilized.
[1223] In contrast, photograph utilization program 932 stored in
memory card 29-2 is restricted in a function that it can provide,
as compared with photograph utilization program 922. Namely,
according to photograph utilization program 932, image pick-up data
stored in memory card 29-2 itself (data area 933) can only be
utilized.
[1224] Similarly, recording function program 941 stored in memory
card 29-3 provides a function similar to that of second recording
function program 904 stored in data memory 34 for storage. Namely,
according to recording function program 941, obtained audio data
can selectively be stored in any of data memory 34 for storage
embedded in the main body of game device 10 (data area 909,
embedded NAND), memory card 28 (SD card), and memory card 29-3
itself (data area 943). Namely, recording function program 941
provides more sophisticated processing than first recording
function program 902 stored in data memory 34 for storage embedded
in the main body of game device 10, in terms of a variety of
choices of a storage destination of audio data.
[1225] In contrast, recording function program 951 stored in memory
card 29-4 is restricted in a function that it can provide, as
compared with recording function program 941. Namely, according to
recording function program 951, obtained audio data can be stored
only in memory card 29-4 itself (data area 953).
[1226] In addition, audio utilization program 942 stored in memory
card 29-3 provides a function similar to that of second audio
utilization program 908 stored in data memory 34 for storage.
Namely, according to audio utilization program 942, image pick-up
data stored in any of data memory 34 for storage embedded in the
main body of game device 10 (data area 909, embedded NAND), memory
card 28 (SD card), and memory card 29-3 itself (data area 943) can
selectively be utilized. Namely, audio utilization program 942
provides more sophisticated processing than first audio utilization
program 906 stored in data memory 34 for storage embedded in the
main body of game device 10, in terms of a variety of choices of a
storage medium from which audio data can be read and utilized.
[1227] In contrast, audio utilization program 952 stored in memory
card 29-4 is restricted in a function that it can provide, as
compared with audio utilization program 942. Namely, according to
audio utilization program 942, audio data stored in memory card
29-4 itself (data area 953) can only be utilized.
[1228] In game device 100 according to the present embodiment,
reading and execution of an application stored in memory cards 29-1
to 29-4 that are memory cards complying with dedicated
specifications is permitted, however, reading and execution of an
application stored in memory card 28 which is a memory card
complying with universal specifications is prohibited.
[1229] Thus, game device 100 according to the present embodiment
can execute various applications stored in various types of storage
media. Therefore, a degree of freedom of a method of marketing or
distributing an application program can be enhanced. For example,
an application program capable of executing only a basic function
may be pre-installed in data memory 34 for storage embedded in game
device 10 and an application program may be marketed in such a
manner that an application program capable of executing a more
sophisticated function is downloaded or provided in a form of a
card complying with dedicated specifications.
11. Function and Effect of Present Embodiment and Other
Features
[1230] The present invention is implemented as embodiments as
described above, however, the present invention essentially
includes the following aspects. In the description below, for
better understanding of the present invention, correspondence with
the embodiments described above is shown, however, reference
numerals, supplemental explanation and the like in parentheses are
not intended to limit the present invention in any manner.
[1231] <First Aspect>
[1232] According to the first aspect of the present invention, a
portable image pick-up device (10) including a first housing (lower
housing 11), a second housing (upper housing 21), a first image
pick-up portion (outer camera 25), a first display portion (lower
LCD 12), touch coordinate detection means (touch panel 13), first
display control means (CPU 31 performing step SB6), and change
means (CPU 31 performing step SB5) is provided. The second housing
is foldably connected to the first housing. The first image pick-up
portion is provided in an outer surface of the second housing when
folded. The first display portion has a display screen in an inner
surface of the first housing when folded. The touch coordinate
detection means detects touch coordinates on the display screen of
the first display portion. The first display control means causes
the first display portion to display a live image currently
picked-up by the first image pick-up portion. The change means
changes the live image based on an input to the touch coordinate
detection means.
[1233] It is noted that the above phrase "changes the live image
based on an input to the touch coordinate detection means"
typically includes the following examples, but not limited thereto,
and includes combining a prescribed image with a live image by
providing a touch input to the live image (typically, at a position
based on a touch input) or performing prescribed image conversion
processing on a live image (typically, performing image conversion
processing on a position or an area based on a touch input). [1234]
Drawing an image handwritten by a touch input on a live image
[1235] Combining a stamp image at a touched position with a live
image [1236] Performing image processing for distorting an image at
a touched position or in a touched area on a live image [1237]
Performing processing for changing color at a touched position or
in a touched area on a live image
[1238] According to this aspect, the following first problem can be
solved.
[1239] (First Problem)
[1240] In the portable phone described in Japanese Patent
Laying-Open No. 2006-311224 (Patent Document 1), an image being
picked-up by the camera (a live image; an image which is a
picked-up image output from the camera and displayed as a moving
image in real-time) is displayed on a display screen provided in a
housing on which the camera is mounted. This is because, since a
photographing direction of the camera is opposite to a direction in
which the live image is displayed, the live image is displayed such
that a user can view the live image in the same direction as a
direction of viewing a real view, and thus it is easy for the user
to recognize where the user is photographing in the real view. In
the portable phone described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.
2006-311224 (Patent Document 1), however, it is impossible to
perform an edition operation on the live image.
[1241] Here, the edition operation on the live image is an
operation for modifying the live image, such as superimposing on
the live image an image prepared in advance and referred to as a
stamp image or a seal image and an image handwritten by a user, and
the like. Examples of devices capable of such an edition operation
include those in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 04-156791 (Patent
Document 5), Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 06-276478 (Patent
Document 6), Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 01-297986 (Patent
Document 7), Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2002-125176 (Patent
Document 8), and Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2004-320091
(Patent Document 9).
[1242] For example, in the image pick-up device described in
Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 04-156791 (Patent Document 5), an
input to a still image or a live image can be made through a touch
panel. In this image pick-up device, however, since a screen for
displaying a live image is located on a back side of a camera lens
(see FIG. 1 of Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 04-156791), it is
difficult to place the image pick-up device with the touch panel
facing upward, and a user cannot perform an edition operation (a
touch input operation to the touch panel) in a stable manner.
[1243] Further, in an audio and image recording/displaying device
described in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 06-276478 (Patent
Document 6), a mouse is used as an input device for adding a
handwritten image to a live image displayed on a display portion.
Thus, it is impossible to perform an intuitive edition operation to
directly touch a live image. In addition, when the audio and image
recording/displaying device above is placed, a photographing
direction of a camera cannot be changed in an up-down direction,
and hence a degree of freedom of photographing is limited when the
audio and video recording/displaying device is placed.
[1244] Further, according to a device described in Japanese Patent
Laying-Open No. 01-297986 (Patent Document 7), an image created by
a user with a digitizer can be superimposed on a picked-up image.
In the device above, however, the user merely creates in advance an
image with the digitizer and superimposes the created image on a
picked-up image, and the user cannot perform an edition operation
on a live image. In addition, the digitizer is provided separately
from a camera (see FIG. 1 of Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.
01-297986) or integrally with the camera (see FIGS. 5 and 6 of
Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 01-297986). Thus, when the
digitizer is provided separately from the camera, the device is
suitable for use in a placed state. On the other hand, in using the
device while holding the same, both of two devices (the camera and
the digitizer) should be held, which leads to difficulty in
operating the device. When the digitizer is provided integrally
with the camera, since a display screen is arranged perpendicular
to a surface on which the device is placed as in Japanese Patent
Laying-Open No. 04-156791 (Patent Document 5) and Japanese Patent
Laying-Open No. 06-276478 (Patent Document 6) above, an operation
of the digitizer is difficult.
[1245] Devices disclosed in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.
2002-125176 (Patent Document 8) and Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.
2004-320091 (Patent Document 9) are stationary devices, and two
manners of use including holding the device and placing the device
are not taken into consideration.
[1246] (Function and Effect According to First Aspect)
[1247] According to the first aspect, in order to address the first
problem above, a portable image pick-up device with which it is
easy to perform an edition operation on a live image can be
provided.
[1248] Namely, according to the first aspect, a camera is provided
in an upper housing (the second housing) of a foldable portable
image pick-up device, and a live image being picked-up by the
camera is displayed on a screen provided in a lower housing (the
first housing). By using a touch panel provided on the screen, a
user can perform an edition operation directly on the live image.
According to the feature above, since a photographing direction of
the camera can be changed independently of a surface on which an
edition operation on a live image is performed (a surface of the
touch panel), the touch panel can be arranged at such an angle as
facilitating the user's operation in either holding or placing the
image pick-up device for use. Namely, an edition operation on a
live image is facilitated. In other words, even when the touch
panel is arranged at such an angle as facilitating the user's
operation, the photographing direction of the camera can freely be
adjusted and hence photographing can easily be performed.
[1249] According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect,
the portable image pick-up device may further include a second
display portion (upper LCD 22), storage means (data memory 34 for
storage), storing means (CPU 31 performing step SB9), and second
display control means (CPU 31 performing step SB10). The second
display portion has a display screen in an inner surface of the
second housing when folded. The storing means causes the storage
means to store the live image that has been changed by the change
means as a stored image in accordance with a prescribed operation.
The second display control means causes the second display portion
to display the stored image.
[1250] According to this aspect, by displaying a picked-up image on
a display screen facing in a direction opposite to the
photographing direction of the camera, a stored image that has
already been taken can be presented to the user together with a
live image.
[1251] According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect, in
the third invention, the second display control means may cause the
second display portion to display a stored image stored in response
to the prescribed operation, in accordance with the prescribed
operation being performed.
[1252] According to this aspect, when the user performs a
photographing operation, an image obtained by the photographing
operation is displayed on the second display portion immediately
after the photographing operation. Therefore, (though the
photographing direction does not correspond to a direction in which
a live image is displayed,) by causing the photographing direction
of the camera to correspond to a direction in which a taken image
is displayed, the picked-up image can be presented to the user so
that the user easily recognizes the photographing direction.
[1253] According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect,
the first image pick-up portion may be arranged in an area of the
outer surface of the second housing corresponding to non-screen
areas of the inner surface of the second housing provided on both
right and left sides of the second display portion, on a side more
distant from a lower side of the second housing than a center
thereof in an up-down direction.
[1254] According to this aspect, by arranging the first image
pick-up portion on an upper side of the upper housing (the second
housing), when the portable image pick-up device is held for use,
an image of a hand of the user holding the lower housing can be
prevented from being picked-up. In addition, when the portable
image pick-up device is placed for use, since a distance from a
surface on which the portable image pick-up device is placed to the
first image pick-up portion is increased, an image of the surface
on which the portable image pick-up device is placed can be
prevented from being picked-up. Further, by arranging the camera in
a non-screen area of the upper housing, a space of the non-screen
area is effectively used and the device can be reduced in size.
[1255] According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect, a
prescribed image for performing the photographing operation may be
displayed on the first display portion. Here, the portable image
pick-up device further includes storage means (data memory 34 for
storage) and storing means (CPU 31 performing step SB9). The
storing means causes the storage means to store the live image that
has been changed by the change means as a stored image, in
accordance with an operation to designate the prescribed image
through coordinate input means.
[1256] According to this aspect, a photographing operation can be
performed by operating the touch panel. In other words, since an
edition operation and a photographing operation can both be
performed through the touch panel, it becomes extremely easy for
the user to perform the photographing operation after the edition
operation.
[1257] According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect,
the portable image pick-up device may further include an operation
button (button 14I and/or 14J), storage means (data memory 34 for
storage) and storing means (CPU 31 performing step SB9). The
operation button is provided at least at one of right and left ends
of an upper side of the first housing. The storing means causes the
storage means to store the live image that has been changed by the
change means as a stored image in accordance with an operation of
the operation button.
[1258] According to this aspect, the user can perform a
photographing operation by pressing the operation button with a
hand holding the portable image pick-up device. In other words,
since the user can perform a photographing operation while holding
the portable image pick-up device, the user can easily perform a
photographing operation.
[1259] According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect,
the operation button may be provided at a left end of the upper
side of the first housing as viewed from the inner surface of the
first housing.
[1260] According to this aspect, while holding the portable image
pick-up device with a left hand and performing an edition operation
on a live image with a right hand, the user can perform a
photographing operation by pressing the operation button with the
left hand. Therefore, the user can quickly perform a photographing
operation with the left hand while performing an edition operation
with the right hand when holding the portable image pick-up device,
and hence the user can easily perform an edition operation and a
photographing operation.
[1261] According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect,
the operation button may be provided at each of the right and left
ends of the upper side of the first housing.
[1262] According to this aspect, either a right-handed user or a
left-handed user can easily perform an edition operation and a
photographing operation.
[1263] According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect,
the portable image pick-up device may further include a second
image pick-up portion (inner camera 23) provided in an inner
surface of the second housing. Here, the first display control
means causes the first display portion to display a live image
currently picked-up by the first image pick-up portion or the
second image pick-up portion.
[1264] According to this aspect, by providing the image pick-up
means also in the inner surface of the second housing,
photographing can be performed also in a direction opposite to a
photographing direction of the first image pick-up portion.
[1265] According to a more preferred aspect of the first aspect,
the portable image pick-up device may further include an operation
button (button 14I and/or 14J), storage means (data memory 34 for
storage) and storing means (CPU 31 performing step SB9). The
operation button is provided at at least one of right and left ends
of an upper side of the first housing. The storing means causes the
storage means to store the live image that has been changed by the
change means as a stored image in accordance with an operation of
the operation button. The first housing has a first shaft portion
(11A) provided to project from the inner surface of the first
housing in a direction perpendicular thereto. The second housing
has a second shaft portion (21A) pivotably connected to the first
shaft portion. The second image pick-up portion is arranged in the
second shaft portion.
[1266] According to this aspect, by providing the second image
pick-up portion in the shaft portion (the second shaft portion), a
space for the device is saved. Further, since the second shaft
portion is located on the inner surface of the first housing, when
the two housings are folded, the second image pick-up portion faces
the first housing. Thus, when the portable image pick-up device is
closed, the second image pick-up portion is covered with the inner
surface of the first housing and not exposed to the outside,
thereby protecting the second image pick-up portion.
[1267] According to an alternative aspect of the first aspect, a
program executed by a computer of a portable image pick-up device
for achieving the functions in the invention described above may
also be provided. The program provides a program executed by a
computer of a portable image pick-up device including the first
housing above, the second housing above, the first image pick-up
portion above, the first display portion above, and the touch
coordinate detection means above, and causes the computer to
execute a first display control step (SB6) and a change step (SB5).
In the first display control step, the computer causes the first
display portion to display a live image currently picked-up by the
first image pick-up portion. In the change step, the computer
changes the live image based on an input to the touch coordinate
detection means.
[1268] <Second Aspect>
[1269] According to the second aspect of the present invention, an
image pick-up device including a first housing (lower housing 11),
a second housing (upper housing 21), a first display portion (lower
LCD 12), a first image pick-up portion (outer camera 25), a
plurality of operation buttons (buttons 14A to 14E), and a touch
panel (13) is provided. The first housing has a horizontally long
shape. The second housing has a horizontally long shape, and a long
side thereof is connected to an upper long side of the first
housing such that the first and second housings are foldable. The
first display portion has a display screen provided in an inner
surface thereof, which is a surface located inside when the first
and second housings are folded. The first image pick-up portion is
provided in an outer surface of the second housing which is a
surface located outside when the first and second housings are
folded, and arranged at an end portion opposite to a connection
portion where the second housing is connected to the first housing.
The plurality of operation buttons are provided on the inner
surface of the first housing, on opposing sides of the display
screen in a longitudinal direction of the first housing. The touch
panel is provided on the display screen.
[1270] According to this aspect, the following second problem can
be solved.
[1271] (Second Problem)
[1272] In the image pick-up device disclosed in Japanese Patent
Laying-Open No. 2006-311224 (Patent Document 1), the vertically
long housings are arranged lengthwise and connected to each other.
Thus, a width of the image pick-up device is too small for a user
to firmly hold the image pick-up device with both hands. Further,
since the display screen is provided across the entire surface of
each housing, when the user holds the image pick-up device either
lengthwise or sideways, fingers are located on the screen, thereby
deteriorating visibility of the screen and operability of the touch
panel. On the other hand, when the user holds the image pick-up
device such that the fingers are not located on the screen, the
user has to hold the image pick-up device at back surfaces and side
surfaces of the housings, and hence cannot firmly hold the image
pick-up device. Further, since the information equipment disclosed
in Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2001-142564 (Patent Document 4)
is a notebook personal computer, it is assumed that the notebook
personal computer is used in a placed state in image pick-up, and
the notebook personal computer cannot be held with hands for use in
image pick-up.
[1273] As described above, the image pick-up devices disclosed in
Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2006-311224 (Patent Document 1) and
Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2001-142564 (Patent Document 4)
respectively cannot firmly be held by the user while maintaining
visibility of the screen and operability of the touch panel in
image pick-up. Thus, there is a problem that hand movement is
highly likely in image pick-up. Further, since the image pick-up
device cannot firmly be held in image pick-up, an operation in
image pick-up has been difficult.
[1274] (Function and Effect According to Second Aspect)
[1275] According to the second aspect, in order to address the
second problem above, an image pick-up device that can firmly be
held by the user while maintaining visibility of the display screen
and operability of the touch panel in image pick-up can be
provided.
[1276] Namely, according to the second aspect, when the user holds
the image pick-up device sideways, the user can firmly hold the
image pick-up device by holding portions of the first housing on
opposing sides of the display screen (portions on which the
operation buttons are provided). Here, hands of the user are
located on the operation buttons, not on the display screen. Thus,
the display screen is not covered with hands and hidden, and
visibility of the display screen can be maintained. In other words,
an image pick-up device that can firmly be held by the user while
maintaining visibility of the display screen in image pick-up can
be achieved.
[1277] In addition, according to the second aspect, the display
portion and the touch panel are provided in the first housing held
by the user. Therefore, even when the image pick-up device is held
for use or even when the image pick-up device is placed on a desk
or the like for use, an operation of the touch panel is easy (as
compared to the case where the touch panel is provided in the
second housing).
[1278] According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect,
the image pick-up device may further include a second display
portion (upper LCD 22) of which display screen is provided in an
inner surface of the second housing located inside when the first
and second housings are folded. Here, non-display-screen areas (B1
and B2) having a width as large as that of areas (A1 and A2) on the
inner surface of the first housing on which the plurality of
operation buttons are provided are provided on the inner surface of
the second housing, on opposing sides of the second display
portion.
[1279] According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect,
the second housing may have a width as large as that of the first
housing. In this case, the display screen of the first display
portion and a display screen of the second display portion have the
same width, and they are provided in the same position with regard
to the longitudinal direction.
[1280] According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect,
the image pick-up device may further include a speaker provided
inside the non-display-screen area of the second housing.
[1281] According to each aspect above, since the image pick-up
device includes two display screens, more information can be
displayed. Further, according to the configuration in which
non-display-screen areas are provided on opposing sides of the
display screen on the second housing ((1-2) above), even when the
user rotates the image pick-up device by 90.degree. from a state
where the image pick-up device is held sideways to hold the image
pick-up device lengthwise, the user can firmly hold the image
pick-up device. In other words, when the user holds the image
pick-up device lengthwise, the user can support the areas of the
first housing on which the operation buttons are provided and the
non-display-screen areas with thumbs and can support a back surface
of each housing in which the display screen is provided with index
fingers to little fingers. Thus, while the user can firmly hold the
image pick-up device, the thumbs are not located on the display
screen, and visibility of the display screen does not deteriorate.
Further, according to the feature of (4) above, by arranging the
speaker inside the non-display-screen area of the second housing,
the inside space of the second housing can effectively be used and
the image pick-up device can be made smaller in size.
[1282] According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect,
the second display portion may display an image picked-up by the
first image pick-up portion in real time. Here, the first display
portion displays an operation screen for performing an operation to
the image pick-up device (see FIG. 42).
[1283] According to this aspect, the display screen on which the
picked-up real-time image is displayed and the first image pick-up
portion for picking up an image are both provided in the second
housing. Thus, if the image pick-up direction of the first image
pick-up portion is changed, an orientation of the display screen is
changed accordingly. Thus, the user can intuitively and easily
grasp the image pick-up direction.
[1284] In addition, according to this aspect, since the operation
screen is displayed on the display screen provided in the first
housing held by the user, the operation screen is displayed on the
display screen in the vicinity of input means (the touch panel and
the operation buttons). Therefore, the user can easily perform an
operation while looking at the operation screen.
[1285] According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect,
when a real-time image picked-up by the first image pick-up portion
is displayed on the second display portion, the first display
portion may display an image for providing an input to the touch
panel as the operation screen. Thus, an operation to the image
pick-up device can easily be performed through the touch panel.
[1286] According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect,
the first display portion may display an image for editing a
picked-up image. Thus, the user can easily perform edition
processing through the touch panel.
[1287] According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect,
the image pick-up device may further include a second image pick-up
portion (inner camera 23) provided in an inner surface of the
second housing located inside when the first and second housings
are folded, and provided on a side closer to a coupling portion of
the first and second housings than a screen of the second display
portion. Thus, the user can pick up images in two different
directions without changing a manner of holding the image pick-up
device. Further, when photographing is performed using the second
image pick-up portion, as in the case of the first image pick-up
portion, the image pick-up direction can easily be changed by
adjusting an angle of the second housing, and the image pick-up
direction of the image pick-up portion can easily be changed
without providing a special mechanism. Further, since the second
image pick-up portion is not exposed to the outside when the
housings are folded, the second image pick-up portion can be
protected by folding the housings.
[1288] According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect,
the image pick-up device may further include an image pick-up
instruction button (button 14J) arranged at a right end of the
upper long side of the first housing for giving an instruction to
store a picked-up image. Thus, while holding the first housing, the
user can easily press the photographing instruction button with an
index finger.
[1289] According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect,
the image pick-up device may further include two image pick-up
instruction buttons (buttons 14J and 14I) arranged at opposing ends
of the upper long side of the first housing respectively, for
giving an instruction to store a picked-up image. Thus, while
holding the first housing, either a right-handed user or a
left-handed user can easily press the photographing instruction
button with an index finger.
[1290] According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect,
weight of the first housing and parts provided in the first housing
may be greater than that of the second housing and parts provided
in the second housing.
[1291] According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect,
at least a battery, a circuit board on which electronic parts are
mounted, and a connector for removable connection of a storage
medium may be provided in the first housing.
[1292] According to the two aspects above, when the image pick-up
device is placed on a desk or the like, the image pick-up device is
less likely to fall down. Further, by making the first housing held
by the user heavier than the second housing, stability when the
image pick-up device is held can be increased and hand movement in
image pick-up can be prevented.
[1293] According to a more preferred aspect of the second aspect,
the second housing can be fixed at an angle smaller than
180.degree. with respect to the first housing. Thus, by setting the
angle between the housings to be slightly smaller than 180.degree.,
the outer surfaces of the housings fit to a shape of a hand, and
hence it becomes easier to hold the image pick-up device.
[1294] <Third Aspect>
[1295] According to the third aspect of the present invention, a
foldable image pick-up device including a first image pick-up
portion (camera 23 or 25), a first housing (lower housing 11), a
second housing (upper housing 21), and a coupling portion (shaft
portions 11A and 21A) is provided. The coupling portion foldably
couples the first housing and the second housing to each other.
Further, the image pick-up device includes at least one
photographing button (buttons 14J and 14I) for giving an
instruction to record an image picked-up by the first image pick-up
portion. At least one photographing button is provided on a side
surface of the first housing, assuming an inner surface of the
first housing when folded as a front surface, on a side where the
second housing is located when the first housing and the second
housing are opened.
[1296] According to this aspect, the following third problem can be
solved.
[1297] (Third Problem)
[1298] In the portable phone disclosed in Japanese Patent
Laying-Open No. 2003-333149 (Patent Document 10), when a user
performs photographing, a manner of operation in which the user
presses a first shutter button with a thumb while holding the lower
second housing with one hand is assumed. In other words, the user
presses the first shutter button with the thumb while touching the
inner surface of the second housing with a thumb and an outer
surface of the second housing with other fingers (so as to sandwich
the second housing between the thumb and other fingers). In such a
manner of operation, since the thumb should be released from the
second housing when pressing the first shutter button, the second
housing cannot firmly be held. Thus, it is difficult to press the
first shutter button, and hand movement may occur when the first
shutter button is pressed. Thus, the conventional foldable image
pick-up device suffers from a problem that it is difficult to
perform a photographing operation by pressing the shutter
button.
[1299] (Function and Effect According to Third Aspect)
[1300] According to the third aspect, in order to address the third
problem above, operability in the photographing operation can be
improved.
[1301] Namely, according to the third aspect, by providing the
photographing button on the side surface of the first housing on a
side where the first housing is coupled to the second housing, the
user can press the photographing button with an index finger while
holding the first housing by touching the inner surface of the
first housing with a thumb and an outer surface of the first
housing with a middle finger or the like (see FIGS. 9 and 10).
Thus, since the user can press the photographing button while
firmly holding the first housing, the button is easily pressed in a
photographing operation, and hand movement is less likely. Thus,
according to the feature of (2-1) above, operability in the
photographing operation in the foldable image pick-up device can be
improved.
[1302] In addition, according to the third aspect, since the
photographing button is provided on the side surface of the first
housing, the photographing operation can be performed even in a
state where the image pick-up device is placed with its outer
surface of the first housing facing downward. As the image pick-up
portion is provided in the second housing, the user can freely
change a photographing direction even in a state where the image
pick-up device is placed.
[1303] According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect,
the first image pick-up portion may be provided in an outer surface
of the second housing when folded.
[1304] According to this aspect, since the first image pick-up
portion is provided in the second housing, the image pick-up
direction can readily be changed by changing an angle of the second
housing with respect to the first housing. Further, since the first
image pick-up portion is provided in the outer surface of the
second housing, photographing in a direction the same as the
line-of-sight of the user can be carried out.
[1305] According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect,
the first image pick-up portion may be arranged in the outer
surface of the second housing, on a side more distant from the
coupling portion than a center thereof in an up-down direction.
Here, the first housing and the second housing are vertically
coupled to each other, and a direction in which the first housing
and the second housing are coupled to each other is defined as the
up-down direction. Further, a direction of a shaft by which the
first housing and the second housing are coupled to each other is
defined as a left-right direction. For example, when the first
housing has a horizontally long shape, a longitudinal direction of
the first housing may be defined as a left-right direction.
[1306] Since the user presses the photographing button provided on
the side surface of the first housing with an index finger as
described above, the index finger may be located within an image
pick-up range of the first image pick-up portion, depending on a
position of the first image pick-up portion. In contrast, according
to the feature of (2-3) above, since the first image pick-up
portion is located on a side distant from the connection portion
with the first housing, the index finger can be prevented from
being located within the image pick-up range of the first image
pick-up portion.
[1307] According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect, in
the image pick-up device, first and second buttons may be provided
on left and right ends of the side surface respectively, as at
least one photographing button.
[1308] According to this aspect, since the photographing buttons
are provided on the left and right ends of the side surface of the
first housing respectively, the user can easily press the
photographing button even when the user holds the image pick-up
device with either a right hand or a left hand. Thus, according to
the feature of (2-4) above, the user can easily perform the
photographing operation regardless of handedness.
[1309] According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect,
the image pick-up device may further include a second image pick-up
portion (inner camera 23). The second image pick-up portion is
provided substantially at a center in a left-right direction of a
device main surface (the operation surface) formed by the inner
surface of the first housing and an inner surface of the second
housing when the image pick-up device is opened.
[1310] According to this aspect, since the second image pick-up
portion is provided on the device main surface, image pick-up in a
direction toward the user by the second image pick-up portion can
be carried out. Further, since the second image pick-up portion is
provided substantially at the center of the device main surface in
the left-right direction, the user can easily adjust the image
pick-up device to an appropriate position in the left-right
direction, for example, in photographing the user
himself/herself.
[1311] According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect,
the image pick-up device may further include a plurality of
operation buttons (buttons 14A to 14F). The plurality of operation
buttons are provided on the inner surface of the first housing, on
a right side and a left side of the second image pick-up
portion.
[1312] According to this aspect, by providing the operation buttons
on the inner surface of the first housing, the user can hold the
image pick-up device while touching the operation buttons with
thumbs. Since the operation buttons are provided on the outer side
of the second image pick-up portion (in the left-right direction),
the thumbs of the user come in contact at positions on the outer
side of the second image pick-up portion. Thus, according to the
feature of (2-6) above, a possibility that the thumbs are located
within an image pick-up range of the second image pick-up portion
can be lowered (naturally, without particularly making the user
aware of such a fact).
[1313] According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect,
the image pick-up device may further include a display portion
(lower LCD 12) and a plurality of operation buttons (buttons 14A to
14F). The display portion has a display screen substantially at a
center of the inner surface of the first housing in a left-right
direction. The plurality of operation buttons are provided on the
inner surface of the first housing, on a left side and a right side
of the display screen.
[1314] According to this aspect, by providing the operation buttons
on the inner surface of the first housing, the user can hold the
image pick-up device while touching the operation buttons with
thumbs. Here, since the operation buttons are provided on the left
and right sides of the display portion, the thumbs of the user come
in contact at positions on the outer side of the display portion.
Thus, according to the feature of (2-7) above, the thumbs are
prevented from entering the display screen of the display portion
and disturbing display (naturally, without particularly making the
user aware of such a fact).
[1315] According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect,
the image pick-up device may further include a display portion
(lower LCD 12), a coordinate input portion (touch panel 13), and a
control unit (CPU 31). The display portion has a display screen
provided in the inner surface of the first housing. The coordinate
input portion is an input device through which coordinates on the
display screen can be input. The control unit has a prescribed
image displayed on the display screen, and causes recording of an
image picked-up by the first image pick-up portion when an input in
an area of the prescribed image is provided through coordinate
input means.
[1316] According to this aspect, the user can perform a
photographing operation through the coordinate input portion
provided on the inner surface of the first housing. Thus, the user
can easily perform a photographing operation even when the image
pick-up device is placed, with the outer surface of the first
housing facing downward. Thus, as a photographing operation using
the coordinate input portion can be performed, it is unnecessary to
operate the photographing button with an index finger and the
photographing operation can easily be performed in various holding
manners (for example, in a holding manner in which the second
housing is located on a lower side).
[1317] According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect,
the control unit may have the prescribed image displayed
substantially at a center of the first housing in a left-right
direction.
[1318] According to this aspect, since the prescribed image to be
touched when the user performs a photographing operation is
displayed substantially at the center of the first housing, the
user can easily perform an operation in operating the touch panel
with either a right hand or a left hand. Thus, according to this
aspect, even in performing a photographing operation in a state
where the image pick-up device is placed with the outer surface of
the first housing facing downward, the user can easily perform the
photographing operation regardless of handedness.
[1319] According to a more preferred aspect of the third aspect,
the first housing may have a length in a left-right direction not
smaller than 100 mm and not larger than 150 mm and a length in an
up-down direction not smaller than 60 mm and not larger than 90
mm.
[1320] According to this aspect, by setting a length of the first
housing to an appropriate length, that is, by setting the length of
the first housing in the left-right direction not smaller than 100
mm and not larger than 150 mm and the length of the first housing
in the up-down direction not smaller than 60 mm and not larger than
90 mm, the image pick-up device can easily be held when it is held
with either one hand or both hands. In other words, according to
this aspect, difficulty in holding the image pick-up device with
one hand because of its too long a length in the left-right
direction or with both hands because of its too short a length in
the left-right direction is not likely. Further, since the first
housing has such a length in the up-down direction that the first
housing fits into a palm, it is easy for the user to hold the image
pick-up device in holding the image pick-up device with either one
hand or both hands.
[1321] <Fourth Aspect>
[1322] According to the fourth aspect of the present invention, an
image pick-up device including a first housing (lower housing 11),
a second housing (upper housing 21), a first display portion (lower
LCD 12), a second display portion (upper LCD 22), an image pick-up
portion (inner camera 23), and an audio input portion (microphone
42) is provided. The second housing has a lower side connected to
an upper side of the first housing such that the first and second
housings are foldable. The first display portion has a display
screen provided in an inner surface of the first housing when
folded. The second display portion has a display screen provided in
an inner surface of the second housing when folded. The image
pick-up portion is provided in the inner surface of the second
housing, between the display screen of the first display portion
and the display screen of the second display portion. The audio
input portion is provided in the inner surface of the second
housing, between the display screen of the first display portion
and the display screen of the second display portion. According to
this aspect, the following fourth problem can be solved.
[1323] (Fourth Problem)
[1324] As in the portable instruments described in Japanese Patent
Laying-Open No. 2004-274304 (Patent Document 2), Japanese Patent
Laying-Open No. 2005-184060 (Patent Document 11), and Japanese
Patent Laying-Open No. 2007-201727 (Patent Document 12) above, in
the structure in which a screen is provided in each of the inner
surface and the outer surface of the housing, the user can look at
only one screen at a time. Accordingly, an amount of information
that can be presented to the user at a time is less. As a result,
the user cannot obtain (view) sufficient information in image
pick-up and audio input.
[1325] Meanwhile, in the telephones of Japanese Patent Laying-Open
No. 2006-311224 (Patent Document 1) and Japanese Patent Laying-Open
No. 09-247634 (Patent Document 13) above, as a user can look at two
screens at a time, an amount of information that can be presented
to the user at a time is large. In these telephones, however, since
positions of the camera and the microphone are inappropriate, it is
difficult to carry out image pick-up and audio input for the
following reasons.
[1326] In the telephones of Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.
2006-311224 (Patent Document 1) and Japanese Patent Laying-Open No.
09-247634 (Patent Document 13) above, the camera and the microphone
are provided in different housings and arranged at end portions of
the telephone, respectively. Specifically, the camera is arranged
at an end portion of one housing and the microphone is arranged at
an end portion of the other housing. Accordingly, in the case where
a folded angle is not 180.degree., an image pick-up direction of
the camera and a direction in which the microphone collects sound
are different from each other. Further, here, the direction in
which the microphone collects sound and a direction in which a
"screen of a housing provided with the camera" faces are different
from each other. A foldable device is meaningfully used, for
example, in such a manner that it is placed on a desk with a
folding angle thereof being set to a desired angle. Here, the
device is easily operated if setting is made such that a screen of
an upper housing faces the user. In these prior telephones,
however, in such a situation, the direction in which the microphone
collects sound is different from a direction of a mouth of the
user.
[1327] Further, in the telephones of Japanese Patent Laying-Open
No. 2006-311224 (Patent Document 1) and Japanese Patent Laying-Open
No. 09-247634 (Patent Document 13) above, the camera is provided at
the end portion of the housing, and two screens are both present
under the camera. Thus, in order to look at information displayed
on each screen from a state where the line-of-sight is directed
toward the camera, the line-of-sight should inevitably be moved
downward, and particularly, an amount of movement of user's
line-of-sight is great when information on a lower screen is
viewed. Further, in order for the user to equally look at
information displayed on two screens, user's line-of-sight is
desirably moved with reference to a center between the two screens.
In the telephone of Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2006-311224
(Patent Document 1) or Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 09-247634
(Patent Document 13) above, however, such a line-of-sight direction
and the photographing direction of the camera are different from
each other.
[1328] (Function and Effect According to Fourth Aspect)
[1329] According to the fourth aspect, in order to address the
fourth problem above, an image pick-up device with which it is easy
for a user to carry out image pick-up and audio input can be
provided.
[1330] Namely, according to the fourth aspect, since the image
pick-up portion and the audio input portion are provided between
the two screens, if the user faces the two screens in image pick-up
and audio input, the camera and the microphone are located in front
of the user. Therefore, the user can successfully achieve image
pick-up and audio input while facing the two screens (without
changing an orientation of user's face). Further, for example, in
picking up an image of the user himself/herself with the camera,
the user performs an image pick-up operation looking at the camera
while looking at the screen. According to the feature of (3-1)
above, since the camera is arranged between the two screens, the
user can minimize a distance of movement of his or her
line-of-sight between the camera and the screen in the image
pick-up operation, and the image pick-up operation while looking at
the two screens is facilitated.
[1331] Further, according to the feature of (3-1) above, since the
camera and the microphone are arranged substantially at the same
position in the second housing, the user naturally turns his or her
face to the microphone if the user faces the camera in image
pick-up. Thus, user's voice can easily be collected by the audio
input portion and sensed accurately.
[1332] According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect,
the image pick-up device may further include an operation button
(buttons 14A to 14F) provided in the first housing.
[1333] According to this aspect, since the operation button and the
microphone are provided in different housings, collection by the
microphone of operation sound (noise) generated when the operation
button is operated is less likely, and desired voice and sound can
accurately be detected by the microphone. Further, according to the
feature of (3-2) above, since the operation button is provided in
the first housing, it is considered that the user holds the first
housing in image pick-up. Thus, the user can easily change an image
pick-up direction to a desired direction by turning the second
housing to the desired direction without changing his or her
position for holding the image pick-up device (without moving the
first housing).
[1334] According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect,
the second housing may have, in its lower side, a shaft portion
(21A) pivotably coupled to the upper side of the first housing.
Here, the image pick-up portion and the audio input portion are
arranged in the shaft portion.
[1335] According to this aspect, by arranging the image pick-up
portion and the audio input portion in the shaft portion for
achieving a foldable structure, a distance between the two screens
can be shorter than in the case where the image pick-up portion and
the audio input portion are arranged between the screen of the
second display portion and the shaft portion. Thus, the two screens
can be arranged closer to each other, and it becomes easier for the
user to look at the two screens.
[1336] According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect,
may be provided substantially at a center of the second housing in
a left-right direction.
[1337] According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect,
since the image pick-up portion and the audio input portion are
arranged substantially at the center also in the left-right
direction, it becomes easier for the user to achieve image pick-up
and audio input.
[1338] According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect,
may be arranged substantially at a center in a left-right
direction. Here, the audio input portion is arranged at a position
displaced from a position of the image pick-up portion in the
left-right direction.
[1339] According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect,
by arranging the image pick-up portion at the center in the
left-right direction, for example, it becomes easier for the user
to pick up an image of the user himself/herself such that he/she is
located at a center of an image pick-up region. In addition, even
if the audio input portion is arranged at a position slightly
displaced from the center, it does not have a significant effect on
detection accuracy. Further, according to this aspect, since the
image pick-up portion and the audio input portion can be juxtaposed
to each other in the left-right direction, a distance between the
two screens can be shorter than in the case where the image pick-up
portion and the audio input portion are juxtaposed to each other in
an up-down direction. Thus, according to this aspect, the image
pick-up portion and the audio input portion can be arranged such
that it becomes easier to look at the two screens while ease of
image pick-up and audio input is maintained.
[1340] According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect,
the image pick-up device may further include audio output portions
(speakers) provided in the inner surface of the second housing, on
opposing sides of the display screen of the second display portion
in a left-right direction, respectively.
[1341] According to this aspect, when the user holds the image
pick-up device so as to face the two screens, the audio output
portions are arranged in positions corresponding to left and right
ears (in positions on both left and right sides of user's face),
respectively. Thus, a stereo effect can effectively be
obtained.
[1342] According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, a
first housing (lower housing 11), a second housing (upper housing
21), a first display portion (lower LCD 12), a second display
portion (upper LCD 22), an image pick-up portion (inner camera 23),
and an audio output portion (speaker) are provided. The second
housing has a lower side connected to an upper side of the first
housing such that the first and second housings are foldable. The
first display portion has a display screen provided in an inner
surface of the first housing when folded. The second display
portion has a display screen provided in an inner surface of the
second housing when folded. The image pick-up portion is provided
in the inner surface of the second housing, between the screen of
the first display portion and the screen of the second display
portion. The audio output portions are provided in the inner
surface of the second housing, on opposing sides of the display
screen of the second display portion in a left-right direction,
respectively.
[1343] According to this aspect, as in the preceding aspect, when
the user holds the image pick-up device so as to face the two
screens, a stereo effect can effectively be obtained. Further, as
in the first invention, when the user faces the two screens, the
camera is located in front of the user. Thus, the user can
successfully pick up an image while facing the two screens (without
changing an orientation of user's face).
[1344] According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, a
first housing (lower housing 11), a second housing (upper housing
21), a first display portion (lower LCD 12), a second display
portion (upper LCD 22), and an image pick-up portion (inner camera
23) are included. The second housing has a lower side connected to
an upper side of the first housing such that the first and second
housings are foldable. The first display portion has a display
screen provided in an inner surface of the first housing when
folded. The second display portion has a display screen provided in
an inner surface of the second housing when folded. The image
pick-up portion is provided in a central portion in the left-right
direction, and between the display screen of the first display
portion and the display screen of the second display portion when
the first housing and the second housing are opened. According to
this aspect, by providing the camera at the center between the two
screens, movement of the user's line-of-sight from a state where
the user looks at the camera, for obtaining information displayed
on the upper screen and information displayed on the lower screen,
can be minimized. Further, even when the user looks at the
information on any of the upper screen and the lower screen, a
difference between the photographing direction of the camera and
the user's line-of-sight is small, and an image of the user facing
the camera can be taken.
[1345] According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect,
an audio input portion (microphone 42) provided in the central
portion in the left-right direction and between the display screen
of the first display portion and the display screen of the second
display portion when the first housing and the second housing are
opened may further be included.
[1346] According to this aspect, since the camera and the
microphone are arranged substantially at the same position in the
second housing, the user naturally turns his or her face to the
microphone if the user faces the camera in image pick-up. Thus,
user's voice can easily be collected by the audio input portion and
sensed accurately.
[1347] According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect,
may be provided at a center in the left-right direction and between
the display screen of the first display portion and the display
screen of the second display portion when the first housing and the
second housing are opened. Here, the audio input portion is
provided in proximity to the image pick-up portion.
[1348] According to this aspect, the image pick-up portion and the
audio input portion can be arranged such that it becomes easier to
look at the two screens while ease of image pick-up and audio input
is maintained.
[1349] According to an aspect similar to the fourth aspect of the
present invention, an image pick-up device is structured to be
capable of transformation between a first form in which a first
housing and a second housing are stacked on each other and a second
form in which the first housing and the second housing are opened.
The image pick-up device includes at least one photographing button
provided on a side surface of the first housing with an inner
surface thereof in the first form being assumed as a front surface,
on a side where the second housing is located in the second form,
for giving an instruction to record an image picked-up by an image
pick-up portion.
[1350] According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, a
second image pick-up portion may be provided substantially at a
center in a left-right direction of a device main surface in the
second form. Here, the image pick-up device further includes a
plurality of operation buttons provided on an inner surface of the
first housing in the first form, on the left side and the right
side relative to the second image pick-up portion.
[1351] According to a more preferred aspect of the fourth aspect, a
display screen may be provided substantially at a center in the
left-right direction of the inner surface of the first housing in
the first form. Here, the image pick-up device further includes
operation buttons provided on the inner surface of the first
housing, on the left side and the right side of the display
screen.
[1352] <Fifth Aspect>
[1353] According to the fifth aspect of the present invention, a
launch program (61) executed by a computer (CPU 31) of an
information processing device (10) including image pick-up means
(cameras 23 and 25), capable of storing a plurality of application
programs (53 to 56), and storing in advance a prescribed
photographing application program (53) for performing photographing
with the image pick-up means as the application program, is
provided. The launch program is a program for selectively launching
an application program desired by a user from among the plurality
of application programs above. The launch program causes the
computer to function as: first launch operation acceptance means
(CPU 31 performing steps SA6 and SA11; hereinafter, steps are
indicated only with step numbers); first launch means (SA12);
photographing processing means (SA10); photographing enabling
operation acceptance means (SA6, SA9); photographing operation
acceptance means (SA24, SA25); second launch operation acceptance
means (SA24, SA28); and second launch means (SA30). The first
launch operation acceptance means accepts a first launch operation
for selectively launching the plurality of application programs.
The first launch means launches an application program selected in
the first launch operation from among the plurality of application
programs when the first launch operation is performed. The
photographing processing means performs photographing processing
for storing an image picked-up by the image pick-up means in
storage means in the information processing device in accordance
with a prescribed photographing operation. The photographing
enabling operation acceptance means accepts a photographing
enabling operation for causing a photographing enabled state in
which the photographing processing by the photographing processing
means can be performed in accordance with the photographing
operation in a launch acceptance state of accepting the first
launch operation. The photographing operation acceptance means
accepts the photographing operation when the photographing enabling
operation is performed. The second launch operation acceptance
means accepts a second launch operation for launching the
photographing application program in the photographing enabled
state. The second launch means launches the photographing
application program when the second launch operation is
performed.
[1354] According to this aspect, the fifth problem below can be
solved.
[1355] (Fifth Problem)
[1356] The first and second application programs above executable
in the information processing device described in "`Chotto Shot
Camera Instruction Manual` published by Sony Computer Entertainment
Inc. on Nov. 2, 2006" (Non-Patent Document 1) above have different
functions (although having also common functions). Therefore, in a
state where the user performs photographing by executing any one of
the application programs, a case where a user desires (or needs) to
use a function attained only by the other application program is
assumed. Here, in order to use the desired function, the user has
to perform a troublesome operation of ending execution of one of
the application programs above, thereafter selecting the other
application program in a menu screen or the like, and launching the
other application program.
[1357] (Function and Effect According to Fifth Aspect)
[1358] According to the fifth aspect, in order to address the fifth
problem above, a user-friendly information processing device
capable of performing a plurality of types of photographing
functions with a simple operation can be provided.
[1359] According to the fifth aspect, in the launch acceptance
state, the user can launch a selected application program by
performing the first launch operation, and can perform the
photographing processing by the photographing processing means by
performing the photographing enabling operation. Therefore, even in
the launch acceptance state for launching the application program,
the user can easily and quickly activate a function of the
photographing processing means. In addition, in the photographing
enabled state, the photographing application program can be
launched by performing the second launch operation. Therefore, even
during the photographing processing by the photographing processing
means, the user can easily and quickly launch the photographing
application program by performing the second launch operation. In
other words, according to the present embodiment, when the user
desires to use a function (of the photographing application
program) not provided by the photographing processing means during
use of a photographing function of the photographing processing
means, the user can easily and quickly use the function by
performing the second launch operation. As described above,
according to the first invention, both a photographing function of
the photographing processing means and a photographing function of
the photographing application program can be performed with a
simple operation, and a user-friendly information processing device
can be provided.
[1360] Further, according to the fifth aspect, during performance
of the photographing function by the photographing processing
means, the photographing application program can directly be
launched. In other words, since the other photographing function
(the photographing function attained by the photographing
application program) can easily be activated from one photographing
function (the photographing function attained by the photographing
processing means), the user can be led to use the other function
through use of one function.
[1361] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, a
manner of operation of the photographing enabling operation may be
different from that of the first launch operation.
[1362] According to this aspect, the photographing function
attained by the photographing processing means can easily be
performed by an operation different from the first launch operation
for launching the selected application program.
[1363] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect,
the photographing processing means may have only a part of a
photographing function enabled as a result of execution of the
photographing application program.
[1364] According to this aspect, the photographing function of the
photographing processing means which is a relatively simple
function can quickly be activated from the launch acceptance state,
and the photographing application program having more functions can
immediately be launched during performance of the photographing
function of the photographing processing means. Here, the user can
be caused to use the information processing device in such an order
that the information processing device is initially operated based
on the photographing function of the photographing processing means
which is the simple function and then various photographing
functions are utilized based on the photographing application
program having more functions. By using the information processing
device in such an order, the user can use the information
processing device in a manner gradually getting used to the
operation of the information processing device.
[1365] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect,
the launch program above may further cause the computer to function
as image display means (SA5) for causing display means of the
information processing device to display the picked-up image
(stored image) stored in the storage means in the launch acceptance
state (FIG. 23).
[1366] According to this aspect, an image taken in the past is
displayed in the launch acceptance state. Therefore, by taking a
picture of which display is desired, the user can customize a
screen (menu screen) in the launch acceptance state for each user
(for each information processing device). Further, a user who
touches (uses) the information processing device for the first time
can be made aware that the information processing device has the
photographing function.
[1367] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect,
the image display means may automatically change at prescribed
timing, a picked-up image to be displayed on the display means
among a plurality of picked-up images stored in the storage
means.
[1368] According to this aspect, by changing content of a displayed
image at prescribed timing, variation in the menu screen is
produced and the user can be prevented from getting bored.
[1369] In a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, the image
display means may change a picked-up image to be displayed on the
display means, at timing of launch of the information processing
device.
[1370] According to this aspect, an image displayed in the launch
acceptance state is changed each time the information processing
device is started up. Thus, the user has things to look forward to
(about "which image will be displayed") at the time of start-up.
Further, from the viewpoint of the supplier of the information
processing device, by giving the user such things to look forward
to, the user can be prompted to start up the information processing
device (that is, to use the information processing device).
[1371] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect,
the image display means may cause the display means of the
information processing device to display in the launch acceptance
state a picked-up image last stored in an immediately preceding
photographing enabled state.
[1372] According to this aspect, an image taken in the
photographing enabled state is displayed in the launch acceptance
state immediately after the end of that photographing enabled
state. Therefore, in the launch acceptance state, the user can
check an image last taken in the photographing enabled state.
[1373] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect,
the launch program above further causes the computer to function as
first transition means (SA21) and second transition means (SA4).
The first transition means ends the launch acceptance state and
causes transition to the photographing enabled state in accordance
with the photographing enabling operation. The second transition
means ends the photographing enabled state and causes transition to
the launch acceptance state in accordance with a prescribed
operation in the photographing enabled state.
[1374] According to this aspect, since the photographing operation
is not accepted in the launch acceptance state, the user does not
accidentally perform the photographing operation in the launch
acceptance state. Further, since the launch acceptance state has
ended in the photographing enabled state, display for causing the
user to perform the first launch operation (for example, display of
an image indicating an application program) is unnecessary.
Therefore, a display area can effectively be used, for example, by
displaying a picked-up image on the screen of the display device.
Further, by not allowing acceptance of the first launch operation
in the photographing enabled state, an operation in the
photographing enabled state can be simplified and an operation is
easier for the user.
[1375] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect, in
the second transition means, the prescribed operation above may be
the photographing operation.
[1376] According to this aspect, when the photographing operation
is performed in the photographing enabled state, the photographing
enabled state ends (after the photographing processing is
performed). In other words, once the user performs the
photographing operation in the photographing enabled state, the
state of the information processing device returns to the launch
acceptance state. Accordingly, even a novice user who has not read
an instruction manual or the like can naturally return to the
launch acceptance state by performing the photographing operation.
Therefore, a state where "the user does not know how to return from
the photographing enabled state to the launch acceptance state" can
be prevented and a user-friendly information processing device can
be provided.
[1377] According to this aspect, since the state of the information
processing device makes transition from the photographing enabled
state to the launch acceptance state after the photographing
operation, an image representing a result of photographing cannot
be displayed in the photographing enabled state. Here, when the
invention according to the previous aspect and the invention
according to the present aspect are combined, the image
representing the result of photographing that could not be
displayed in the photographing enabled state can be shown to the
user in the launch acceptance state immediately after the
photographing enabled state, which is particularly effective.
[1378] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect,
the photographing enabling operation may be performed by performing
an operation the same as the photographing operation.
[1379] According to this aspect, since the photographing enabling
operation and the photographing operation are performed by
performing the same operation, a series of operations for making
transition to the photographing enabled state and further
performing photographing can be performed by performing one type of
operation, and thus the series of operations can easily be
performed. Further, when the invention according to the previous
aspect and the invention according to the present aspect are
combined, transition from the launch acceptance state to the
photographing enabled state and transition from the photographing
enabled state to the launch acceptance state can be made by
performing the same operation. Therefore, even if the user
accidentally performs the photographing enabling operation or
performs the photographing enabling operation without fully
understanding a manner of operation to cause transition to the
photographing enabled state, the user can return to the original
state (the launch acceptance state) by performing the same
operation again. Thus, a state where "the user does not know how to
return from the photographing enabled state to the launch
acceptance state" can be prevented and a user-friendly information
processing device can be provided.
[1380] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect,
the photographing enabling operation and the photographing
operation may be an operation to press a prescribed button.
[1381] According to this aspect, the user can perform the
photographing enabling operation and the photographing operation
with a simple operation. Therefore, the photographing function of
the photographing processing means can be activated with the simple
operation and a picked-up image can be stored with the simple
operation.
[1382] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect,
the information processing device may include coordinate input
means (touch panel 13) through which a coordinate position on a
screen of a display device (lower LCD 12) can be input.
[1383] Here, the first launch operation acceptance means causes
display on the screen of at least a plurality of images (icon
images 71a to 71c) among images corresponding to the plurality of
application programs respectively, changes a displayed image in
accordance with an operation to scroll the screen, and accepts as
the first launch operation, an input to a position of the displayed
image through the coordinate input means. The first launch means
launches an application program corresponding to an icon image
indicated by the input accepted by the first launch operation
acceptance means. The second launch operation acceptance means
causes display of an image (72) indicating the photographing
application program at a prescribed position on the screen, and
accepts as the second launch operation, an input to the prescribed
position through the coordinate input means. The second launch
means launches the photographing application program in accordance
with the input accepted by the second launch operation acceptance
means.
[1384] According to this aspect, in the launch acceptance state, by
performing an operation to select a position of one image from
among a plurality of images indicating respective application
programs through the coordinate input means, the application
program can be launched. In the photographing enabled state, by
performing an operation to designate a prescribed position at which
an image indicating a photographing application is displayed
through the coordinate input means, the photographing application
program can be launched. Further, in the launch acceptance state,
for facilitating selection from images indicating the plurality of
application programs respectively, a displayed image (an
application program) is changed by performing a scroll operation.
Thus, for launching a desired application program in the launch
acceptance state, the user may have to perform an operation to
scroll the screen and an operation to designate an image. On the
other hand, in the photographing enabled state, since an image
indicating the photographing application program is always
displayed at a prescribed position, the user can always easily
launch the photographing application program by performing only an
operation to designate the image.
[1385] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect,
when the second launch operation is performed, the second launch
means may cause the computer to execute the photographing
application program, using at least a part of information set in
the photographing processing by the photographing processing means
as an argument to be passed to the photographing application
program.
[1386] According to this aspect, setting in the photographing
processing by the photographing processing means is reflected also
in processing based on the photographing application program. Thus,
when transition from the photographing processing by the
photographing processing means to the processing based on the
photographing application program is made, the user can similarly
perform an operation and there is no need to change the setting.
Thus, according to the thirteenth invention, a further
user-friendly information processing device can be provided.
[1387] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect,
the program above may further cause the computer to function as
first-time start-up determination means (SA1) and photographing
leading means (SA2). The first-time start-up determination means
determines whether the information processing device is started up
for the first time or not before acceptance of the first launch
operation after start-up of the information processing device. When
it is determined that the information processing device is started
up for the first time, the photographing leading means sets a state
of the information processing device to the photographing enabled
state or provides display allowing the user to select whether or
not to set the photographing enabled state.
[1388] According to this aspect, when the information processing
device is started up for the first time, the user can initially be
caused to actually experience the photographing operation, so that
a novice user can get used to the photographing operation. Further,
when the invention according to the previous aspect and the
invention according to the present aspect are combined, it is the
photographing processing by the photographing processing means
having a relatively simple function that is performed when the
information processing device is started up for the first time.
Therefore, since the user performs the photographing operation only
with a simple function when the information processing device is
started up for the first time, the user can relatively easily
perform the photographing operation even when he/she operates the
information processing device for the first time.
[1389] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect,
the photographing application program may have a function to
perform processing for storing the picked-up image in the storage
means and a function to view a picked-up image stored as a result
of the photographing processing of the photographing processing
means or of the processing based on the photographing application
program.
[1390] According to this aspect, by using the photographing
application program, the user can view an image taken based on any
of the photographing function of the photographing processing means
and the photographing application program.
[1391] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect,
the photographing processing means and the photographing
application program may be capable of performing a function common
to a function of the photographing processing means and a function
enabled as a result of execution of the photographing application
program, in response to the same operation by the user.
[1392] According to this aspect, since the user can perform the
same operation for the same function even when a program executed
for photographing is changed, a user-friendly operation system can
be provided.
[1393] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect,
the launch program may include a launch function program (51) for
launching the application program and a photographing function
program (52) for causing the computer to function as the
photographing processing means. Here, the photographing function
program has a data size smaller than that of the photographing
application program.
[1394] According to this aspect, by setting the photographing
function program having a smaller data size as a program that can
be launched in the launch acceptance state, a program for
photographing can quickly be launched in the launch acceptance
state.
[1395] According to a more preferred aspect of the fifth aspect,
the launch program may include a launch function program (51) for
launching the application program and a photographing function
program (52) for causing the computer to function as the
photographing processing means. Here, the launch program above may
further cause the computer to function as read means (SA4) for
reading, at timing of execution of the launch function program, the
photographing function program along with the launch function
program in prescribed storage means for storing a program executed
by the computer, after start-up of the information processing
device.
[1396] According to this aspect, by reading the launch function
program and the photographing function program together, the
photographing function program can quickly be launched in the
launch acceptance state.
[1397] According to an alternative aspect of the fifth aspect of
the present invention, an information processing device including
each means in the aspects above may be provided.
[1398] <Sixth Aspect>
[1399] According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, an
image communication system including a plurality of image
communication devices (1) each having image storage means (28, 32,
34) for storing prescribed images, and allowing transmission and
reception of the prescribed images among the plurality of image
communication devices is provided. An image communication device
(10t) serving to transmit an image among the plurality of image
communication devices further includes transmitter information
transmission control means (CPU 31 performing step SC63;
hereinafter steps are indicated only with step numbers). The
transmitter information transmission control means transmits as
transmitter information (transmitter data) indicating a
transmitter, its own identification information to other
unspecified image communication devices. An image communication
device (10r) serving to receive an image among the plurality of
image communication devices further includes transmitter
information reception means (SC84), selection means (SC85), and
destination information transmission control means (SC86, SC92).
The transmitter information reception means receives the
transmitter information. The selection means provides display
indicating the transmitter (Nt1 to Nt3) on display means (12) based
on the received transmitter information, and allows a user to
select whether or not to receive an image from the image
communication device that has transmitted the transmitter
information. The destination information transmission control means
transmits as destination information (receiver data) indicating a
destination, its own identification information to the image
communication device selected by the selection means as the
transmitter from which an image is to be received. The image
communication device serving to transmit an image further includes
destination information reception control means (SC64), destination
determination means (SC64, SC65), and image transmission means
(SC69). The destination information reception control means
receives the destination information. The destination determination
means determines the image communication device to serve as the
destination based on the received destination information. The
image transmission means transmits at least one of images stored in
the image storage means to the destination determined by the
destination determination means. The image communication device
serving to receive an image further includes image reception means
(SC90) and image storage control means (SC90). The image reception
means receives an image transmitted by the image transmission
means. The image storage control means causes the image storage
means to store the image received by the image reception means.
Transmission of the transmitter information from the transmitter
information transmission control means to other unspecified image
communication devices includes, for example, transmission of the
transmitter information without specifying a destination and
transmission of the transmitter information to an unidentified
image communication device in accordance with a request
therefrom.
[1400] According to this aspect, the following sixth problem can be
solved.
[1401] (Sixth Problem)
[1402] The electronic camera disclosed in Japanese Patent
Laying-Open No. 10-341388 (Patent Document 14) communicates through
infrared, and therefore the transmission-end electronic camera and
the reception-end electronic camera should be arranged to face each
other. Further, when a plurality of transmission-end electronic
cameras are present in a communication range of the reception-end
electronic camera, the reception-end electronic camera is not
allowed to select a camera from among the plurality of
transmission-end electronic cameras.
[1403] (Function and Effect According to Sixth Aspect)
[1404] According to the sixth aspect, in order to address the sixth
problem above, an image communication system, an image
communication device, and an image communication program allowing a
user to receive an image from a desired transmission-end device
when images are transmitted and received among devices are
provided.
[1405] According to the sixth aspect of the present invention, the
image communication device serving to receive an image is allowed
to select whether or not to receive an image depending on a
transmitter, thereby preventing reception of an image from an
unintended transmitter. On the other hand, the image communication
device serving to transmit an image can invite receivers to which
an image is to be distributed, without specifying in advance a
device to receive an image, and distribute the image.
[1406] According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect,
the transmitter information reception means is capable of receiving
a plurality of pieces of transmitter information transmitted to the
unspecified image communication devices. The selection means
provides display of each piece of transmitter information in
accordance with each piece of received transmitter information on
the display means, and causes a user to select any transmitter
information.
[1407] According to this aspect, the image communication device
serving to receive an image is allowed to select a transmitter from
which image data is to be received from among a plurality of
transmitters. For example, when a plurality of image communication
devices serving as transmitters are present, the image
communication device serving to receive an image is allowed to
select an image communication device desired by a user from among
the plurality of image communication devices, and to receive an
image.
[1408] According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect,
the image communication device serving to transmit an image further
includes transmitter display control means (SC65, FIG. 51). The
transmitter display control means causes display means (12) of the
image communication device serving to transmit an image to provide
indication indicating the image communication device (Nr1 to Nr3)
requesting image transmission, based on the destination information
received from the image communication device serving to receive an
image.
[1409] According to this aspect, a user of the image communication
device serving to transmit an image can know the destination image
communication device to which an image is to be transmitted.
[1410] According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect,
the transmitter information includes transmitter user information
(Dc) that can be set by a user of the image communication device
serving to transmit an image. The selection means causes the
display means of the image communication device serving to receive
an image to display the transmitter user information included in
the transmitter information as information indicating the image
communication device transmitting the transmitter information.
[1411] According to this aspect, a user of the image communication
device serving to transmit an image can express its characteristic,
and the image communication device serving to receive the image
also can easily identify the image communication device serving to
transmit the image.
[1412] According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect,
the destination information includes destination user information
(Dc) that can be set by a user of the image communication device
serving to receive an image, and the transmitter display control
means causes the display means of the image communication device
serving to transmit an image to display the transmitter user
information included in the destination information as notification
indicating the image communication device requesting image
transmission.
[1413] According to this aspect, a user of the image communication
device serving to receive an image can express its characteristic,
and the image communication device serving to transmit an image
also can easily identify the image communication device serving to
receive an image.
[1414] According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect,
the image communication device serving to transmit an image further
includes image selection means (SC66) for selecting an image to be
transmitted to the image communication device that has transmitted
the destination information, in accordance with a user's operation,
after reception of the destination information. The image
transmission means transmits the image selected by the image
selection means to the image communication device that has
transmitted the destination information.
[1415] According to this aspect, an image desired by a user of the
image communication device serving to transmit an image can be
selected and transmitted. Further, after the image communication
device serving to receive an image and the image communication
device serving to transmit an image are determined, an image to be
transmitted from the image communication device serving to transmit
an image to the image communication device is selected, so that the
image communication device serving to transmit the image can change
a type and the number of images to be transmitted to the image
communication device serving to receive an image.
[1416] According to a more preferred aspect, the image selection
means includes image-to-be-transmitted display control means (FIG.
52). The image-to-be-transmitted display control means urges a user
to select an image to be transmitted to the image communication
device serving to receive an image, from among images stored in the
image storage means, as images to be transmitted to the image
communication device serving to receive an image, by displaying
these images on the display means of the image communication device
serving to transmit an image.
[1417] According to this aspect, the display means displays images
stored as images to be transmitted, so that selection of an image
by a user of the image communication device serving to transmit an
image is facilitated.
[1418] According to a more preferred aspect, the image storage
means of the image communication device serving to transmit an
image includes embedded storage means (34) and removable storage
means (28). The embedded storage means is embedded in a main body
of the image communication device. The removable storage means is
removably attached to the main body of the image communication
device. The image selection means includes storage destination
selection means (SC50). The storage destination selection means
selects any one of the embedded storage means and the removable
storage means. The image selection means selects an image to be
transmitted to the image communication device serving to receive an
image from among images stored in the storage means selected by the
storage destination selection means, in accordance with a user's
operation.
[1419] According to this aspect, an image to be transmitted can be
limited to an image stored in predetermined storage means.
[1420] According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect,
the image communication device serving to receive an image further
includes determination means and image transmission continuation
request transmission means. The determination means determines,
after the image reception means receives an image transmitted from
the image communication device serving to transmit an image,
whether or not to further receive an image from the image
communication device serving to transmit an image. The image
transmission continuation request transmission means transmits an
image transmission continuation request to the image communication
device serving to transmit an image that has been selected by the
selection means, when the determination means determines further
reception of an image. Receiving the image transmission
continuation request, the image transmission means transmits an
image to the image communication device that has transmitted the
image transmission continuation request.
[1421] According to this aspect, the image communication device
serving to transmit an image can transmit images in a stepwise
fashion to the image communication device serving to receive an
image.
[1422] According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect,
the image communication device serving to transmit an image further
includes image selection means. After receiving the image
transmission continuation request, the image selection means
selects an image to be transmitted to the image communication
device that has transmitted the image transmission continuation
request, in accordance with a user's operation. Receiving the image
transmission continuation request, the image transmission means
transmits the image selected by the image selection means to the
image communication device that has transmitted the image
transmission continuation request.
[1423] According to this aspect, an image to be transmitted can be
selected and transmitted each time a request is issued from the
reception end.
[1424] According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect,
the image communication device serving to transmit an image further
includes limitation means. The limitation means limits the number
of images to be transmitted at a time by the image transmission
means.
[1425] According to this aspect, as images in number not larger
than a prescribed number are transmitted at a time from the image
communication device serving as a transmitter, the reception-end
device can receive images while confirming the number of received
images and determine whether or not to continue reception based on
the number of received images.
[1426] According to a more preferred aspect, the determination
means determines whether or not to further receive an image from
the image communication device serving to transmit an image, in
accordance with a user's operation. The image communication device
serving to receive an image further includes reception end
notification means. The reception end notification means transmits
reception end notification to the image communication device
selected by the selection means when the determination means
determines not to receive an image. The image transmission means
transmits, each time the image transmission continuation request is
received, an image only to the image communication device that has
transmitted the image transmission continuation request, except for
the image communication device that has transmitted the reception
end notification.
[1427] According to this aspect, each image communication device
serving to receive an image can leave a group of devices to which
the image communication device serving to transmit an image
transmits an image, at timing desired by a user.
[1428] According to a more preferred aspect, the image
communication device serving to receive an image further includes
remaining capacity monitoring means. The remaining capacity
monitoring means monitors a remaining storage capacity of the image
storage means for additionally storing the image. The reception end
notification means transmits the reception end notification to the
image communication device selected by the selection means when the
remaining storage capacity is equal to or smaller than a prescribed
capacity.
[1429] According to this aspect, the image communication device
serving to receive an image can automatically leave a group of
devices to which the image communication device serving to transmit
an image transmits an image, based on a capacity for storing image
data.
[1430] According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect,
the image storage means of the image communication device serving
to receive an image further includes embedded storage means and
removable storage means. The embedded storage means is embedded in
a main body of the image communication device. The removable
storage means is removably attached to the main body of the image
communication device. The image communication device serving to
receive an image further includes storage means determination means
(SC50). The storage means determination means determines in advance
any one of the embedded storage means and the removable storage
means as storage means for storing the received image.
[1431] The image storage control means causes the storage means
determined by the storage means determination means to store an
image transmitted from the image communication device serving to
transmit an image.
[1432] According to this aspect, received image data can be stored
only in a predetermined storage means.
[1433] According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect,
the image communication device further includes image pick-up means
and photographing means. The photographing means causes the image
storage means to store an image picked-up by the image pick-up
means, in accordance with a user's prescribed operation. The image
transmission means transmits the image stored in the image storage
means by means of the photographing means.
[1434] According to this aspect, an image picked-up by the image
communication device can be transmitted and received.
[1435] According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, an
image communication device (10r) for receiving an image from
another image communication device is provided. The image
communication device includes: storage means; transmitter
information reception means; selection means; destination
information transmission control means; image reception means; and
image storage control means. The transmitter information reception
means receives from another image communication device,
identification information of another image communication device as
transmitter information indicating a transmitter. The selection
means causes display means to provide display indicating the
transmitter based on the received transmitter information, and
allows a user to select whether or not to receive an image from the
image communication device that has transmitted the transmitter
information. The destination information transmission control means
transmits as destination information indicating a destination, its
own identification information to the image communication device
selected by the selection means as the transmitter from which an
image is to be received. The image reception means receives an
image transmitted by the image communication device to which the
destination information has been transmitted. The image storage
control means causes the storage means to store the image received
by the image reception means.
[1436] According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, an
image communication device (10t) for transmitting an image to
another image communication device is provided. The image
communication device includes: image storage means; transmitter
information transmission control means; destination information
reception control means; destination determination means; and image
transmission means. The image storage means stores a prescribed
image. The transmitter information transmission control means
transmits as transmitter information indicating a transmitter, its
own identification information to other unspecified image
communication devices. The destination information reception
control means receives as destination information indicating a
destination, identification information of another image
communication device from another image communication device. The
destination determination means determines an image communication
device to serve as the destination based on the received
destination information. The image transmission means transmits at
least one of images stored in the image storage means to the
destination determined by the destination determination means.
[1437] According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, an
image communication device (1) for receiving an image from another
image communication device or transmitting an image to another
image communication device is provided. The image communication
device includes image storage means; and transmission/reception
selection means (SC51). The image storage means stores a prescribed
image. The transmission/reception selection means selects any of
reception of an image from another image communication device and
transmission of an image to another image communication device.
When the transmission/reception selection means selects reception
of an image from another image communication device, the image
communication device further includes: transmitter information
reception means; selection means; destination information
transmission control means; image reception means; and image
storage control means. The transmitter information reception means
receives identification information of another image communication
device from another image communication device as transmitter
information indicating a transmitter. The selection means causes
display means to provide display indicating the transmitter based
on the received transmitter information, and allows a user to
select whether or not to receive an image from the image
communication device that has transmitted the transmitter
information. The destination information transmission control means
transmits as destination information indicating a destination, its
own identification information to the image communication device
selected by the selection means as the transmitter from which an
image is to be received. The image reception means receives an
image transmitted from the image communication device to which the
destination information has been transmitted. The image storage
control means causes the image storage means to store the image
received by the image reception means. When the
transmission/reception selection means selects transmission of an
image to another image communication device, the image
communication device further includes: transmitter information
transmission control means; destination information reception
control means; destination determination means; and image
transmission means. The transmitter information transmission
control means transmits as transmitter information indicating a
transmitter, its own identification information to other
unspecified image communication devices. The destination
information reception control means receives identification
information of another image communication device from another
image communication device as the destination information
indicating the destination. The destination determination means
determines an image communication device to serve as the
destination, based on the received destination information. The
image transmission means transmits at least one of images stored in
the image storage means to the destination determined by the
destination determination means.
[1438] According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, an
image communication program executed by a computer (31) of a device
for receiving an image from another image communication device is
provided. The image communication program causes the computer to
function as: transmitter information reception means; selection
means; destination information transmission control means; image
reception means; and image storage control means. The transmitter
information reception means receives identification information of
another image communication device from another image communication
device as transmitter information indicating a transmitter. The
selection means causes display means to provide display indicating
the transmitter based on the received transmitter information, and
allows a user to select whether or not to receive an image from the
image communication device that has transmitted the transmitter
information. The destination information transmission control means
transmits as destination information indicating a destination, its
own identification information to the image communication device
selected by the selection means as the transmitter from which an
image is to be received. The image reception means receives an
image transmitted by the image communication device to which the
destination information has been transmitted. The image storage
control means causes a storage device to store the image received
by the image reception means.
[1439] According to a more preferred aspect of the sixth aspect, an
image communication program executed by a computer of a device for
receiving an image from another image communication device or
transmitting an image to another image communication device is
provided. A prescribed image is stored in a storage device of the
device. The image communication program causes the computer to
function as transmission/reception selection means. The
transmission/reception selection means selects any of reception of
an image from another image communication device and transmission
of an image to another image communication device. When the
transmission/reception selection means selects reception of an
image from another image communication device, the image
communication program causes the computer to further function as:
transmitter information reception means; selection means;
destination information transmission control means; image reception
means; and image storage control means. The transmitter information
reception means receives identification information of another
image communication device from another image communication device
as transmitter information indicating a transmitter. The selection
means causes display means to provide display indicating the
transmitter based on the received transmitter information, and
allows a user to select whether or not to receive an image from the
image communication device that has transmitted the transmitter
information. The destination information transmission control means
transmits as destination information indicating a destination, its
own identification information to the image communication device
selected by the selection means as the transmitter from which an
image is to be received. The image reception means receives an
image transmitted from the image communication device to which the
destination information has been transmitted. The image storage
control means causes the image storage means to store the image
received by the image reception means. When the
transmission/reception selection means selects transmission of an
image to another image communication device, the image
communication program causes the computer to further function as:
transmitter information transmission control means; destination
information reception control means; destination determination
means; and image transmission means. The transmitter information
transmission control means transmits as the transmitter information
indicating the transmitter, its own identification information to
other unspecified image communication devices. The destination
information reception control means receives identification
information of another image communication device from another
image communication device as the destination information
indicating the destination. The destination determination means
determines the image communication device to serve as the
destination, based on the received destination information. The
image transmission means transmits at least one of images stored in
the image storage means to the destination determined by the
destination determination means.
[1440] In addition, according to the image communication device and
the image communication program according to an aspect similar to
the sixth aspect of the present invention, the same effect as in
the image communication system described above can be achieved.
[1441] <Seventh Aspect>
[1442] According to the seventh aspect of the present invention, an
information processing program executed in a computer (1) setting a
value of at least one parameter based on an input from an input
device (13) is provided. The information processing program causes
the computer (1) to function as: first change operation accepting
means (SD 110) for accepting an operation of change from a position
in accordance with a current value of the parameter within a
prescribed display area (250) in a prescribed screen (500, 501,
502, 503); first update means (SD114, SD115) for gradually updating
the parameter from the current value based on the operation of
change accepted by the first change operation accepting means;
second change operation accepting means (SD111) for accepting an
operation of change to a position in accordance with a desired
value of the parameter within the prescribed display area; and
second update means (SD112, SD115) for updating the parameter from
the current value to the desired value based on the operation of
change accepted by the second change operation accepting means. In
addition, the second update means updates the parameter from the
current value to the desired value (SD115) when the desired value
is smaller than the current value of the parameter (SD111, SD112)
and the second update means does not update the parameter from the
current value to the desired value (SD113) when the desired value
is greater than the current value of the parameter (SD111,
SD113).
[1443] According to this aspect, the following seventh problem can
be solved.
[1444] (Seventh Problem)
[1445] In a general media player, the user cannot know only from
appearance, the highest volume in a volume adjustment portion and
association between the volume adjustment portion and the volume.
Further, even when the volume is the same, how sound is heard
varies depending on variation in an ambient environment, and it is
difficult to immediately change the volume to a user's desired
volume.
[1446] In this regard, if the volume cannot immediately be changed
to the user's desired volume, in particular, if the volume is
higher than the user's desired volume, the user and a person around
the user may feel uncomfortable, that is, stress may be
imposed.
[1447] (Function and Effect According to Seventh Aspect)
[1448] According to the seventh aspect, in order to address the
seventh problem above, an information processing program and an
information processing device implementing a user interface
suitable for a user's operation in an operation to change setting
of a parameter are provided.
[1449] According to the seventh aspect of the present invention,
when a slider operation which is an operation of change from the
position in accordance with the current value is accepted through
the input device (13), the parameter is gradually updated in
accordance with a slider position. On the other hand, when the
operation of change to the position in accordance with the desired
value is accepted through the input device (13), the parameter is
updated from the current value to the desired value if the desired
value is smaller than the current value of the parameter, and the
parameter is not updated from the current value to the desired
value if the desired value is greater than the current value of the
parameter.
[1450] Therefore, the user can change the parameter through a
series of operations of the input device (13). Specifically, the
parameter can gradually be changed from the current value to a
greater value or a smaller value. On the other hand, a change
operation input for abruptly increasing the parameter from the
current value to a greater value is prohibited. Thus, by
prohibiting the change operation for abruptly increasing the
parameter value to a greater value in the operation to change
setting of the parameter, stress imposed on a user or the like due
to abrupt change in the parameter caused by an erroneous operation
is suppressed and the user interface suitable for a user's
operation can be implemented.
[1451] In addition, according to an aspect similar to the seventh
aspect of the present invention, an information processing program
executed in a computer setting a value of at least one parameter
based on an input from an input device (13) is provided. The
information processing program causes the computer (10) to function
as: slider display means (SD32, SD70, SD91) for displaying a slider
(252) indicating a current value of the parameter within a
prescribed display area (550) in a prescribed screen (500, 501,
502, 503); first movement operation accepting means (SD110, SD114)
for accepting a continuous operation of movement from a position of
the slider (552) in accordance with the current value of the
parameter; second movement operation accepting means (SD110, SD111)
for accepting an operation of movement to a position of the slider
(552) in accordance with a desired value of the parameter within
the prescribed display area; and update means (SD115) for updating
the parameter to a value in accordance with a position of the
slider (552) resulting from movement in accordance with the
accepted operation of movement. The second movement operation
accepting means accepts the operation of movement to a desired
position of the slider (552) (SD112) when the slider moves in a
direction of decrease from the current value of the parameter and
the second movement operation accepting means does not accept the
operation of movement to the desired position of the slider (SD113)
when the slider moves in a direction of increase from the current
value of the parameter.
[1452] According to this similar aspect, when the continuous
operation of movement from the position of the slider (552) in
accordance with the current value or an operation of movement to
the position of the slider in accordance with the desired value is
accepted through the input device (13), the parameter is updated to
the value in accordance with the position of the slider (552)
resulting from movement. When the operation to move the slider
(552) through the input device (13) is such that the slider moves
in a direction of decrease from the current value, the operation of
movement to the desired position is accepted, whereas when the
operation to move the slider (552) through the input device (13) is
such that the slider moves in a direction of increase from the
current value, the operation of movement to the desired position is
not accepted.
[1453] Therefore, the user can change the parameter through a
series of operations of the input device (13). Specifically, by
continuously moving the slider, the parameter can gradually be
changed from the current value to a greater value or a smaller
value. On the other hand, when the slider is operated to move to
the position in accordance with the desired value, an operation of
movement in a direction of increase from the current value of the
parameter is prohibited. Thus, by prohibiting the operation of
movement to abruptly increase the parameter value to a greater
value in the operation to change setting of the parameter, stress
imposed on the user or the like due to abrupt change in the
parameter caused by an erroneous operation is suppressed and the
user interface suitable for a user's operation can be
implemented.
[1454] According to a more preferred aspect of the seventh aspect,
the input device is a pointing device (27). According to this
aspect, as the user provides input to an arbitrary position on a
touch panel by using a touch pen (27), user's operability in
selection is improved.
[1455] According to a more preferred aspect of the seventh aspect,
means for updating the parameter from the current value to the
desired value based on the operation of change to a position
corresponding to the desired information processing value gradually
updates the parameter from the current value. According to this
aspect, when the parameter is updated from the current value to the
desired value as well, the parameter is gradually updated, so that
variation of the parameter can be smooth and hence natural.
[1456] According to a more preferred aspect of the seventh aspect,
the computer sets values of a plurality of types of parameters
based on the input from the input device (13). The values of the
plurality of types of parameters are associated with arbitrary
positions within the prescribed display area, respectively.
[1457] According to this aspect, as association with the plurality
of types of parameters is established, setting of the parameter
through the input device can be made in a simplified manner.
[1458] In particular, the prescribed display area is a
multi-dimensional area in accordance with the number of types of
parameters set by the computer. Thus, as the parameter is displayed
in a dimension in accordance with the number of types of
parameters, the position of each parameter can readily be
recognized.
[1459] According to a more preferred aspect of the seventh aspect,
the parameter corresponds to a volume level of sound output from an
output device of the computer. According to this aspect, abrupt
increase in volume from the current volume, which leads to
uncomfortable feeling, that is, stress imposed on the user and a
person around the user, can be suppressed.
[1460] According to a more preferred aspect of the seventh aspect,
the parameter corresponds to duration of a file reproduced in the
computer. According to this aspect, start of reproduction from a
position where reproduction has not yet been carried out is avoided
and having the user feel uncomfortable can be suppressed.
[1461] According to another aspect similar to the seventh aspect of
the present invention, an information processing device (10)
setting a value of at least one parameter based on an input from an
input device (13) is provided. The information processing device
(10) includes: first change operation accepting means (552, SD110,
SD114) for accepting an operation of change from a position in
accordance with a current value of the parameter, within a
prescribed display area (550) in a prescribed screen (500, 501,
502, 503); first update means (SD114, SD115) for gradually updating
the parameter from the current value based on the operation of
change accepted by the first change operation accepting means;
second change operation accepting means (554, 555) for accepting an
operation of change to a position in accordance with a desired
value of the parameter within the prescribed display area; and
second update means (SD 111, SD 112, SD 115) for updating the
parameter from the current value to the desired value based on the
operation of change accepted by the second change operation
accepting means. The second update means updates the parameter from
the current value to the desired value when the desired value is
smaller than the current value of the parameter (554) and the
second update means does not update the parameter from the current
value to the desired value when the desired value is greater than
the current value of the parameter (555) (SD113).
[1462] According to yet another aspect similar to the seventh
aspect of the present invention, an information processing device
setting a value of at least one parameter based on an input from an
input device (13) is provided. The information processing device
(10) includes: slider display means (SD32, SD70, SD91) for
displaying a slider (552) indicating a current value of the
parameter within a prescribed display area (550) in a prescribed
screen (500, 501, 502, 503); first movement operation accepting
means (SD110, SD114) for accepting a continuous operation of
movement from a position of the slider (552) in accordance with the
current value of the parameter; second movement operation accepting
means (SD110, SD111) for accepting an operation of movement to a
position of the slider (552) in accordance with a desired value of
the parameter within the prescribed display area; and update means
(SD 115) for updating the parameter to a value in accordance with a
position of the slider (552) resulting from movement in accordance
with the accepted operation of movement. The second movement
operation accepting means accepts the operation of movement to a
desired position of the slider (552) when the slider moves in a
direction of decrease from the current value of the parameter (554,
SD112) and the second movement operation accepting means does not
accept the operation of movement to the desired position of the
slider when the slider moves in a direction of increase from the
current value of the parameter (555, SD113).
[1463] <Eighth Aspect>
[1464] According to the eighth aspect of the present invention, an
information processing program executed in a computer representing
an information processing device (10) capable of reproducing music
data in which an upper member (21) and a lower member (11) are
coupled to each other to allow opening and closing is provided. The
information processing program causes the computer to function as
music reproduction means (SD90) for reproducing music data, opening
and closing detection means (SD150) for detecting an opened or
closed state of the upper member and the lower member, and sleep
means (SD153, SD154) for continuing reproduction of the music data
by the music reproduction means when transition from the opened
state to the closed state of the upper member and the lower member
is detected by the opening and closing detection means and
connection with prescribed external output equipment is detected
while the music data is being reproduced by the music reproduction
means, continuing reproduction of the music data by the music
reproduction means when connection with prescribed external output
equipment is detected, and stopping reproduction of the music data
by the music reproduction means when connection with prescribed
external output equipment is not detected.
[1465] According to this aspect, the following eighth problem can
be solved.
[1466] (Eighth Problem)
[1467] Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2003-216289 (Patent Document
1) shows a computer device implemented as a notebook PC which is a
portable terminal device, in which when the notebook PC is closed
(in a closed state), sleep processing is performed to set a sleep
state where operation such as display is stopped. On the other
hand, this document shows the feature that setting from a sleep
state to an active state is made when the notebook PC is again
opened (in an opened state).
[1468] In addition, this document discloses such a technique that,
even in performing the sleep processing, when the notebook PC is
connected to a reproduction device performing reproduction
processing of music data through a USB cable, an active state is
partially set in order to transmit necessary data from the notebook
PC to the reproduction device through the USB cable.
[1469] Therefore, even when the sleep processing is performed, the
sleep processing is not performed for a partial function relating
to reproduction processing of the music data.
[1470] In an information terminal device in Japanese Patent
Laying-Open No. 2003-216289 (Patent Document 1), however,
reproduction processing of the music data in the information
processing device has not been considered and it has not been
possible to perform reproduction processing convenient for a
user.
[1471] (Function and Effect According to Eighth Aspect)
[1472] According to the eighth aspect, in order to address the
eighth problem above, an information processing program and an
information processing device performing processing convenient for
a user in reproduction of music data are provided.
[1473] According to the eighth aspect of the present invention,
when the user closes the upper member and the lower member of the
information processing device coupled to allow opening and closing,
transition from the opened state to the closed state of the upper
member and the lower member is detected. When connection with
prescribed external output equipment is detected, reproduction of
the music data is continued. When connection with prescribed
external output equipment is not detected, reproduction is
stopped.
[1474] As shown in a typical embodiment, when the user closes the
upper member and the lower member from the opened state and
connection of prescribed external output equipment (typically, a
headphone) is detected, a reproduction function is continued and
hence an audio signal is output from the headphone. Therefore, as
the audio signal is not output from a speaker or the like of the
device, the user and a person around the user do not feel
uncomfortable. In addition, the reproduction function is continued
while connection with the headphone is detected, and otherwise,
i.e., when connection with the headphone is not detected, the sleep
state where the reproduction function is stopped is set, which is
convenient for the user who has been expecting transition to the
sleep state where reproduction is stopped by closing the
device.
[1475] According to a more preferred aspect of the eighth aspect,
this information program further causes the computer to function as
continuous reproduction accepting means (517, SD161) for accepting
a setting instruction indicating continuous reproduction of music
data. When the opening and closing detection means detects
transition from the opened state to the closed state of the upper
member and the lower member and the setting instruction is
accepted, the music reproduction means carries out continuous
reproduction of the music data (SD162), and when the setting
instruction is not accepted, the music reproduction means stops
reproduction of the music data (SD163) at the timing of end of
reproduction of the music data that is currently being carried
out.
[1476] According to this aspect, when the user provides input of
the setting instruction indicating continuous reproduction of the
music data and transition from the opened state to the closed state
of the upper member and the lower member is detected, reproduction
of the music data is continuously carried out. When input of the
setting instruction is not provided, reproduction of the music data
is stopped at the timing of end of reproduction of the music data
that is currently being carried out.
[1477] As shown in a typical embodiment, when the user selects
"reproduction mode" switching icon 517 to select a reproduction
mode of repeated reproduction, that is, the reproduction mode in
which reproduction of the music data is continuously carried out,
reproduction of the music data is continued. When the user selects
a reproduction mode other than that, reproduction is stopped at the
timing of end of reproduction of the music data that is currently
being carried out. Thus, as whether to continue reproduction or not
is determined based on the setting instruction indicating
continuous reproduction provided by the user, reproduction as
intended by the user can be carried out. In addition, as
reproduction is stopped at the timing of end of reproduction of the
music data that is currently being carried out, reproduction can
end without having the user feel uncomfortable.
[1478] According to a more preferred aspect of the eighth aspect,
this information processing program further causes the computer to
function as reproduction setting accepting means (561, SD212,
SD213) for accepting a setting instruction to switch between
stereophonic reproduction and monaural reproduction in reproduction
of music data by the music reproduction means. When the setting
instruction is accepted and connection with prescribed external
output equipment is detected, the music reproduction means carries
out reproduction in accordance with the setting instruction, and
when connection with prescribed external output equipment is not
detected, the music reproduction means carries out stereophonic
reproduction (SD214, SD215).
[1479] According to this aspect, the reproduction setting means for
accepting a setting instruction to switch between stereophonic
reproduction and monaural reproduction in reproduction of the music
data functions, and when connection with prescribed external output
equipment is detected, stereophonic reproduction or monaural
reproduction is carried out in accordance with the setting
instruction.
[1480] As shown in a typical embodiment, when the user selects
function selection icon 561 of "headphone" in reproduction through
external output equipment (typically, a headphone) and switches to
the headphone, reproduction processing appropriate for a type of
the headphone can be selected.
[1481] According to a more preferred aspect of the eighth aspect,
this information processing program further causes the computer to
function as adjustment means (SD141) for adjusting a prescribed
frequency band of music data to be reproduced by the music
reproduction means when connection with prescribed external output
equipment is detected (SD140).
[1482] According to this aspect, when connection with external
output equipment (typically, a headphone) is detected, the
adjustment means for adjusting a prescribed frequency band of music
data to be reproduced functions.
[1483] As shown in a typical embodiment, equalization processing is
performed when the user attaches external output equipment
(typically, a headphone), so that reproduction can be carried out
without having the user feel uncomfortable by adjusting a
prescribed frequency band even when acoustic characteristics are
significantly changed owing to attachment of the headphone.
[1484] According to a more preferred aspect of the eighth aspect,
this information processing program further causes the computer to
function as adjustment means for adjusting a prescribed tone of
music data to be reproduced by the music reproduction means when
connection with prescribed external output equipment is
detected.
[1485] According to this aspect, when connection with external
output equipment (typically, a headphone) is detected, the
adjustment means for adjusting a prescribed tone of music data to
be reproduced functions.
[1486] As shown in a typical embodiment, when the user attaches
external output equipment (typically, a headphone), reproduction
can be carried out without having the user feel uncomfortable, for
example, in such a manner that sound of high key that gives no
uncomfortable feeling in reproduction from the speaker but sounds
too high in listening through the headphone is replaced with
different sound of lower key, or sound accompanying noise in
listening through the headphone is replaced with different
sound.
[1487] According to a more preferred aspect of the eighth aspect,
this information processing program further causes the computer to
function as adjustment means for adjusting a volume of music data
to be reproduced by the music reproduction means when connection
with prescribed external output equipment is detected.
[1488] According to this aspect, when connection with external
output equipment (typically, a headphone) is detected, the
adjustment means for adjusting a volume of music data to be
reproduced functions.
[1489] As shown in a typical embodiment, when the user attaches
external output equipment (typically, a headphone), reproduction
can be carried out without having the user feel uncomfortable, for
example, in such a manner that an audio signal reproduced in
balance without giving uncomfortable feeling in reproduction from
the speaker but reproduced in poor volume balance in listening
through the headphone is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the
volume thereof to attain balance.
[1490] According to a more preferred aspect of the eighth aspect,
sleep means stops at least a part of a display function when the
opening and closing detection means detects transition from the
opened state to the closed state of the upper member and the lower
member.
[1491] According to this aspect, when transition from the opened
state to the closed state of the upper member and the lower member
is detected, at least a part of the display function is
stopped.
[1492] As shown in a typical embodiment, when the user sets the
upper member and the lower member from the opened state to the
closed state, a sleep state where an unnecessary function is
stopped by stopping at least a part of the display function is set
and hence power consumption can be lowered.
[1493] According to another aspect of the eighth aspect, an
information processing program executed in a computer representing
an information processing device capable of reproducing music data
causes a computer to function as music reproduction means for
reproducing music data and reproduction setting accepting means for
accepting a setting instruction to switch between stereophonic
reproduction and monaural reproduction in reproduction of music
data by the music reproduction means. When the setting instruction
is accepted and connection with prescribed external output
equipment is detected, the music reproduction means carries out
reproduction in accordance with the setting instruction, and when
connection with prescribed external output equipment is not
detected, the music reproduction means carries out stereophonic
reproduction.
[1494] According to this aspect, reproduction setting means for
accepting a setting instruction to switch between stereophonic
reproduction and monaural reproduction in reproduction of the music
data functions, and when connection with prescribed external output
equipment is detected, stereophonic reproduction or monaural
reproduction is carried out in accordance with the setting
instruction.
[1495] As shown in a typical embodiment, when the user selects
function selection icon 561 of "headphone" in reproduction through
external output equipment (typically, a headphone) and switches to
the headphone, reproduction processing appropriate for a type of
the headphone can be selected.
[1496] According to yet another aspect of the eighth aspect, an
information processing device (10) capable of reproducing music
data in which an upper member (21) and a lower member (11) are
coupled to each other to allow opening and closing includes music
reproduction means (SD90) for reproducing music data, opening and
closing detection means (SD150) for detecting an opened or closed
state of the upper member and the lower member, and sleep means
(SD153, SD154) for continuing reproduction of the music data by the
music reproduction means when transition from the opened state to
the closed state of the upper member and the lower member is
detected by the opening and closing detection means and connection
with prescribed external output equipment is detected while the
music data is being reproduced by the music reproduction means,
continuing reproduction of the music data by the music reproduction
means when connection with prescribed external output equipment is
detected, and stopping reproduction of the music data by the music
reproduction means when connection with prescribed external output
equipment is not detected.
[1497] According to this yet another aspect, an information
processing device capable of reproducing music data includes music
reproduction means for reproducing music data and reproduction
setting accepting means (SD261, SD212, SD213) for accepting a
setting instruction to switch between stereophonic reproduction and
monaural reproduction in reproduction of music data by the music
reproduction means. When the setting instruction is accepted and
connection with prescribed external output equipment is detected,
the music reproduction means carries out reproduction in accordance
with the setting instruction, and when connection with prescribed
external output equipment is not detected, the music reproduction
means carries out stereophonic reproduction (SD214, SD215).
[1498] It should be understood that the embodiments disclosed
herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The
scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the
claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to
include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent
to the terms of the claims.
* * * * *